4 TS 4689 Fine Coal Circuit R2

CHASNALLA COAL WASHERY
CHASNALLA
UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT FOR YIELD

IMPROVEMENT
TENDER SPECIFICATION
FOR
UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT
PACKAGE NO.1
STEEL AUTHORITY OF INDIA LIMITED

CENTRE FOR ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY
RANCHI - 834002
JUNE 2022 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

CONTENTS - CHAPTERS
Chapter No. Description Page No.
1 Introduction 1.1 - 1.4
2 Scope of Work 2.1 - 2.31
3 Technical Specification 3.1- 3.143
4. Commissioning and Performance Guarantee 4.1-4.4
Annexures
Schedules
Drawings
PACKAGE LEADER(PL) TASK FORCE LEADER(TFL) HOD (PL)
ARUN GOPINATH ARUN GOPINATH SALIL BHATTACHARJEE
CHASNALLA WASHERY CONTENTS CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2
UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT PAGE 1 OF 4

CONTENTS - ANNEXURES
Annexure No. Description No. of Pages
2.1.3-1 List of Acceptable Makes of equipment and 56

supplies (Indigenous supplies only)
2.1.9.2-1 Indicative Implementation Schedule 1
CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 2 OF 4 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

CONTENTS - SCHEDULES
Schedule No. Description No. of Pages

1.8-1 Declaration of site visit 1
1.8-2 List of exclusions 1
1.8-3 List of deviations 1
1.8-4 List of recommended spares for two
years normal operation 1
1.8-5 List of commissioning spares 1

1.8-6 List of special tools and tackles 1
1.8-7 List of first fill of oils, lubricants and
chemicals to be supplied by bidder 1
1.8-8 List of consumables to be supplied by

bidder 1
1.8-9 Details of authorised person of bidder

during tender evaluation 1
1.8-10 Requirement of construction water &

power 1
1.8-11 List of imported items 1

1.8-12 On-site training proposed by the bidder
(in mandays) 1
2.2.1-1 Detail of proposed technological

equipment (for better understanding of 2
the offer)
CHASNALLA WASHERY CONTENTS CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

CONTENTS - DRAWINGS
Sl. No. Drawing No. Description
1 CET RN 4689 CC1 00 001, R=2 Process flow diagram for proposed
new fine coal circuit
2 CET RN 4689 CC2 00 001, R=2 Layout of Chasnalla Washery

showing proposed facilities
3 CET RN 4689 CC1 00 002, R=0 Process flow diagram of existing

Chasnalla washery
4 CET RN 4689 CC3 00 001, R=1 Tentative general arrangement of

equipment in proposed flotation
circuit building
CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 4 OF 4 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The installed capacity of Chasnalla coal washery is 2Mtpa of ROM coal.
It is a coking coal washery of SAIL with coal feed from Chasnalla and
Jitpur Collieries along with coal received from various collieries of CIL. It
is proposed to upgrade the fine coal circuit of Chasnalla washery to
improve the clean coal yield. Chasnalla Washery currently is under
Bokaro Steel Plant.
1.2 EXISTING FACILITIES
1.2.1 Chasnalla washery has facilities for unloading and crushing of coal
consisting of 2 nos. of single roll crushers for crushing the coal to -
75mm size, coarse coal circuit for washing coal of size 75mm to 0.5mm
(consisting of heavy media bath and batac jig) and fine coal circuit for
washing the (-)0.5mm size fraction of coal (consisting of classifying
cyclones, spiral separators, thickeners and HF screens for spiral clean
dewatering). At present, the (-0.15mm) fraction and the spiral rejects
consisting of (+)0.15mm to 0.5mm fraction are routed to tailing ponds
through launders. Through this project, it is intended to recover the fine
coal that is at present getting lost to tailing ponds thereby increasing
the fine clean coal yield.
1.3 OVERVIEW OF THE PROJECT
A new fine coal circuit shall be installed to cater the fines (-0.5mm)
generated corresponding to 2Mtpa ROM coal feed. The rated capacity
of the new fine coal circuit shall be 75tph. The circuit shall comprise of a
new slurry thickener of 45tph capacity along with the existing slurry
thickener of 46tph capacity, slurry network, new set of classifying
cyclones of 75tph, flotation circuit of 75tph, 2 nos. of filter presses of
40tph each for dewatering of clean coal and reject coal respectively
along with conveying system for both clean coal and reject coal. By the
new scheme, entire fine coal (-0.5mm) shall be processed in the
flotation circuit to yield clean coal and reject coal.The new fine coal
circuit shall operate independent of the existing fine coal circuit.
1.4 IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGY
1.4.1 The complete job of upgradation of fine coal circuit is envisaged to be
executed through this single package.
1.4.2 This project is to be executed on a turnkey basis which includes a new
slurry thickener of 45tph capacity, new set of classifying hydrocyclones
of 75tph, new flotation circuit of 75tph, 2 nos. filter presses for
CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 1.1 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

dewatering: one for clean coal and one for reject coal. The system shall
also include slurry pipelines, knife edge valves, conveyors and junction
houses for conveying of clean coal and reject coal etc.
1.4.3 Details of pre-shutdown and shutdown activities with duration
Details of activities pre-shutdown as well as during shutdown and their
duration shall be mentioned by the bidder in their offer and also to be
shown in the implementation schedule.
1.4.4 Other site related details
Details of over ground facilities at erection site which may need
diversion and special handling equipment to be deployed at site, if any,
are to be clearly brought out by the bidder in their offer.
1.5 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
1.5.1 The intent of this tender specification is to furnish required details for
enabling the bidder to submit their best offers (technical & commercial)
as per the scope of work mentioned at chapter 2.0, technical
specifications at chapter 3.0, and commissioning &performance
guarantee at chapter 4.0.
1.5.2 This tender specification shall be read in conjunction with other
documents enclosed with the NIT.
1.6 SITE VISIT AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS
1.6.1 The bidder shall visit the site, study drawings/ documents and discuss
with the employer/ consultant, if required, regarding any technical
clarification and get satisfied with respect to the nature and extent of
work involved. The bidder shall also obtain first-hand information
regarding location, work terrain, climate condition, railways, roads,
airports and communication etc. before offering the bid for the job.
1.6.2 All materials/ equipment/ machinery/ fabricated items used in the
subject package shall be according to the specification given herein and
any deviation should be clearly brought-out in schedules of exclusions
and deviations attached with this TS. No mention of exclusions and
deviations shall mean that the bidder has accepted the scope and
specification given herein.
1.7 DRAWINGS AND TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
WITH THE OFFER
1.7.1 The Bidder shall submit along with the bid, drawings / documents / data
as per the following details:

1) General layout showing disposition of all major units and
interconnection with the existing facilities such as roads, railway
tracks, utility and power lines etc.
2) General arrangement drawings of all units, equipment and systems
with relevant dimensions.
3) Power single line diagram.
4) Process and mass flow diagram along with mass and ash balance&
water balance sheets.
5) Automation configuration drawing.
6) Manufacturers' catalogues/ brief technical descriptions of offered
equipment and bought-out items.
7) Schedule of quantity of equipment.
8) Delivery/ commissioning schedule (Bar chart/PERT Network).
9) Weight and mounting arrangement of each critical item/
equipment.
1.7.2 Drawings & documents listed are minimum requirement only. The
Bidder shall ensure that all other necessary write-ups, curves and
information, required to fully describe the equipment and system
offered, are submitted with this offer.
1.8 SCHEDULES TO BE DULY FILLED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE OFFER
1.8-1 Declaration of site visit
1.8-2 List of exclusions
1.8-3 List of deviations
1.8-4 List of recommended spares for two years
normal operation
1.8-5 List of commissioning spares
1.8-6 List of special tools and tackles
1.8-7 List of first fill of oils, lubricantsand chemicals to
be supplied by bidder
1.8-8 List of consumables to be supplied by bidder
1.8-9 Details of authorised person of bidder during
tender evaluation
1.8-10 Requirement of construction water & power

1.8-11 List of imported items
1.8-12 On-site training proposed by the bidder (in
mandays)

2 SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The bidder shall be responsible for execution of the jobs envisaged for
upgradation of fine coal circuit on Turnkey basis.
2.1.2 The scope of work shall cover design, engineering, procurement,
manufacture, fabrication, supply, transportation, insurance, storage,
handling, dismantling & removal of debris, construction, erection,
testing, commissioning, stabilisation and demonstration of performance
guarantee of the complete plant and equipment to the satisfaction of
the employer. The plant and equipment supplied shall be new and best
of its kind.
2.1.3 All indigenous items shall be as per the List of Acceptable Makes of
equipment and supplies, March 2022 furnished in Annexure-2.1.3-1
and as given in BSL’s acceptable make list attached along with NIT, if
any.
Also please note that
a) Where more than one Vendor is listed, the Contractor is free to choose
any of them, but it must notify the Employer of its choice well in
advance prior to appointing any selected Vendor.
b) The contractor shall not be permitted to propose a new vendor for
items where at least three approved vendors are available for providing
supplies. However, where at least three vendors are not available to
provide supplies, the contractor may propose additional vendors for
approval of the employer.
c) No approval of the Employer is required to be obtained by the
contractor for procurement of items that are not listed in Annexure
2.1.3-1 and BSL’s acceptable make list attached along with NIT, if any.
2.1.4 The equipment and facilities envisaged under this package shall be
located tentatively as per general layout drawings enclosed with the TS.
Layout of plant and equipment shall have provision for easy and safe
movement of operation/ maintenance personnel for operation/
inspection of the running plant. Adequate space for dismantling/
removal of equipment/ parts for repair shall also be built in the layout.
2.1.5 All the manufacturing/ fabrication works shall be carried out only on the
basis of approved drawings and schemes or as directed by the
employer. Approval given by the employer shall not relieve the bidder
of any obligations under the contract.
2.1.6 Wide Parallel Flange Beam (WPB) and Narrow Parallel Flange
Beam(NPB) sections, being produced by SAIL, shall be used. In case of

non-availability /non- suitability of WPB or NPB sections, tapered rolled
SAIL sections or built up sections using SAIL steel shall be used. This is
in addition to the relevant clauses of SBD with regards to usage of SAIL
steel.
2.1.7 Any equipment/ work/ service, which may not have been specifically
mentioned in this document but is necessary for completeness of the
work, shall be clearly brought out in the offer and included in their
scope of work.
2.1.8 Scope of Services
1) Receiving of equipment from bidder’s stores/ employer’s stores
and transportation to site.
2) Unloading of equipment at site, unpacking, cleaning up, and
checking for completeness and transportation to site for erection.
3) Transferring of centre lines and levels from standard benchmark(s),
including geodetic survey.
4) Filling of lubricants/ grease as per manufacturer’s instructions.
5) Supply of all erection consumables like oil, kerosene, cotton waste,
oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, electrodes, asbestos sheets,
asbestos ropes, sealing compounds etc.
6) Arranging tools, tackles, construction & erection machineries,
cranes and other handling & testing equipment, scaffolding,
temporary platforms, erection fixtures, skilled/semi-
skilled/unskilled personnel etc.
7) Required loading/ unloading / transportation of the equipment
part, which may require repairs at employer’s repair shop(s).
8) Arranging inspection of equipment at manufacturer’s/ sub-
supplier’s works wherever required as per approved QAP.
9) Arranging and rendering equipment and personnel to employer
for checking the correctness of the work in progress.
10) Submission of test certificates and data sheet from approved third
party testing laboratory or manufacturer respectively.
11) All equipment shall conform to the relevant provisions of Statutory
and other Regulations in force such as Indian explosives Act,
Indian Factories Act, Indian Boiler Regulation, State Factories Act,
Indian Electricity Rules, Central Pollution Control Board, Indian
Weights & Measures Act as applicable. The bidder shall provide all
necessary assistance to the employer to get all the installations

within the scope of supply approved by the concerned legal
authorities.
12) Any rectification / modification of existing facilities required during
erection of equipment.
13) The bidder shall be responsible for protection and / or diversion of
underground and all existing over-ground services, wherever
required and / or diversion of the underground services which are
indicated in the drawing made available to the bidder. In case
there are under-ground services which need to be protected and /
or diverted but are not shown in the drawing, the bidder shall be
responsible to execute the same at extra price, if any, to be
mutually agreed between bidder&employer.
14) Sundry works such as making of holes, grouting, chiselling of
holes/ opening through walls, ceiling, floors, steel structures, etc.
including providing inserts as per requirement, cleaning of site
periodically and at the time of final handing over.
15) Periodic transportation including Loading, unloading and
spreading the unserviceable material, debris & surplus excavated
earth with all lift and lead within plant premises unless otherwise
specified.
16) All instructions in the manuals for assembly, erection, testing and
commissioning of the equipment shall be in English.
17) Clearance of installations from the statutory and other concerned
authorities on behalf of Employer. The successful bidder shall also
assist in preparing application forms, providing necessary
drawings, documents, test certificates etc., including necessary co-
ordination with statutory and other concerned authorities.
2.1.9 Implementation Schedule
2.1.9.1 The project shall be implemented within a period of 14 months from the
effective date of contract up to commissioning.
2.1.9.2 An indicative implementation schedule is shown at Annexure 2.1.9.2-1.
However, the bidder may improve upon the same and submit a
schedule with their offer, showing all major activities, with respective
duration proposed.
2.1.10 Discipline wise scope of work has been elaborated in the subsequent
clauses of this Chapter.

2.2 PROCESS AND TECHNOLOGY
2.2.1 Bidder shall submit filled in technical schedule, the format for which is
enclosed as Schedule-2.2.1-1
2.2.2 A new fine coal circuit shall be installed to cater the fines (-0.5mm)
generated corresponding to 2Mtpa ROM coal feed. The rated capacity
of the new fine coal circuit shall be minimum 75tph. The circuit shall
comprise of a new slurry thickener of 45tph capacity along with the
existing slurry thickener, new set of classifying cyclones of minimum
75tph, flotation circuit of minimum 75tph, slurry pipe lines along with
knife edge valves, 2 nos. of filter presses for dewatering of clean coal
and reject coal along with conveying system for both clean coal and
reject coal etc. Process flow diagram of existing Chasnalla washery is
shown in drg no. CET RN 4689 CC1 00 002, R=0.
2.2.3 Layout
The proposed fine coal washing facilities shall be located in the existing
Coal washery premises in the adjoining location of existing tailing
ponds.
Existing tailing pond facilities shall be relocated to provide space for the
new fine coal washing facilities.
New slurry thickener of 45tph capacity shall be installed by the side of
existing slurry thickener.
The new flotation circuit building of approx. 29m X 12m size (the size of
new flotation circuit building is tentative and actual size shall depend on
the equipment disposition to be finalized by the bidder during detail
engineering) and tentatively three floors shall be provided on pile
foundations in the space generated by relocation of tailing ponds. The
tentative disposition of equipment in the new flotation building is as
mentioned. Slurry and reagent tanks in the ground floor along with their
pumps. Filter presses on the first floor. Flotation cells on the second
floor. Classifying hydrocyclones on the third floor.
The tentative layout and location plan showing the existing and
proposed facilities is shown in Drg. No. CET RN 4689 CC2 00 001,
R=2. The arrangement for the proposed new fine coal circuit is
indicative only. Bidder may consider a better arrangement considering
the facilities and propose in their offer.
If any changes are encountered in the ground level then the same shall
be brought to the existing ground level or required level as per the
technological requirement of the process.

Roads around the new facility is in the scope of the bidder. These new
roads shall be suitably connected to the existing road facility.
2.2.4 The yield or recovery of clean coal and tailings shall be as per the
washability and flotation data of the coal handled through the system.
For design of the system, bidder shall be provided with washability and
flotation test results of samples handled by Chasnalla before opening of
price bid.
2.2.5 Bidder shall carry out mass and ash balance for the scheme proposed as
per drg no. CET RN 4689 CC1 00 001, R=2 and derive the expected
yield and recovery of cleans and tailings through the proposed scheme
after taking into consideration the test results provided by Chasnalla
before price bid opening and of their own. This shall be submitted by
the bidder in the form of a detailed process flow diagram.
During design stage, bidder shall carry out a detailed study of the
existing process and carry out pilot based study of fine coal from the
washery for fine tuning of the proposed scheme and dovetailing it with
the existing washery circuit.
2.2.6 The main units proposed for the new fine coal circuit are as follows:
a) A new 45tph slurry thickener
b) A set of classifying hydrocyclones of minimum 75tph capacity
c) Flotation circuit of minimum 75tph capacity for processing -0.5mm
coal fraction
d) Dewatering circuit for separate dewatering with filter presses for
flotation cleans and rejects of flotation circuit.
The requirement of major equipment is broadly shown in the indicative
process flow diagram in Drawing No. CET RN 4689 CC1 00 001, R=2.
However, any other additional equipment necessary to achieve the
design parameters shall also be in the scope of the bidder.
2.2.7 The broad scope of work is mentioned below, however for details,
subsequent clauses of utilities, process control & automation, electrical,
civil & structural and proposed scheme mentioned in Chapter-3 shall
also be referred.
2.2.7.1 Thickener
Bidder shall provide a new overhead type conventional slurry thickener
of minimum 45tph fine coal handling capacity. The thickener shall be of
RCC construction on pile foundations. The thickener shall be complete
with rake mechanism, associated structural works, interconnecting inlet

and outlet slurry pipelines & valves, electrical and instrumentation
works.
2.2.7.2 Classifying Hydrocyclones
Bidder shall provide a new set of classifying hydrocyclones of minimum
75tph capacity suitable for coal handling and with a size cut of 0.5mm.
The set shall be complete with the overflow and underflow launder
boxes, inlet and outlet slurry pipelines, valves and equipment
supporting arrangement. There shall be provision for isolation of
cyclones individually.
2.2.7.3 Flotation cells
Bidder shall provide a new circuit of flotation cells of minimum 75tph
fine coal handling capacity. The flotation cells shall be in two banks.
Capacity of each bank shall be minimum 37.5tph. The system shall be
complete with the associated equipment like conditioning tanks,
reagent storage tanks, interconnecting slurry pipelines, valves, launders
etc. along with support arrangement for the cells, electrical and
automation works.
2.2.7.4 Filter Presses
Bidder shall provide two nos. of filter presses suitable for fine coal
handling application. Capacity of the filter presses shall be minimum
40tph each. The equipment shall be complete with interconnecting
slurry pipelines and valves, inlet feedbox, flocculant addition
arrangement, if required, supporting arrangement for the equipment,
electrical and instrumentation works. The filter presses shall be such that
each of the filter presses could be used for either clean coal dewatering
or reject coal dewatering application as per requirement.
2.2.7.5 Slurry pumps
Bidder shall provide all the pumps necessary as per the proposed
scheme of fine coal circuit. All slurry pumps shall be suitable for coal
handling. All pumps shall be complete with their drive arrangement,
pump and motor foundations, inlet and outlet slurry pipelines & knife
edge valves and required instruments. All pumps shall operate with the
philosophy of one working and one standby.
2.2.8 Process flow of the proposed scheme along with major equipment are
mentioned below:
a) A new 45tph slurry thickener
i) Fine coal slurry from the underflow of existing desliming screens
shall be received in the new slurry thickener along with the

existing slurry thickener. The new RCC overhead slurry thickener
of minimum 45tph capacity shall be installed by the side of the
existing slurry thickener as shown in layout drawing no. CET RN
4689 CC2 00 001, R=2. The slurry thickener shall be of
conventional type with no flocculant addition. Battery limit for
this project shall start from the inlet slurry line to the existing
slurry thickener of 46tph capacity. The slurry inlet line of existing
slurry thickener shall be replaced from the flange outside the
thickener. A new slurry line shall be provided with provision of
splitting the feed to both the existing as well as the new slurry
thickener. The solid % in the feed slurry is around 4.2%.
ii) The underflow thickened slurry from both the existing as well
new slurry thickeners shall flow through launders to a new sump
located between the thickeners.
iii) Slurry pumps (1W + 1S) of adequate capacity shall be provided
for pumping of slurry from thickened slurry sump to the new
classifying hydrocyclones in the flotation circuit building.
b) New set of classifying hydrocyclones of minimum 75tph capacity
i) The slurry from thickened slurry sump shall be pumped to a
new set of classifying hydrocyclones in the flotation circuit
building via a distribution box. Overflow from the cyclones (-
0.5mm) shall be routed through launders and pipes to a
flotation feed tank for further processing in the flotation circuit.
ii) Underflow from the cyclones (+0.5mm) shall be routed through
launders and pipes to a tank from where the slurry shall be
pumped to the existing high frequency screens of clean coal in
the heavy media bath building for dewatering. The dewatered
(+0.5mm) coal shall be then discharged to the existing clean
coal conveyor.
c) Flotation circuit of minimum 75tph capacity for processing (-)0.5mm
coal fraction
i) New flotation unit of minimum 75tph capacity consisting of

flotation cells, emulsifier, conditioning tank, flotation feed tank,
conditioning tank feed pumps, flotation cell feed pumps and
frother & collector day storage tanks. These facilities shall be
located in a new flotation circuit building to be constructed
besides the existing thickener and occupying a part of the
existing tailing pond as shown in the layout drawing. Handling
facilities of suitable capacity shall be provided in each floor of the
new flotation circuit building. The flotation unit shall be designed

to cater the overflow fine coal slurry from the classifying
cyclones.
d) Dewatering circuit for separate dewatering of flotation cleans and
rejects: 2 nos. of filter presses each of 40tph capacity
i) One filter press of minimum 40tph capacity along with its

associated equipment including slurry feed pump to filter press,
air compressor system, hydraulic units etc. complete with its
electrics and automation shall be provided for dewatering of
clean coal recovered from flotation circuit. This filter press shall
be located in the new flotation circuit building. The dewatered
clean coal shall be discharged through chutes and conveyed to
existing clean coal conveyor CC-3 through a new system of
conveyors and junction houses.
ii) One filter press of minimum 40tph capacity along with its
associated equipment including slurry feed pump to filter press,
air compressor system, hydraulic units etc. complete with its
electrics and automation shall be provided for dewatering of
reject coal from flotation circuit. This filter press shall be located
in the new flotation circuit building. The dewatered reject coal
shall be discharged through chutes to a reject coal conveyor
which shall dump the coal in the tailing pond area to form a
heap.
The filter presses shall be such that each of the filter presses
could be used for either clean coal dewatering or reject coal
dewatering application as per requirement.
e) The requirement of major equipment is broadly shown in the
proposed flow sheet Drg. No. CET RN 4689 CC1 00 001, R=2.
However, all the equipment necessary to operate the plant is under
the scope of the bidder. Bidder shall design the equipment
proposed to be installed with this project with a margin of handling
atleast 10% more than the capacity mentioned. The layout of
Chasnalla Washery with location of proposed facilities is shown in
drg no. CET RN 4689 CC2 00 001, R=2. General arrangement
drawing of equipment in the proposed new flotation circuit building
is shown in drg no. CET RN 4689 CC3 00 001, R=1.
f) Bidder to provide details in their offer and tentative water balance
has to be provided along with the offer. Additional requirement, if
any, shall also be clearly indicated.

g) Bidder shall furnish balance of products and water balance as per
their scheme along with calculation and its basis. The flow sheet
should be worked out in order to give maximum yield of clean coal
with clean coal ash at 15-18% and rejects at 60-70% ash at minimum
operating maintenance cost. Adequate flexibility should be provided
in the scheme so that even if there is any deterioration in quality of
input slurry in future, the proposed plant shall be able to take care of
it. It is also required to furnish Process & Quantity flow sheets and
water balance sheets.
h) Tentative list of major process equipment involved in the project is
indicated below. However, the bidder’s scope shall also include
supply of plant and equipment in addition to the items mentioned in
this clause as per their process requirement. Further details of the
equipment are described in Chapter 3 of this Tender Specification.
Tentative list of new equipment envisaged for the project:
Sl. Equipment/Facility Qty Min. Remark/Application

No Capacity
A Fine coal slurry feed
1 Conventional slurry 1 45 tph Overhead type and
thickener of RCC construction
2 Classifying 2 500 m3/h
hydrocyclone feed (1W+1 (tentative)
pump S)
B Fine coal slurry feed
classification
1 Distribution box 1 no
2 Set of classifying 1 set 75tph To separate (+)
hydrocyclones 0.5mm coal fraction
from fine coal
3 Hydrocyclone 1 no. 5m3 For collecting (+)
underflow slurry tank 0.5mm coal fraction
slurry
4 Flotation feed tank 1 no. 75 m3 For collecting (-)
0.5mm coal fraction
slurry, for pulp
density adjustment
and control feed to
conditioning tank
5 HF screen feed pump 2 nos. 50m3/h For pumping
(1W + (tentative) (+)0.5mm fraction

No Capacity
1S) slurry to existing HF
dewatering screen in
HMB building
6 Flotation feed pump 2 nos. 900m3/h For pumping (-)

(1W+1 (tentative) 0.5mm slurry to
S) flotation circuit
C Flotation circuit
1 Conditioning tank 1 no. For conditioning of
pulp after addition of
reagents
2 Flotation cell feed 2 nos. 900m3/h For pumping
pump (1W + (tentative) conditioned slurry to
1S) flotation cells
3 Flotation Cells 1 set 75tph For processing fines
of (-)0.5mm size.
4 Reagent system 1 lot For dosing of
reagents
D Dewatering circuit
1 Filter press for clean 1 no. 40tph For dewatering of
coal clean coal recovered
through flotation
circuit
2 Filter press for reject 1 no. 40tph For dewatering of
coal reject coal recovered
through flotation
circuit
3 Filter press feed 4 nos. For feeding slurry to
pumps (2W- filter press
one
each
for
clean
and
reject
coal +
2S-
one
each

No Capacity
for
clean
and
reject
coal
i) To enable collection of samples for analysis, the bidder shall have to

make adequate arrangement for sampling of the materials
mentioned hereafter at strategic suitable locations.
a) Feed slurry to both existing and new slurry thickeners
b) Feed slurry to classifying hydrocyclones
c) Feed slurry to flotation circuit
d) Clean Coal Concentrate
e) Dewatered product from Filter Presses
f) Effluent of Filter Press
g) Reject from flotation circuit
j) The horizontal pumps shall be mounted on a common base plate

with the motor and shall be directly coupled to the motor through a
flexible coupling. For pumps handling slurry, use of belt drives and
fluid couplings may be permitted. The motor capacity shall have a
margin of 15% over its BHP absorbed at the pump shaft at the duty
point. The efficiency of the pumps shall be considered 60 -70% in
the case of water pump and 30 -40 % in the case of slurry pump.
k) The design of the pump shall provide no chance of cavitations or air

locks and shall reduce the slippage loss to a minimum. The pumps
shall be self-regulating with great surge handling capacity and shall
be subjected to test as specified in therelevant standards.
l) The pump shaft and bearing shall be adequately sized to take the
unbalanced load during operation. The pump gland shall ensure
proper sealing without excessive tightening of the packing. Proper
cooling and flushing arrangement shall be provided wherever
required by way of separate booster pump.
m) Suitable isolating valve shall be provided on the suction and delivery
line of the pump. Non-jamming type check valve may be provided in
delivery line for water pumps. The suction and delivery lines shall be
so connected to the pump that stress is not transmitted to the pump
and ease of dismantle is maintained.

n) The suction pipe line shall be laid at a constant downward slope
from pumpcentre line to the suction chamber. The pump deliveries
shall be fitted with suitablecapacity pressure gauges.
2.3 MECHANICAL
2.3.1 Following equipment shall be included under the scope:
i) One belt conveyor system RC-1 of rated capacity 80 tph for
receiving of dewatered reject coal from the corresponding filter
press. Reject coal shall be discharged through the proposed belt
conveyor to the nearby ground to form heap for manual
evacuation. The conveyor system shall consist of open gallery with
walkway at both ends. The conveyor discharge shall be such as to
form a heap of around 5m height.
ii) Two belt conveyor systems in series i.e. CC-1 & CC-2 of rated
capacity 80 tph for receiving of dewatered clean coal from the filter
press for clean coal. Clean coal shall be discharged to the existing
belt conveyor CC-3 through the proposed conveyors. Proposed
conveyor system shall consist of two new junction houses and
closed type galleries with both sides walkway.
iii) All material discharge points shall be provided with discharge
chutes with liners.
iv) The belt conveyor arrangement is available in the attached layout
drawing No. CET RN 4689 CC2 00 001, R=2.
v) There shall be provision of discharging clean coal or reject coal
from either of the filter presses to both clean coal and reject coal
conveyor as per requirement.
2.3.2 Handling Facilities

Following handling facilities have been considered for maintenance
purpose:
Sl. Equipment Qty. Location

No.
1. Electric Hoist 4 One each at Ground Floor of
(minimum Cap. 2t) new proposed structural
building & drive end of
conveyors RC-1, CC-1 & CC-2
2. Electric Hoist 3 One each at 1st. Floor (Filter
(minimum Cap. 5 t) Press), 2nd. Floor (Flotation

Cell) & 3rd. Floor (Hydro-
cyclone)
3. Chain Pulley Block with 3 One each for non-drive end of
Geared Trolley ( conveyors RC-1, CC-1 & CC-2
minimum Cap. 2t)
Note:- Suitable monorail shall also be considered for all handling
facilities.
2.4 UTILITIES
2.4.1 Water/Slurry System
The scope of work related to water systems shall consist of following:
2.4.1.1 All process & transfer pumps & pipelines shall be in bidder’s scope. In
case bidder proposes any modification in the suggested flow diagram,
all related process & transfer pumps shall be covered in the scope of
the bidder. The pumping system shall be designed with at least 1
standby pump.
2.4.1.2 All the pumps (pumps handling water/slurry of SG less than 1.05) shall
be equipped with inlet/ outlet isolation gate valves and NRV.
2.4.1.3 All slurry pumps (pumps handling slurry of SG more than and equal to
1.05) shall have following features-
 Knife Gate valves shall be provided for isolation in both suction &
discharge side for both working and stand-by pumps.
 Knife Gate valves shall be provided for draining the pump suction
lines for all slurry pumps.
 Flushing arrangement for suction lines between slurry sump(s) and
pump(s) shall be provided.
 Drain nozzle along with knife gate valve shall be provided for
draining the slurry sumps/tanks.
 Expeller sealing system/ high pressure water sealing system for
protection of bearings. Necessary high pressure sealing pumps
(1W+1S) shall be in the scope of the bidder.
2.4.1.4 All related piping & fitting required for the proposed plant. Isolation
valves shall be considered at the tapping point and in each subsequent
branching.

2.4.2 Compressed Air Facilities
A dedicated compressed air station shall be provided for filter press
consisting of screw compressors (1W+1S), air dryer units, receivers and
associated piping to fulfill the requirement of industrial and instrument
quality compressed air.
2.4.3 Fire Fighting Facility
Fire hydrant system shall be extended for new installation. Portable fire
extinguishers shall be provided in new facilities as per requirement &
TAC norm.
2.4.4 Air Conditioning & Ventilation System
Split type air conditioners shall be provided to meet the air conditioning
demands of PLC room. Ventilation system in the form of dry
pressurized/ exhaust ventilation shall be provided in electrical premises,
pump house, equipment room etc. Ventilation system shall consist of
tube axial/ propeller fans, gravity louvers etc.
The ventilation system except for transformer rooms shall be designed
to keep premise temperature at maximum 30C above ambient. The
transformer rooms shall be designed for 50C temperature rise above
ambient. The capacity of ventilation system shall be decided on the
basis of heat load or 20 air changes/ hour, whichever is higher. Dry
pressurised rooms shall be designed to have positive pressure of 2
mmwc.
2.5 ELECTRICAL
2.5.1 Power distribution scheme
Existing 3.3kV switch board in Batac Jig building shall be extended by
one no. VCB along with suitable protection & metering. Also one no.
existing VCB module in the above 3.3kV switchboard shall be retrofitted
with new VCB along with suitable protection & metering. Outgoing
feeders of this switchboard shall feed proposed loads through two nos.
3.3/0.433kV dry type transformer of suitable rating &PMCC panel. One
no. new Power Cum Motor Control Centre (PMCC) has been envisaged
for the proposed facilities.
2.5.2 Electrical Scope

Scope of the bidder shall be as elaborated under Clause No. 2.1.2 above
for all electrics related to power distribution system, shop-electrics,

drives, control, automation, illumination system equipment for complete
& satisfactory operation of the plant complex on turnkey basis.
Any item or equipment not specifically mentioned but essential for
proper installation, reliable operation, maintenance and safety of plant,
equipment and personnel shall be included by the bidder in his scope of
work under completion clause.
Major equipment & facilities as mentioned below at various substations:
Sl.No. Description of Equipment Qty.

1. Necessary retrofitting of existing 3.3kV One Lot
switchboard in Batac Jig building by installation
of one no. VCB in existing cubicle with all
protection, indication and metering shall be
under the scope of bidder. Microprocessor
based relays shall be provided for protection of
feeders. The outgoing terminal of this retrofitted
VCB shall feed to incomer#1 of proposed PMCC
panel through 3.3/0.433kV transformer of
suitable rating.
All necessary hardware, cabling, termination &

services required for above & further
distribution of power as per requirement shall
be in bidder’s scope.
2. Extension of above 3.3kV switchboard with One Lot
installation of one no. VCB with all protection,
indication and metering shall be under the
bidder. Microprocessor based relays shall be
provided for protection of feeder. The outgoing
terminal of this retrofitted VCB shall feed to
incomer#2 of proposed PMCC through
3.3/0.433kV transformer of suitable rating.
All necessary hardware, cabling, termination &

services required for above & further
distribution of power as per requirement shall
be in bidder’s scope.

3. Two
3.3/ 0.433 kV dry type transformer ,indoor type,
of suitable rating(minimum size 2 MVA) to feed nos.
proposed loads through PMCC panel
4. PMCC panel with two nos. ACB incomers, one One No.
no. ACB bus-coupler & required nos. of MCCB/
MPCB outgoing feeders to feed proposed
facilities.
5. LT squirrel cage induction motors as per Lot
requirement
6. Variable frequency drives for motors as per Lot
requirement
7. Soft starters as per requirement for motors rated Lot
110kW and above
Note: However for motors where VFD is

provided, soft starter may not be considered by
the bidder
8. Hoist electrics including MCCB panel, festoon Lot
cable arrangement/ DSL, limit switches, cables,
crane duty motors etc.
9. Dual redundant UPS of suitable rating Lot
10. Control Desk Lot
11. Local Control Station(LCS) Lot
12. Complete Earthing system as per IS 3043 Lot

including main under-ground earthing around
the new substation building with earth pits, over
ground earthing in the substation premises.
13. Lightning Protection as per relevant IS of Lot
proposed facilities and Substation Building
including earth pits.

14. Illumination system including lighting panels, Lot
LED luminaires with complete mounting
arrangement, wiring, cabling etc.for proposed
facilities including the new flotation circuit
building, new slurry thickener area, PLC cum VFD
room and other areas where new facilities shall
be located.
15. Supply, laying, termination & jointing of 3.3kV Lot
(UE) grade XLPE cables and accessories
including jointing kits as required for interfacing
of proposed equipment with existing 3.3 kV
switchboard shall be in bidder’s scope. Cables
shall be laid in new cable trench/ over
headstructures. However existing cable trench/
tunnels/ routes may be used to the extent
possible.Any required civil/ structural work along
with cable trays, supports shall be in bidder’s
scope.
16. Supply, laying, termination & jointing of LT Lot
power and control cables with required jointing
& termination and cabling accessories for
proposed plant facilities & interfacing with
existing facilities. Cables shall be laid in new
cable trench/ over head structures. However
existing cable trench/ tunnels/ routes may be
used to the extent possible. Any required civil/
structural work along with cable trays, supports
shall be in bidder’s scope
17. Electrics for other proposed equipment under Lot
bidder’s scope
18. Excavations, foundations & any other civil/ Lot
structural work required for proposed electrical
equipment/ facilities as per requirement shall be
in bidder’s scope
19. Any minor modification/ retrofitting in existing Lot
panels or part thereof for interfacing with
proposed electrical equipment

2.6 PROCESS CONTROL AND AUTOMATION
2.6.1 The proposed process control & automation system is envisaged to
provide centralised monitoring & accurate control of various process
parameters for coal washery. Process control & automation system shall
broadly comprise of the following:
 Field instruments like pressure, level, density and flow
measurement.
 PLC system.
2.6.2 General
2.6.1.1 The capacity/ rating of various equipment/ system/ sub-systems
indicated elsewhere in the document while specifying the scope/
specification shall be treated as indicative only. The bidder shall carryout
his own design calculation/ system design, quote accordingly and
satisfy the Employer with the offered design.
2.6.1.2 The scope of work shall include provision of measurement and control
for all the process parameters covered in this TS. The list of
measurement and controls covered in Chapter 3.0 is indicative
only and the bidder shall consider all measurement and control
parameters as per the technological requirement of the system. The list
of measurements given in Chapter 3.0 of this TS shall be finalised based
on approved P&I drawing submitted by the bidder during engineering
stage.
2.6.1.3 The process automation system shall be generally based on two levels
of following hierarchical controls:
i) Level 0: Instrumentation for measurement and control of process
parameters. Instrumentation comprising of primary sensors like,
resistance temperature detectors, thermocouples, transmitters, Flow
transmitters , digital indicators, alarm annunciation, signal isolators,
relays, instrument panels etc. required to measure, monitor and
control the process parameters as per the required
range/size/application, complete with all accessories like matching
flanges, thermowell, connection assembly, root valves, bypass
valves, three valve manifolds etc.
ii) Level 1: PLC based process control system is being envisaged for
monitoring and control of the complete process.
2.6.3 Instrumentation and Control System

2.6.3.1 All Smart transmitters including pressure, flow, level transmitters and
other field instruments complete with all accessories like mounting
accessories, three valve manifold, isolating valves, terminal units etc.
2.6.3.2 Final control elements including control valves, Electro-hydraulic
actuators, Pneumatic actuators, valve positioning transmitters, etc shall
be considered.
2.6.3.3 The scope shall also include final control elements including intelligent /
smart control valves, dampers, actuators, I/P converter, Smart valve
positioners. These final control elements complete with all accessories
like process and companion flanges, isolation and by-pass valves, etc.
2.6.3.4 All Network components like network interface modules, UTP cables,
multiport switches, LIU, patch cords, optical link modules, converters, FO
cables, hardware based firewall, etc. as required.
2.6.3.5 Fault annunciation panel complete with lamp indication, necessary push
buttons and hooters.
2.6.3.6 Power supply and distribution equipment including UPS, transmitter
supply units, circuit breakers, isolating transformers etc. UPS power shall
be considered for power supply to the following:-
 PLC based process control system and its peripherals
 All microprocessor based instruments
2.6.3.7 Instrument panels, electrical equipment panels, transmitter cabinets,
field termination racks, auxiliary racks for housing various
instrumentation equipment completely wired as per requirement,
junction boxes, mounting accessories, electrical and mechanical
accessories like terminal blocks, terminal units, panel illumination
equipment including lamps, panel exhaust fans, door switches etc.
2.6.3.8 Supply, laying and termination of signal, power and control cables,
compensating cables for thermocouples, special cables, heat resistant
cables as required, cable laying accessories like trays, G.I. protection
pipes, supporting structures, clamps and other cable laying accessories,
identification ferrules, etc.
2.6.3.9 Approach ladder and maintenance platforms as required, for
maintenance of field sensors and final control elements.
2.6.3.10 Consumables, commissioning spares, special tools and tackles, testing
instruments/test kits, calibration equipment etc.
2.6.3.11 Independent system complete with earth pits, earth bus etc. suitable for
electronic earthing.
2.6.3.12 Impulse pipes, conduits, tag marks, root valves, isolating valves, unions,
erection hardware and non-standard erection materials as required.
2.6.3.13 The bidder shall restore, reconstruct and make good the existing
facilities which are required to be dismantled or removed for carrying

out the total job. The bidder shall rectify all the damages occurring due
to activities related to his scope of work.
2.6.3.14 The scope of work shall also include instrument protection box with
lockable door for field instrumentation to protect from rain and dust.
2.6.3.15 Special tools, tackles, testing instruments / test kits, calibration
equipment etc. Supply of one set of testing & calibration equipment
(measurement & simulation) for field sensors, transmitters & pneumatic
field devices.
2.6.3.16 HMI/Engineering station, network switch, PLC alongwith panel and
other equipment shall be installed in the proposed VFD room.
2.6.3.17 Minor civil works such as chipping/cutting of floors for making grooves
or laying pipes / cables, making holes / opening through walls, ceiling
or floors, drilling of holes through steel structures and frames, grouting
of frames, hooks on walls/ceiling etc. required for execution of work.
After erection, surface shall be made good by plastering / painting to
their original shape and finish
2.7 STRUCTURAL
2.7.1 General Description of Structures
The following gives only general description of structural units,
envisaged for the new fine coal circuit under bidder’s scope of work.
The structural work shall not be limited to these but shall be guided by
technical / technological aspects for completeness of total scope of the
work:
1) New framed steel structural building for installation of different
process equipment like hydrocyclone, froth flotation cell, filter press,
process and reagent tanks etc.
2) Covered conveyor galleries for product handling and despatch.
3) Junction houses for product handling circuit.
4) Open conveyor gallery for handling reject coal.
5) Modification of existing conveyor gallery CC-3, coming from the
heavy media bath building, for feeding clean coal from the
proposed new flotation cell building through proposed new
conveyors. Care shall be taken not to damage any existing structure
for carrying out modification work.
6) Steel works required for installation of new thickeners.

2.7.1.1 New framed steel structural building for installation of different process
equipment shall have the following facilities as per technological and
operational layout and requirement:
1) Floors at different levels to support different process equipment.
RCC slabs shall be provided over steel beams for flooring.
2) Monorail beams for hoists of specified capacities shall be provided
for handling and maintenance of equipment. Monorail beams shall
be supported from underside of floors above.
3) Cut out in all floors shall be provided for taking out equipment
parts for maintenance purpose from different floor levels.
4) Access and platforms shall be provided for maintenance of hoists.
5) Structural framing and bracing system shall be provided for
stability of whole structure.
6) For transfer of horizontal load, if any, floor bracing shall be
provided, RCC slab shall not be considered for transfer of
horizontal load.
7) Roof of building shall not be flatter than 1:10 slope. Roof of
building shall be of 18G CGS.
8) Stair and intermediate landings shall be provided for access to all
platforms and walkways along with safety handrail. Inclination of
stringer with horizontal shall preferably be 380 and shall not
exceed 400. Width of each flight shall not be less than 850 mm and
landing width shall at least be 1200 mm. 250 mm wide steps with
25 mm nosing shall be provided. Vertical distance between two
consecutive landings shall generally be restricted to 3000 mm.
9) Gable and side wall framing structures for 20 G CGS sheeting on
gable and side walls. Bottom of side sheeting shall be as per
technological requirement. Louvers and translucent sheeting shall
be provided on side walls for day light and ventilation.
10) Support structures for utility water and gas lines shall be provided.
11) Access and platforms for maintenance of light fixtures shall be
provided.
12) Safety handrails on stairs, floors and platforms shall be provided as
is necessary
2.7.1.2 Covered galleries for single belt conveyors,for feeding clean coal to
existing conveyor CC-3, shall be provided along with CGS roof & side
sheeting as per technological layout. For single belt conveyor galleries,

walkways with safety handrail shall be provided on either side of belt.
Clear height from floor level to the underside of the projecting roof
supporting structures shall not be less than 2400 mm. Chequered plates
shall be provided for walkways along conveyor galleries. For roof and
wall 18G and 20G CGS sheet shall be considered. Vertical bracing for
two legged trestles shall be connected from column flanges by
providing gussets. Two layers of bracing members shall be made to
work together by providing suitable interconnections like lacing or
battening. For natural ventilation, open apertures shall be provided
between under side of roof overhang and upper part of side wall
sheeting. Roof overhang shall be enough to prevent the ingress of
water through open apertures. Conveyor gallery shall, generally, be
structurally free from junction houses and any building structures. For
conveyor gallery slope 60-120, antiskid arrangement shall be provided
along gallery walkways over full width at a spacing not more than 300
mm. Steps shall be provided on walkway if the conveyor gallery slope is
more than 120.
2.7.1.3 Reject coal shall be conveyed through an open conveyor to be dumped
in the tailing pond area to form a heap. General arrangement of
structure shall be such that trestle leg or any part of steel structure
should not come under heap formation. Trestle leg shall be provided
with protection, like RCC encasing, to prevent any damage to it during
removal of reject coal by manual operation. Open conveyor gallery shall
be provided with walkway on both sides as per layout. Galvanised
grating shall be provided on walkways along with safety handrail.
Vertical bracing for two legged trestles shall be connected from column
flanges by providing gussets. Two layers of bracing members shall be
made to work together by providing suitable interconnections like
lacing or battening.Conveyor gallery shall, generally, be structurally free
from junction houses and any building structures. For conveyor gallery
slope 60-120, antiskid arrangement shall be provided along gallery
walkways over full width at a spacing not more than 300 mm. Steps
shall be provided on walkway if the conveyor gallery slope is more than
120.
2.7.1.4 Junction houses with RCC working floor shall be provided. Roof and
side sheeting, access stair and monorail for hoists of specified capacities
for handling purposeat head and tail ends shall be provided as per
requirement. Junction houses shall be braced on all four sides. Flooring
shall be of RCC slab over steel beams. Horizontal bracing shall be
provided to take care of laterally applied load on floors from conveyor
drives.RCC slab shall not be considered for transfer of horizontal

load.Handling facility shall be provided from under side of roof / floor
for maintenance of head / tail ends of conveyors. Access and platform
shall be provided for maintenance of hoists. Openable doors shall be
provided for monorails to be projected outside building. Inclination of
stair with horizontal shall preferably be maintained in the range of 380
to 400.There shall be provision for natural ventilation and day light in
the form oflouvers, translucent sheeting in wall etc.
2.7.1.5 Painting of all new steel structural work
2.7.2 General
2.7.2.1 Structural analysis and design shall be done in STAAD PRO. Bidder may
also carry out analysis and design in Excel spread sheet. Manual check
for design adequacy shall be provided for major structural members like
column, main beam and bracing. Softcopy of analysis / design of
structures are to be submitted along with load calculation and GA
drawings. All loads applied on structural frame work in STAADPRO input
shall be clearly shown in load calculation. Diagrams with dimension shall
be used, if necessary, while preparing load calculation.
2.7.2.2 To cover for future additional loading and any uncertainties, in general,
load on any major structural member shall not exceed 90% of its design
capacity, which means that utilization ratio shall not exceed 0.9.
2.7.2.3 All necessary site measurements and study of available existing
drawings, if any, as may be required for developing the aforesaid design
and drawings shall be deemed to be under the scope of the Bidder.
2.7.2.4 Bidder shall prepare necessary fabrication drawings / sketches for
modification jobs, as may be necessary, as per site requirement and take
necessary clearance.
2.7.2.5 Dismantling of any other existing structure / sheeting that may be
necessary at site is in Bidder’s scope of work
2.8 CIVIL
2.8.1 The civil works under the scope of the bidder are as follows:
2.8.1.1 Area clearance and land development to level the area.
2.8.1.2 Construction of foundations for the flotation building. Pile foundations
shall be considered for the same. Intermediate floors shall also be made
up of RCC slabs supported on structural steel framework. All floors shall
be provided with necessary floor finishes as per technological & utility
requirements.
2.8.1.3 Construction of a new RCC slurry thickener of required capacity and size
as per technological requirement. Minimum grade of water retaining

structures shall be M30. Pile foundations shall be considered for the
new RCC thickener.
2.8.1.4 Construction of the various pump & tank foundations.
2.8.1.5 Construction of foundation for the conveyor supporting structures &
junction houses.
2.8.1.6 Construction of RCC Cable trenches with RCC precast slab covers as
required.
2.8.1.7 Construction of new room inside the existing MCC room as per
technological requirements, by using glazed Aluminium framed
partitions.
2.8.1.8 Approach road to all new facilities and building shall be provided
andconnected to the existing road. Roads shall be concrete road (Grade
M30, minimum 300 thick with base and sub base).
2.8.2 Site cleaning and removal of the debris before the commencement and
after the completion of work.
2.8.3 Proper drainage shall be provided around the new facilities &connected
to the existing storm water system. All open drains shall be of RCC
construction.
2.8.4 Suitable protection work to protect nearby
underground/overgroundfacilities.
2.8.5 Necessary geodetic surveying work for transferring of reference lines
&benchmarks from the established reference lines and bench marks
inside the plant & fixing the same in the location of proposed works to
facilitate set up of layout & construction / erection works shall also be
part of the scope of works.
2.8.6 All embedment, inserts, jigs, fixtures, channels, edge protection angles,
steel beams, bolts including bolts manufactured from forged steel, bolt
sockets, nuts and washers, GI conduits etc. are in the scope of work of
the bidder which shall be provided for all replaced/new structures and
equipment.
2.8.7 The scope of work for the bidder also includes providing and executing
fool proof protection of sides of excavation pits against failures and
slips, protection of all adjoining foundations, structures, facilities,
equipment by necessary shoring, strutting etc. as may be suitable for
the location of the works.
2.8.8 All other civil works as mentioned under different discipline heads of
this document
2.9 DRAWINGS AND TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS

2.9.1 Following drawings and documents are to be submitted by the bidder
within 30 days of effective date of contract.
a) L-II network
b) General Layout
2.9.2 Following documents are to be submitted by the bidder within 60 days

of effective date of contract.
a) Process flow diagram for the proposed new fine coal circuit
2.9.3 The following drawings / documents shall be submitted by the bidder

after placement of order:-
Discipline Description
Process and 1 L-II network (To be submitted within 3 weeks
Technology of placement of order)
2. General Layout
3. QAP
4. Process flow diagram for the proposed new fine
coal circuit
5. Equipment layout
6. GA drawings of equipment
7. GA of belt conveyor system for clean and reject
coal
8. GA of handling facilities
Utilities 1. Pump GA & Datasheet
2. Performance and characteristic curves of
pumps
3. Compressor selection criteria
4. Compressor GA & Datasheet
5. Datasheet / catalogue of fire extinguishers
6. Piping layout drawing showing details of
support, valves, etc. along with BOM.
7. Pipe & Valve Schedule.
8. Datasheet / catalogue for air conditioning and
ventilation system

Electrical 1. SLD and schematic of PMCC
2.Earthing Layout
3. Motor Datasheet
4. Illumination Layout
Process 1. System configuration drawing
Automation
2. I/O list (PLC)
3. Control philosophy
4. P&I diagram
5. Loop Schematics
6. Equipment schedule
7. Data sheet for various equipment
8. Data sheet for orifice plate & control valve and
their design calculations
9. Control room general layout
10. General arrangement drawings for
panel/console
11. Power supply scheme, SLD etc
12. Annunciation and interlock scheme
13. Panel wiring diagram
14. Installation drawings for field equipment
15. Cable & GI pipe schedule and routing
16. Impulse pipe schedule and routing
17. Earthing details including RF earthing
18. Test & calibration certificates for individual
equipment
19. Any other information required by the
Employer/ consultant
Steel Structural 1. Drawing list for steel structural work
Work 2. General Arrangement & Design drawings
3. Design calculations under reference category
4. QAP for steel structural work
5. Fabrication drawings for record purpose only

Civil 1. General Arrangement drawings including insert
details.
2. Design calculations in STAAD and excel including
soft copies with formulas.
3. Reinforcement details
Manuals 1. Operation Manual
2. Maintenance Manual
3. Erection Manual
2.9.3.1 The drawings/ documents submitted after placement of order shall be
submitted for approval as per SBD Cl. No. 20.3. The drawings of sub-
suppliers shall be duly vetted and stamped by the principal bidder
before submission to employer.
2.9.3.2 Drawings shall be submitted in pre-decided and agreed sequence. In
order to expedite the approval of drawings, engineering meeting shall
be routinely held with the bidder at plant/ consultant’s location every 2
to 4 weeks for clearing of drawings across the table and sorting out
issues, if any. These meetings are to be held during the entire
engineering phase of a project.
2.9.3.3 Drawing / document submission methodology:
The bidder shall submit 2 hard copies of the drawing to the consultant
and 3 hard copies to the employer for approval in accordance with SBD
sub-clause 20.3.1 to 20.3.3. Within fourteen (14) days after receipt by
the Project Manager/Consultant of any drawing/ document, the
comment of Consultant along with the comments from the employer
shall be incorporated in the hard copy and necessary stamping shall be
done by the consultant. Scanned copy of the stamped drawing shall
then be mailed to the bidder by the consultant. Within seven (7) days
after receipt of the scanned copy of the drawing from consultant
through e-mail, the bidder shall take out 5 prints of the same and out of
these, 4 hard copies shall be sent to the employer and one hard copy
shall be sent to the consultant.
In case, the drawing is not approved, the bidder shall prepare the
revised drawing, after suitably incorporating the comments given by
employer/ consultant, and submit the same for approval, in 2 hard
copies of the drawing to the consultant and 3 hard copies to the
employer for scrutiny within 10 days from the receipt of scanned copies
from the consultant. The above process shall be continued till the
drawing is approved.

After approval and stamping, the consultant shall send the scanned
copy of the approved drawing to the bidder by e-mail. Within seven (7)
days after receipt of the scanned copy of the drawing from consultant
through e-mail, the bidder shall take out 5 prints of the same and out of
these, 4 hard copies shall be sent to the employer and 1 hard copy shall
be sent to the consultant.
In addition to the above, bidder shall also submit all the drawings in soft
format in suitable media for approval/ reference etc.
2.9.3.4 Format of bidder drawing list shall have minimum following fields:-
1) Sl. No.
2) Employer drawing No
3) Bidder drawing No
4) Name of consortium member
5) Area
6) Drawing/Document Name
7) Category (Approval/Reference)
8) Discipline
9) Stage (BE/DE)
10) Schedule date of submission
11) Remarks
2.9.3.5 Drawing list shall be in excel format. Any additional field, if required,
shall be added after Column 11. In case the drawing has more than one
sheet, employer drawing shall include the sheet number as part of
drawing number.
2.9.3.6 Editable format soft copies (3 sets) on CD/DVD of all “As-Built”
drawings (full set of drawings as per the approved drawing list) and
manufacturing drawings of critical parts, spares and fast wearing parts
shall be supplied by the bidder.
2.9.3.7 In case the proposed plant uses any process, equipment or software
which is covered under any patent and SAIL is required to have the
relevant user’s license for the same, the scope of work of this tender
shall include transferring such licenses to SAIL and indemnifying SAIL
against infringement of any intellectual property rights.

2.10 BATTERY LIMIT
Incoming
Process and 1. Fine coal slurry feed: The fine coal slurry
Technology feed pipeline shall be replaced from the
flange located outside the existing slurry
thickener towards the slurry thickener. A
new slurry pipeline shall be provided with
provision of splitting the feed to both the
existing as well as the new slurry
thickener.
Utilities 1. Existing clarified water network at a

distance of 50m from the proposed
facility of flotation system
Electrical 1. One no. 3.3kV feeder in existing 3.3 kV

switchboard at Chasnalla washery shall
be retrofitted with new VCB along with
suitable protection & metering. This
switchboard shall also be extended by
adding another VCB feeder along with
suitable protection & metering. Battery
limit shall start accordingly.
Outgoing
Process and 1.Clean coal from filter press: Clean coal
Technology dewatered in filter press shall be discharged
through a chute to a system of conveyors to
be finally discharged to existing clean coal
conveyor CC-3 through a new chute.
2. Reject coal from filter press: Reject coal
dewatered in filter press shall be discharged
through a conveyor to the tailing pond to
form a heap.
3. Underflow of classifying hydrocyclones:

Underflow of classifying hydrocyclones
consisting of the (+)0.5mm fraction shall be
pumped to the existing HF screens located
in the HMB building which is approx.50m
from the proposed new flotation circuit
building. The dewatered coal shall then be
discharged to the clean coal conveyor which
is at present catering to clean coal from
spiral separators.
Utilities 1. The effluent water from filter press shall
be discharged through launders to flow
by gravity to the existing ZLD thickener
2.11 EMPLOYER’S OBLIGATION
Construction water and power shall be provided to the bidder as per
SBD Cl. No. 20.4.2 and 20.4.3.
2.12 TRAINING
The bidder shall make arrangement for on-site training of employer’s
and consultant’s personnel in the area of design & engineering,
operation & maintenance of plant and equipment under the scope of
work as proposed by the bidder (in mandays) under Schedule No.2.12-
1.
2.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.13.1 The bidder shall furnish a plan of quality assurance and quality control,
both in respect of site works as well as supplies, which he proposes to
follow, for the purpose of assuring the quality of equipment and
workmanship at various stages, along with the Offer. The Quality
Assurance Plan and Quality Control Plan shall be mutually discussed and
approved by the employer. The same shall thereafter form a part of the
contract.
2.13.2 The employer may inspect the progress of work at the Bidder’s works at
any stage of manufacturing to satisfy himself about adherence to the
quality requirements. The Bidder shall provide full assistance in this
regard.
2.14 The bidder shall abide by the safety rules imposed by State Government
& Central Government as in force.
2.15 The bidder shall identify any hazard / risks which may result in fatal
accidents / severe damage to human health and safety, damage to
equipment and material resulting in loss of time and having cost

implication. The bidder shall carry out the above assessment and
formulate appropriate action plan to prevent such incidents. This action
plan shall be submitted to the employer before start of the work.

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Location
Chasnalla Coal Washery is located at Chasnalla in Dhanbad district of
Jharkhand state. Chasnalla Washery is situated at a distance of about 14
km from Dhanbad on the Dhanbad-Jharia-Sindri road. The nearest
railway station is Dhanbad in Eastern Railway. The nearest airport for
commercial purposes is Birsa Munda Airport at Ranchi.
3.1.2 Topography
The general characteristics of the area are more or less undulated with
several depressions and elevations.
3.1.3 Climatic Conditions at site
3.1.3.1 The average elevation of the washery is about 80m above mean sea
level. The region is characterised by a tropical climate with heavy rains in
June, July, August & September. Remaining months of the year have
normally sunny days. These conditions and relevant meteorological
data, which follow, shall be kept under consideration while designing
the machines and its components.
3.1.3.2 The meteorological data to be considered for designing are as follows:
1. Barometric Pressure - 739 mm Hg
2. Ambient Temperature
Absolute Maximum - 50 0C
Absolute Minimum - 8 0C
3. Relative Humidity
Absolute Maximum - 86 %
Absolute Minimum - 27 %
4. Wind Velocity - As per IS 875 (Part-3): 1987
5. Earthquake Factor - As per IS 1893(Part-3): 1987
6. Atmospheric Conditions - Dust laden
3.1.3.3 Maximum temperature and maximum humidity do not occur
simultaneously.
3.2 PROCESS AND TECHNOLOGY

3.2.1 Proposed Scheme of Process
The proposed new fine coal circuit shall consist of a new slurry thickener
of 45tph capacity which shall be installed by the side of existing slurry
thickener of 46tph capacity. This new slurry thickener along with the
existing slurry thickener shall cater to the feed input requirements of
new fine coal circuit. The new slurry thickener shall be of conventional

type without flocculant addition. The underflow from both the
thickeners shall flow to a common sump from where the slurry shall be
pumped to the new set of classifying hydrocyclones located in the
proposed new flotation circuit building. The new flotation circuit
building of approx. 29m X 12m (the size of new flotation circuit building
is tentative and actual size shall depend on the equipment disposition
to be finalized by the bidder during detail engineering) and three floors
shall house the classifying hydrocyclones in the third floor, flotation cells
in the second floor, press filters in the first floor and the various
intermediate storage process tanks for slurry and reagents along with
their pumps in the ground floor. This positioning of major equipment in
the proposed flotation building is tentative and shall be decided during
detail engineering. In the classifying hydrocyclones, feed slurry shall be
divided into an overflow consisting of (-)0.5mm size fraction and an
underflow consisting of (+)0.5mm size fraction. The (+)0.5mm fraction
has been seen to be varying from 2-30% of the fine coal feed. The
(+)0.5mm fraction shall be fed to the existing high frequency screens
currently used for dewatering of clean coal from spiral separators. The
dewatered (+)0.5mm fraction shall then be fed to existing clean coal
conveyor. The (-)0.5mm fraction shall be fed to the new flotation circuit.
Flotation cells shall be in two banks of minimum 37.5tph capacity each.
Clean coal from flotation circuit shall be sent for dewatering to a filter
press. Reject coal from the flotation circuit shall be dewatered in a
separate filter press. Dewatered reject coal shall be conveyed through a
conveyor and dumped in the tailing pond area to form a heap. The
dumped reject coal shall be evacuated on a daily basis by the plant
using dumpers. The dewatered clean coal shall be conveyed to the
existing clean coal conveyor CC-3 through a system of conveyors and
junction houses. The effluent water from filter presses shall be
discharged through launders to flow by gravity to the existing ZLD
thickener in Chasnalla Washery. Process flow diagram of proposed
scheme is shown in drg no. CET RN 4689 CC1 00 001, R=2.
3.2.2 Design Basis
The fine coal circuit shall be designed for rated capacity of
minimum 75tph of fine coal. The fine coal circuit equipment and its
associated facilities shall be designed on the basis of following:
Sl. Description Value

No.
1 Raw coal ash 30-36%
CHASNALLA WASHERY CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

PAGE 3.2
2 Quality and other parameters Prime/ Medium Coking Coal
of coal
3 Size of coal to be fed to the (-) 0.5 mm
fine coal circuit
4 Ash in fine coal (-0.5mm) 35-40%
5 Fine coal (-0.5mm) as % of 16-17% (Based on crushing
ROM coal of feed at 75mm, report of
CIMFR – Dec2013)
6 Percentage of (+)0.5mm coal 2-30%
in fine coal feed
3.2.3 Feed characteristics (fine coal)
3.2.2.1 A typical size distribution of fine in some of the coals as per CIMFR
report of April 2015 is as mentioned below:
Sample 1 Sample 2 Sample 3 Sample 4 Sample 5
Size (Mesh) Wt% Ash% Wt% Ash% Wt% Ash% Wt Ash Wt% Ash%
% %
+30(+0.5mm) 30.2 27 19.6 29.5 27.1 35.6 16.1 31.9 2.1 29.2
30-60 26.5 25 40.8 27.8 16.1 33.9 48.4 32.2 5.9 17.9
(0.5mm–
0.25mm)
60-120 16.7 24.4 16.0 24.2 40.4 36.0 18.1 37.6 10.5 9.2
(0.25mm-
0.125mm)
120- 7.4 24.7 7.6 10.8 7.3 34.5 6 36.3 7.9 12.2
240(0.125mm-
0.063mm)
-240(- 19.1 31.9 16.0 28.9 9.2 40.5 11.3 42.3 73.6 35.7
0.063mm)
100 26.8 100 26.4 100 35.9 100 34.5 100 30.9

3.2.2.2 Flotation test of the above coal samples were carried out at CIMFR and
based on the test reports the yield from the fine coal circuit is as
mentioned below:
Sample 1 Sample 2 Sample 3 Sample 4 Sample 5
Wt% Ash% Wt% Ash% Wt% Ash% Wt% Ash% Wt% Ash%
Concentrate 85.7 20.1 86.4 20.2 68.5 23.1 58.2 17.1 58.9 14.5
Reject 14.3 63 13.6 68.4 31.5 60.9 41.8 58.9 41.1 51.7
3.2.2.3 Size distribution for a typical feed to the washery

Size (mm) Weight % Ash %
9.2 53.6
+75
33.1 42.8
75-20
20-6 22.7 35.2
18.3 36.9
6-0.5
-0.5 16.7 40.0
100 36.2
3.2.2.4 Flotation data of fine coal (-0.5mm) feed to washery
Sl.No Size (mm) Weight % Ash %

0.5 – 0.25 48.8 41.8
1
2 0.25 – 0.15 13.0 38.8
0.5 – 0.15 61.8 41.2

10.2 33.4
1 0.15 – 0.074
2 -0.074 28.0 41.6

38.2 39.4
-0.15
PAGE 3.4
Sl.No. Concentrate Tailing
Weight % Ash % Weight % Ash %
58.9 14.5 41.1 76.5
1
3.2.2.5 The above data of fine coal have been given for guidance only.
However, Chasnalla shall conduct further tests on latest samples and
provide the test results before price bid opening. For further details, if
required by the bidder for finalisation of the offer, reasonable quantity
of sample shall be made available to the bidder on their request at
Chasnalla washery after purchasing the Tender Specification Document.
3.2.4 Products
The fine coal circuit shall be designed to produce one product namely
clean coal from flotation circuit. The clean coal shall have 15-18% ash
with surface moisture content of 27-30% from filter press.
3.2.3.1 Balance of Products
Bidder shall furnish balance of products and water balance as per the
proposed scheme taking into consideration test reports provided by
Chasnalla. The flow sheet should be worked out in order to give
maximum yield of clean coal at minimum operating maintenance cost.
Adequate flexibility should be provided in the scheme so that even if
there is any deterioration in quality of slurry in future, the proposed
plant shall be able to take care of it.
Main coal processing plant circuits and equipment capacities shall be
designed for best coal as well as for worst quality of coal.
Envisaged performance parameters for the proposed fine coal circuit
are as follows:
Sl.No. Item Description Unit
1.0 Throughput Capacity tph 75
2.0 Washing at 15-18% clean coal Ash
2.1 Clean Coal
Ash of clean coal from flotation
2.1.1 % 15-18
circuit
Surface moisture of the clean coal
2.1.2
from filter press % 27-30
2.2 Reject Coal
Ash in reject coal from flotation
2.2.1 circuit % 60-70

Sl.No. Item Description Unit
2.2.2 Surface Moisture of reject coal % 30
Overall organic efficiency for clean

3.0 %
coal recovery 96
Water balance
The bidder shall have to ensure water balance of the plant in the light of
the proposed fine coal beneficiation plant, so that water balance of the
existing washery may not get disturbed. Further, bidder has to provide
the required water balance.
3.2.5 All the plant, machinery, equipment and their component parts shall
comply with the relevant Indian standards laid down so far. Where such
standards are not available, these shall comply with the equivalent
internationally accepted standards like British/American/DIN etc. with
necessary modification as required to suit Indian conditions.
3.2.6 The selection, design & manufacture/fabrication of plant & equipment
shall be reliable, efficient, economical and shall be suitable for the
intended services, described in the tender specification. Every
equipment and machinery to be supplied by the bidder shall be
complete in all respects and shall be specified clearly giving all
specification such as size, capacity, make, material of construction etc.
As far as possible, units shall be such as to be enable inter-changeability
with similar units and thus reduce the quantity of spares requirement
subject to the condition that this shall be of adequate capacity & size of
duty involved.
3.2.7 Unless otherwise stated, all equipment shall be designed to withstand
minimum 20% intermittent overload over normal capacity for safe
mechanical operation.
3.2.8 Details of Main units along with the technical specification of the
proposed fine coal circuit are mentioned below:
3.2.7.1 Slurry Thickener
Parameter Unit Value
Feed to tph 45 (min)
thickener
% solids in % 3 - 5%
feed
Solid specific - approx. 1.9
gravity

PAGE 3.6
Slurry flow m3/h 880 - 1480
rate
Slurry specific - 1.01 -1.02
gravity
% solids in % 30
underflow of
thickener
Sp.gravity of - 1.16
underflow
slurry
The thickener shall be of overhead and conventional type with no
flocculant addition. The thickener tank and support structure shall be of
RCC. All materials used for manufacturing of thickener mechanism shall
be of carbon steel (IS 2062, E250BR Gr).
3.2.7.2 Classifying cyclone
The Cyclones shall be selected/ designed, manufactured considering the
media characteristics of slurry or liquid, other process requirements and
ease of maintenance.
The equipment shall include, but need not be limited to, the items listed
below:
Inlet Feed Distribution, underflow and overflow boxes as required,
Cyclone body, frustum, spigot, vortex finder, overflow and underflow
chamber
Cyclone cluster mounting frame and lifting lugs
Flanged inlet inclusive of transition from circular to rectangular cross
section
Flanged overflow and underflow outlets
Inlet pressure gauge suitable for abrasive slurry conditions
Feed isolating valves to individual cyclones, if required
The classifying cyclones to be ceramic lined and the vessels to be rubber
lined.
Receives :From thickener underflow pump
Discharges :
Overflow: To flotation feed tank
Underflow: To HF screen feed tank
Capacity: 75tph (minimum)

Classification at 0.5mm
3.2.7.3 Flotation cell
Flotation Cell supplied shall be complete with drive mechanism
comprising of stator, rotor, shaft, bearing housing assembly, drive and
driven pulley, belt guard, launders, platform on the cells along with
effective conditioner & emulsifier system.
The flotation cell shall generally conform to the following specifications
and duty conditions:
Capacity: 75tph (minimum)

No. of Banks: 2 (two)
Capacity of each bank: 37.5tph (minimum)
Receives :From flotation cell feed pump
Discharges :
Clean coal: To clean coal filter press feed sump
Reject coal: To reject coal filter press feed sump
Feed size: Less than 0.5 mm from overflow of classifying cyclones
Residence time: Flotation residence time should not be less than 3
minute
3.2.7.4 Filter Press
Bidder shall provide two nos. of filter presses suitable for fine coal
handling application. Capacity of the filter presses shall be minimum
40tph fine coal handling each. The equipment shall be complete with
interconnecting slurry pipelines and valves, press filter feed sump, press
filter feed pumps, inlet feedbox, flocculant addition arrangement, if
required, supporting arrangement for the equipment, associated air
compressor system, hydraulic system, electrical and instrumentation
works including PLC. The filter presses shall be such that each of the
filter presses could be used for either clean coal dewatering or reject
coal dewatering application as per requirement. MOC for various parts
of the filter press shall be such that it is suitable for coal handling
application.

PAGE 3.8
3.3 MECHANICAL
3.3.1 Belt Conveyors
Belt conveyor systems shall be designed as per IS 11592: 2000 unless
otherwise stated. Design criteria for belt conveyor system and
accessories shall be as follows:
3.3.1.1 Application
i) This covers general requirements for belt conveyors for handling
of proposed materials. Specific requirement and layout shall be as
per Technical Specification and drawings mentioned in this
document.
ii) The belt conveyors shall include all types of pulleys, idlers, belting,
drive unit, drive frame, head frame, tail frame, take-up unit,
coupling with guard, d.c. electromagnetic brakes and brake
assembly, short post, stringer channel, deck plate, seal plate,
discharge chute, skirt board, external scraper (sprung bladed
tungsten tipped with modular segment), internal scraper,
protection switches, protection cage/ guard, fasteners, etc.
3.3.1.2 Steel structure
i) Steel structure specified herein shall be applied to steel structures
such as conveyor stringers, short posts, head frame, drive frame,
take up structure, tail frame etc. The spacing of short posts of
conveyors shall not exceed 3000 mm. The construction of stringer
and short post shall be of ISMC 125 minimum.
ii) Construction of steel structures shall be rigid being made by
shaped steel and steel plate.
iii) Tentative size of junction houses shall be 5m x 5m for JH-1 and 6m
x 6m that of JH-2.
iv) Provision of conveyor gallery height and walkway shall be as per
the relevant IPSS standard.
v) Conveyors shall be provided with continuous MS steel deck sheet
of 3.15 mm thickness.
vi) Conveyors shall be provided with continuous MS seal plate of 3.15
mm thickness.
vii) Conveyors shall be provided with skirt plate at all receiving
/discharge points.
viii) Couplings shall be covered with protection covers made of 3.15
mm thick sheet.

ix) Tail pulleys shall be covered with protection cages.
3.3.1.3 Chutes and liners, skirt boards and hoods

i) All transfer points shall be provided with non-choking chutes and
shall be designed such that impact of the material on the conveyor
is minimum. It shall be designed to ensure continuous flow of
material to the centre of the belt. Chutes shall be made of 10 mm
thick MS plates with angle stiffeners and shall be rectangular
cross-section with welded connection. Chutes shall be constructed
in pieces of suitable size and length so as to facilitate their
maintenance. Chute pieces shall be joined together by bolted
flange connection with rubber sealing in between two flanges.
Inclination angle of chutes shall be sufficient to facilitate easy flow
of materials.
ii) All surfaces of other chutes shall be provided with 20 mm thick

wear resistant manganese steel liners conforming to IS 276: 2000
(Grade I) fitted with countersunk bolts. Snub pulley and belt
cleaner for head pulley shall be provided inside the chute to
prevent raw materials from spilling from the conveyors. Each chute
shall be provided with inspection hole with hinged cover at
suitable height and location. Adequate sized flanged openings
with inspection doors are to be provided near bends etc. where
there is chance of clogging for inspection and poking to clear the
accumulation. Chute construction below gate shall be such that
there shall not be any clogging of materials between chute and
gate in that zone.
iii) The width of skirt shall be two third of conveyor width. The
thickness of the skirt plate shall be 10 mm with 10 mm thick wear
resistant manganese steel liners conforming to IS 276: 2000 (Grade
I) fitted with countersunk bolts. Skirt shall flare slightly outwards in
the direction of belt travel to prevent material from wedging. The
height of the skirt boards shall be 450 mm and shall be sufficient
to contain the material volume as it is loaded on the belt. The skirt
plates shall be fitted with rubber strips (100 mm wide x 12mm
thick) of hardness 65-700 Shore A by means of vertically slotted
holes to permit adjustment. Cut pieces of conveyor belting shall
not be used. Rubber strips shall be so fixed as to facilitate easy
replacement. Edges of rubber strips shall have an angle for
providing better seal. All care shall be taken while designing to
PAGE 3.10
combine sealing with minimum belt wear. Rubber curtains shall be
provided at the exit of skirt to enclose the chute outlet. The
thickness of top cover plate shall be 3.15 mm.
iv) Discharge hood over the head pulley of the conveyors shall be
made of 6 mm thick MS plate with stiffeners and shall be provided
with hinged and gasketted inspection doors with a suitable access
to them. The serrated rubber seals shall also be provided at the
very inlet of head chute to minimise dust ingress. Discharge hood
shall be detachable type.
3.3.1.4 Belt cleaners
i) One no. primary belt cleaner of polyurethane type and one no.
secondary belt cleaner of sprung bladed tungsten tipped external
belt cleaner (with modular segments) shall be provided complete
with all accessories for the conveyor.
ii) One internal belt cleaner of V-plough type, made of mild steel flats
and hard rubber strips shall be provided for the conveyor.
3.3.1.5 Belt take-up arrangement

a) Vertical/Screw take up arrangement shall be provided for
conveyor.
b) Material of the take up weight shall be cast iron of maximum
weight 20 kg in case of VGTU/HGTU.
3.3.1.6 The spacing for idlers shall be as follows:

i) The carrying idlers shall be placed 1000 mm apart along the profile
of the belt conveyor.
ii) 1(one) no. 200 transition idler shall be located at the head as well
as tail end of the belt conveyor. The transition distance shall be
approximately equal to the belt width.
iii) Impact idlers each at a spacing of 400 mm shall be provided at
each feed point of material of the belt conveyor, along the profile
of the belt conveyor throughout the skirt length.
iv) Self-aligning carrying idlers shall be provided for the conveyors at
a distance of 15m.
v) Self-aligning return idlers shall be provided for the conveyors at a
distance of 30m or one set for smaller conveyor length.
vi) The return idlers shall be placed 3000 mm apart along the profile
of the belt conveyor.

vii) Pull cord switches including pull wires shall be provided for
emergency stoppage of conveyor. The first switch shall be about
4000 mm away from the driving drum and subsequently at not
more than 15 m interval. The pull wires shall run along the entire
length of each conveyor on both sides.
viii) Belt sway switches shall be provided to conveyor for protection
against excessive sway of the belt. A pair of switch shall be
installed near the head end and a pair near the tail end and in
between, a pair of switch shall be installed at 30m interval
thereafter.
ix) Zero speed switch shall be provided to tail pulley,
x) Chute jamming indicator switch shall be provided to the discharge
chute.
xi) All fasteners required for erection of conveyor system as a whole
including drives shall be supplied by the Bidder.
3.3.2 Rated capacity of belt conveyor system, RC-1shall be 80tph and that of
CC-1 & CC-2 shall be 80tph. Detail of the proposed belt conveyors shall
be as follows based on the attached tentative layout drawing:
Sl. Conveyor Power Lift (m) Belt Conveyor Details

No. (kW) min. Tentative Belt Length Belt Trough
Width c/c Speed angle
(mm) (tent.) (m/s)
(min.)
1. RC-1 15 3.00 650 40m 1.0 350
2. CC-1 11 0.00 650 30m 1.0 350
3. CC-2 15 10.00 650 45m 1.0 350
Note:- Conveyor system shall be designed with minimum 20% design margin.
Loading factor for each conveyor shall be considered as 70%.
a) Drive System
Drive systems shall be provided with motors, gearboxes, couplings
along with guard and other auxiliaries.
1) Electric Motors

PAGE 3.12
All electric motors shall be provided with 1000 rpm.
Calculation for kW rating of motors is to be submitted by the
bidder for reference after finalization of the GA drawings.
2) Gear Boxes
i) Gear box shall have helical gear with hold back facility.
ii) Gear box rating shall be 1.8 times of the absorbed
motor power or 1.5 times of the selected power
whichever is higher.
iii) The gearbox casing shall be of fabricated construction
and free from harmful defects.
iv) Breathers, inspection covers, drain out plugs and dowel
holes shall be provided at conveniently accessible
location. There shall be a provision for indicating the
level of oil. Dowel pins shall be supplied along with the
gearbox.
v) The joints of the casing shall be oil tight, dust proof and
waterproof.
vi) The bearings shall be of antifriction type.
vii) There shall not be any seepage of oil at the sealing
edges of oil seals.
viii) Oil splash lubrication shall be provided.
ix) Every gear box shall have a name plate bearing the
following particulars:
 Manufacturer’s name, trade-mark and year of
manufacture
 Designation of gear box indicating its size, reduction
ratio, input power, input speed and output torque
 Manufacturer’s serial number
x) Every gear box shall be accompanied with the following
information
 Specification and quantity of lubricant
 Bearings and oil seals used
 List and specification of wearing parts
xi) The Gear box input couplings, output couplings and
drive pulleys shall be assembled at supplier’s works by
the bidder and shall be despatched after dismantling
the coupling bolts only with half coupling fitted on the
respective shafts. Care must be taken while despatching

to avoid any damage to the mounted coupling or shaft.
Proper markings are to be given for easy assembling at
site.
xii) Hold Back Device

Inclined conveyor shall be provided with suitable hold
back devices (other than brakes) to prevent belt from
running back in case of conveyor stoppage during
power failure. Hold back ratings shall be minimum 1.5
times the maximum calculated torque.
3) Coupling
i) High speed coupling with electric motor above 30kW
shall be provided with fluid coupling or otherwise gear
coupling. All low speed coupling shall be provided with
gear coupling.
ii) Gear coupling shall be selected with a service factor not

less than 1.5 times the power rating of the selected
motor. Couplings shall be provided with coupling guard
iii) The half casing and toothed hubs shall be made of steel
conforming to C-45 of IS 1570 (Part 6): 1996 and shall
be heat-treated to a hardness BHN 241-280.
iv) The bolts shall be made of steel C-45 of IS 1570 (Part 2,
Sec 1):1979 in normalised condition and nuts shall
conform to property class 4 of IS 1367 (Part 1):2002.
v) Provisions shall be made for easy filling and discharge
of lubricants. The Bidder shall indicate the type and
quantity of lubricant to be used with each coupling.
vi) The coupling shall be marked with the following details
on the periphery of the casing:
 Manufacturer’s name
 Type and coupling number
vii) Bidder shall calculate the kW/100 rpm with a service
factor of 1.5, considering torque rating, maximum rpm,
suitable for shaft diameter of selected motors, gear
boxes and drive pulleys as the case may be and select
the couplings accordingly.
4) Pulleys
PAGE 3.14
 Pulleys shall be of welded construction as per IS 8531:
1986. End plates and bosses shall be of mono-block
construction as far as possible.
 All pulleys shall be as per the relevant IPSS.
 All drive pulleys shall be lagged with ceramic lagging.
 All non-drive pulleys (tail, take-up and snub) surfaces
shall be hot lagged with vulcanised natural rubber with
plain lagging. The lagging thickness shall be 10 mm.
 The Plummer blocks for pulleys shall be horizontally
split type construction made of cast iron. The Plummer
blocks shall be dust tight with double labyrinth seals.
Conical head shape nipples conforming to IS 4009 (Part
2) : 1981, shall be provided for greasing. Side covers of
Plummer blocks shall be heavy-duty metallic sheets. No
plastic components shall be used. All Plummer blocks
shall have 4 nos. of base holes.
 Minimum drive pulley dia. shall be 500 mm. Thickness
of the drive pulley shell and non-drive pulley shell shall
be minimum 12 mm and 10 mm respectively.
 All pulleys shall be supplied with antifriction bearings
based on the shaft diameter mentioned above.
 Fasteners of proper sizes shall also be provided for the
Plummer blocks.
5) Idlers
 All Carrying idler shall be provided with 35o trough and
return idler horizontal. Transition idles shall have
200/100 trough. The idler design shall conform to IS
8598:1987.
 Roller used in idlers shall be made from ERW steel tube
with thickness 5.4 mm. External diameter of the idlers
shall be 127 mm. The rollers spindles shall be provided
with seize resistant type ball bearings. The bearings
shall be adequately sealed and lubricated for life. The
rolls shall be supported from fabricated steel brackets.
Fixing arrangement of rollers with brackets shall be
drop-in type. For adjusting the alignment of the idlers,
slotted holes shall be provided in idler supporting base
plates.

 Idler rollers shall be waterproof, dust proof and weather
proof against a high velocity water jet. All idlers shall be
provided with minimum double labyrinth dust seal.
 Impact idlers used at the loading and transfer point
shall be so designed as to avoid direct impact and belt
damage to the carrier. The material used in construction
of this type of idlers shall be of resilient type.
 The self-aligning idlers shall be direct acting type,
complete with actuating rollers fitted with the ball
bearings. The idler frame shall be suitably cradled about
a vertical pivot, supported in bearing over a fixed plate.
Adequate sealing arrangement shall be provided to
prevent contamination of the lubricant by dirt and
moisture.
 The idler sets shall consist of idlers along with mounting
brackets and fasteners.
 Shaft diameter of impact idlers shall be 30mm and
25mm that of all other idlers.
6) Belting
Sl. Conveyor Belt Grade
No. Description
1. Conveyors RC-1, Nylon/Nylon 315/3 heavy duty, top cover
CC-1 & CC-2 3mm, bottom cover 2mm, grade M24 as
per IS 1891 (Part 1)
3.3.3 Handling Facility

The following handling equipment has been envisaged:
Sl.
Type of Hoist Hoist Speed LT Speed
No.
Electric Hoist
1. 3-4 m/min. 8-10 m/min.
(minimum cap. 2t)
Electric Hoist
2. 5-6 m/min. 8-10 m/min.
(minimum cap. 5t)
Note:-
i) Electric hoist shall be designed for duty class II as per IS 3938 :
1983
ii) Lift and travel shall be as per the requirement in the new

PAGE 3.16
Sl.
Type of Hoist Hoist Speed LT Speed
No.
proposed structural building/ junction houses
iii) Suitable monorail shall be provided for each electric hoist
3.4 UTILITIES
3.4.1 Pumps
3.4.1.1 Horizontal centrifugal pumps shall be considered for water and slurry
transportation.
3.4.1.2 In case high pressure water sealing is envisaged, then sealing pumps
shall be either horizontal or vertical pump as designed by the bidder.
3.4.1.3 Material of Construction for pumps handling coal slurry
 Casing  Ni Hard / High Chrome (Min.

600 BHN)
 Impeller  Ni Hard / High Chrome (Min.

600 BHN)
 SS (AISI-410)
 Shaft
 SS (AISI-410)
 Shaft Sleeve & Coupling
3.4.1.4 Material of Construction for spillage pumps
 Casing  Alloy Cast Iron (Min. 350 BHN)

 Impeller  Alloy Cast Iron (Min. 350 BHN)
 Shaft  SS (AISI-410)
 Shaft Sleeve & Coupling  SS (AISI-410)
3.4.1.5 MOC of clear water, sealing water & drinking water pumps required for
different areas of process & utility systems shall be as follows:
Horizontal Pumps:
Casing CI IS: 210 FG260

Impeller CF8M
Shaft En8
Shaft sleeve SS410
Coupling pump & motor CI FG 260

Vertical Pumps:
Casing & Casing Ring CI IS: 210 FG260

Impeller CS ASTM A 216, CF 8M
Shaft En8
Shaft sleeve SS410
3.4.1.6 Drive: Electric motor with belt drive for slurry pumps. Other pumps may
be direct driven through suitable coupling. The motor shall be suitable
for 6 start/stop per hour equally spread. All outdoor slurry pump motors
shall be supplied with suitable canopy.
3.4.1.7 Speed: Less than 1500 rpm for slurry pumps
3.4.1.8 Vibration shall be less than 75 microns
3.4.1.9 Bearings shall be rated for more than 100,000 operating hours.
3.4.1.10 The pump's rotating parts shall be balanced both statically and
dynamically.
3.4.1.11 Shaft impeller assembly of all the pumps shall be statically and
dynamically balanced
3.4.1.12 Pumps shall be inclusive of all accessories such as Pump base frame,
Adjustable motor base frame, Foundation Bolts, Nuts & Washers;
Companion Flanges with Bolts, Nuts, washers & gaskets; V-Belt drive
guard.
3.4.1.13 The tests shall be carried out on the basis of the approved QAP and IS:
5120-1977. Generally the following inspection and tests shall be carried
out:
 Visual Inspection of the pump for surface flaws and workmanship.
 Visual Inspection of the dimensions of the pump on the basis of
approved drawing
 Visual Inspection of the material used and material test certificates
 Performance test
 Standard running test.
 Hydrostatic tests.
 Material Hardness tests
3.4.1.14 Hydrostatic test pressure and duration shall be as follows:
 1.5 times shut off head or 2 times the required head whichever is
higher for 30 minutes (min).
3.4.1.15 Motor Power
PAGE 3.18
The motor power for Pumps shall be calculated considering maximum
specific gravity of slurry, efficiency of pump and transmission efficiency.
The motor kW shall be arrived at after taking the output correction
factor of 0.88 for 50oC ambient temperature as per IPSS-1-03-004-95.
Thereafter margin of 25% for kW rating up to 5 kW, 20% for 5 to 15 kW,
15% for 15 to 75 kW and 10% for more than 75 kW shall be built in.
3.4.2 Valves
All the valves shall be carefully selected considering the application,
working pressure and type of fluid handled. Generally selection shall be
done based on following guidelines
S.No. Description Size Standard/Specs
1 Isolation DN 15 to Ball valve, screwed ends, lever

Valves for DN 50 operated, CS Body (A105) with AISI
water 304 Ball & AISI 410 Stem.
service
Isolation DN 65 C.I. gate valves as per IS:14846-

Valves for and 2005, Flanged end, CI Body & gate
water above (IS:210-2009, FG 220) with AISI 316
service trim & AISI 410 Stem
Isolation Size DN Cast iron rubber lining Diaphragm

Valves in 15 to DN valve as per BS 5156 or Plug valves
slurry lines 80 ASTM A216 Gr. WCB (0.3% carbon
max.)
Isolation Size DN Knife edge gate valve, flanged end,

Valves in 100 and CI body (IS 210 FG 260) with SS
slurry lines above gate min. 400 BHN hardness on
wear surface.
2 Non Return DN 15 to Lift check type as per IS:778-2005,

Valve DN 50 screwed ends, Gun Metal body &
disc
Non Return DN 65 Ball type/ Swing check valve as per

Valve and BS 1868/IS:5312-2007, flanged

above end, CI body (IS:210-2009, FG 220)
with SS (AISI 316) trim
3 Strainer DN 50 & Y type strainer with GM body and

below brass net
Strainer Above Body – MS, Net- SS

DN 50
Valves shall be complete with companion flanges.

3.4.3 Compressed Air System
3.4.3.1 Technical Specification of Air Compressors
Sl.No. Description Specification
1.0 Compressor Characteristics

1.1 No. of Compressor As per scope
1.2 Capacity (Nm3/min) As per System requirement
1.3 Discharge pressure As per System requirement
1.4 Operation Parallel
1.6 Duty Continuous
1.7 Noise level Less than 85dB(A) at 1m from
source.
1.8 Vibration level 75 
1.9 Compressors design IS-6206, 1990 / API-618 / BS 726
standard / BS 1571 / Manufacturers’
standard
2.0 Compressor Construction
2.1 Type of Compressor Screw
2.2 Preferred drive speed 1500 rpm
3.0 Material
Material will be as per Manufacturers’ standard.
4.0 Accessories Required
4.1 Suction filter cum YES.
silencer

PAGE 3.20
Sl.No. Description Specification
4.2 Inter cooler, after YES. (Inter and after cooler will
cooler, moisture be water cooled type)
separator
4.2 Foundation bolts, nuts YES
4.3 Coupling guard YES
4.4 Bearing Temp. Gauge YES
5.0 Testing
All tests will be carried out as per manufacturers’
standard / applicable codes.
Test Certificates for all tests (material test, performance
test, noise and vibration test) to be submitted before
giving Inspection Call.
3.4.3.2 Technical Parameters of Air Receivers

Capacity (m3 water volume) As per system requirement
Type Vertical cylindrical with dished end
No. of Air receiver As per requirement
Operating pressure Ass per requirement
Design pressure 1.25 times operating pressure
Temperature For designing the allowable stress
100oC will be taken as given in table
A-1 of IS-2825, 1984. These will be of
class 2 vessels.
Outside diameter and To be worked out by the Contractor.
length
Material of shell & dished IS-2002, 1992.
end
Safety valve requirement Article 5.0 of IS-2825, 1984
3.4.3.3 Air drier

Maximum pressure drop across heatless drier will be considered as 0.5
kg/cm2 (g). Pressure Dew Point of outlet air for Refrigerant Drier will be
(+) 3 degC at 7 bar (g) and for Heatless Drier ADP will be (-) 40deg C
respectively. Desiccant will be activated alumina.
3.4.4 Pipes
Following specifications shall be employed for pipe-
MS pipe as per API 5L Grade-B. The thickness shall

be –
Pipe Size Minimum Pipe Thickness
Upto DN100 IS 1239 Part1 Heavy grade

Pipe
DN100 to DN 150 8.6 mm
DN 150 to DN 300 9.5 mm
DN 350 & above 12 mm
As per IS: 1239, Pt.-II (1992) up to DN 50 and shall

have thickness 2 mm more than the pipe thickness.
Pipe fittings for MS
For DN65 and above fabricated fittings of the same
thickness as of pipe shall be used.
Flanges for MS As per IS: 6392-1971, Table 17.
Bolting IS: 1367-1991
Technical requirement for Pipes:

3.4.4.1 All MS pipes more than 6 m in length are required to be supplied
straight in random length of 6 m (min.).
3.4.4.2 All pipes, fittings, accessories shall be installed, tested and
commissioned in accordance with the IS 9523:2000 and IS 12288:1987.
3.4.4.3 All the pipes shall be supplied with all test certificates for physical and
chemical properties as per IS/ ASTM or equivalent standards as
specified.
3.4.4.4 The pipes shall be clean and free from scales, cracks, surface flaws,
lamination and other defects.
The pipe shall be marked with the following details
 Manufacturer’s name and trade mark.

PAGE 3.22
 Nominal size and Specific wall thickness or schedule no.
 Pipe Material Identification.
The pipes shall be packed for transport in accordance with IS 4740: 1979
3.4.4.5 Testing
All pipes shall be tested as specified in the Manufacturing Standard/
Codes. Test Certificates for all the tests conducted shall be furnished to
the Employer in 6 (Six) Copies.
3.4.5 Fire Fighting System
3.4.5.1 Carbon dioxide type fire extinguishers
CO2 type fire extinguishers 4.5 kg capacity manufactured and tested as
per IS-15683:2018 and ISI marked with initial charge having minimum
34 B fire rating. Seamless steel body cylinder shall confirm to IS-7285
with ISI mark. CE marked squeeze grip type brass forging valve (IS 6912)
with nickel chromium plated, stainless steel safety pin with lead seal,
aluminum siphon tube, wire braided rubber hose having bursting
pressure not less than 275 kgf/cm2, HDPE horn along with an integrated
handle with rubber grip to prevent cold burns, wall mounting bracket
screws, the extinguisher shall be painted with fire red colour with black
band. Cylinder shall not be more than 6 months old as on the date of
supply. Certificate from PESO issued by Chief Controller of Explosives
pertaining to the batch and mentioning the unique serial number shall
be provided along with supply.
3.4.5.2 Dry chemical powder type fire extinguisher
Dry chemical powder Fire Extinguisher, gas cartridge type, capacity 6 kg,
filled with UL listed Urea based Potassium bicarbonate powder,
manufactured and tested as per IS 15683: 2018 and ISI marked with
minimum class B rating of 144B, squeeze grip type valve made of brass
forging (IS 6912) with nickel chromium plated “CE” marked, hollow
piercing device, safety pressure release device, Stainless Steel valve
lever, stainless steel safety pin with lead seal, ‘O’ ring shall be provided
between valve and cylinder, minimum 2 mm gap shall be provided
between cylinder dome and valve ring when fully tighten. Deep drawn
two piece body with no vertical weld & bottom ring is cylindrical in
shape fabricated with mild steel sheet ( IS: 2062) with ISI mark, treated
internally and externally with polyester powder coating , fitted with
minimum 400 mm transparent high pressure nylon/EPDM rubber
hose of bursting pressure not less than 40 kg/cm2 with brass nozzle
and nozzle holder on extinguisher body, the cartridge is manufactured

as per IS: 4947 with ISI marked, brass forging neck ring, siphon tube
brass, extinguisher shall be painted with fire red colour with blue band
and provided with wall mounting brackets & screws, extra 2 nos. of 120
gm CO2 gas cartridge ISI marked shall be provided with each.
3.4.5.3 Clean agent type fire extinguisher
Clean agent fire extinguisher 6kg capacity manufactured and tested as
per IS:15683-2018 & ISI marked, filled with UL listed HFC-236fa (
CF3CH2CF3) as initial charge pressurized with dry nitrogen, fabricated
with mild steel (IS 2062) & ISI marked, deep drawn body and treated
internally and externally with anticorrosive treatment, CE marked
squeeze grip type brass forging valve (IS 6912) with nickel chromium
plated, stainless steel safety pin with lead seal, pressure
gauge, minimum 400 mm transparent high pressure nylon/EPDM
rubber hose of bursting pressure not less than 40 kg/cm2 along with
suitable applicator, material of siphon tube shall be of brass, minimum
class A rating of 2A & class B rating of 55B, the extinguisher shall be
painted with fire red colour with green band and provided with wall
mounting bracket and screws complete.
3.4.5.4 Fire Hydrant piping network comprising of Fire hydrants, hose box,
hoses, branch pipe, couplings, hose reels etc. Underground pipes shall
be protected by coating & wrapping.
3.4.6 Air-Conditioning & Ventilation System
3.4.6.1 Split type air-conditioners
Split type air-conditioning unit shall be 5 star BEE rated and inverter type
and shall comprise of hermetically sealed compressor, air cooled fin-tube
condenser, low noise, low speed, statically & dynamically balanced
forward curve centrifugal fan, air filter, volume control damper, fin-tube
evaporator coil made of heavy duty copper tube and integrally finned
corrugated copper fin, drive motor, humidification/ de-humidification
coil , heavy gauge sheet metal cabinet, vibration isolator pad, condensate
pan, control and instrumentation system, etc.. All refrigerant piping shall
be of seamless heavy duty, high quality copper (99.9%).
The air-conditioning system shall also be complete with control system
including thermostatic expansion valves in refrigerant circuit, HP / LP cut
out of the compressor, thermometers and remote.

PAGE 3.24
3.4.6.2 Ventilation System
1) Axial fans
The axial fan shall be industrial, heavy duty type, suitable for
continuous operation, statically and dynamically balanced, single
stage, directly coupled with drive motor and shall be manufactured,
tested according to IS: 3588-1987.
2) Gravity type louvers
The gravity type louvers shall be fabricated from 0.6 mm thick M.S.
sheet finished with two coats of primer and two coats of finished
paints matching to the interior decor. The number and location of
exhaust air grills shall be carefully decided considering room size, air
velocity and 2mmwg positive inside pressure, etc.
3.4.7 Technical Condition for Erection, Testing and Commissioning of
Equipment
a) Alignment & Levelling
The levels and alignment of all installed equipment shall be
ensured to be within allowable tolerances as recommended in the
respective manufacturer’s instructions or as specified in the
manufacturer’s drawings. The levels, alignment of all equipment
shall be carefully re-checked jointly with the Employer after trial
operation. All required adjustments shall be made by the bidder as
directed by the Employer. Necessary alignment of important
equipment shall be re checked to conform to the specified
tolerances and if necessary, adjustment shall be made by the
bidder.
All motors and driven equipment shall be accurately levelled and
aligned to specified tolerances. For equipment shipped with motor
mounted, aligned and coupled, the coupling shall be disassembled
and alignment shall be re-checked.
b) Lubricating and Greasing of Equipment
Grease inlet nipples provided for the bearings shall be checked
and cleaned to ensure free passage to the bearings. All the
bearings in the equipment shall be properly cleaned to ensure
dust free bearings and then shall be filled with the proper lubricant
before closing the cover. All lubricants used for lubrication shall be
as given in the manufacturer’s instructions / drawings.

c) Bearings for drives and driven equipment shall be checked and
cleared as follows:
i) Sleeve bearings
Bearing caps and drain plugs in bearing housing shall be
removed to flush out housing with flushing oil and drain it
completely. Drain plugs shall be replaced and lubrication
system shall be filled with recommended lubricant for the
particular unit.
ii) Grease lubricated ball bearings
Bearing housing cover shall be removed to ensure proper
supply and good condition. If grease shows any sign of
deterioration, dirt contamination by any foreign material,
grease shall be removed completely, bearings shall be
cleaned with flushing oil and shall be wiped to make it dry
and shall be repacked with appropriate grease for particular
unit.
iii) Oil lubricated bearings
Housing and bearings shall be flushed out thoroughly with
flushing oil and shall be drained completely. Reservoir shall
be filled to proper level with recommended lubricant for
particular unit. The above process shall be repeated often as
directed by the Employer during the trial operation of the
plant.
d) Packing / Gaskets
Stuffing boxes & valves glands shall be checked for sufficient rings
or packing and tightness of packing gland.
Connections requiring gaskets shall be tightened evenly all around
to ensure equal stress over the entire gasket area. Wherever
required, the torque wrench shall be used for tightening of bolts
properly.
All packing, glands and flanged joints shall be checked and
tightened as necessary during trial run and commissioning. Should
any packing or gaskets of glands require replacement during this
period, same shall be carried out by the bidder.
e) Clean up and Painting
The bidder shall do cleaning and painting of all equipment which
shall include all connection materials and devices such as piping,
PAGE 3.26
exposed conduits etc. Items, which have been supplied with finish
coat before delivery but surfaces have damaged then these
surfaces shall be cleaned, primed and finish coated to match to
original colour. The painting shall be inclusive of the cost of paint.
f) Tolerance and surface finish in workmanship
Relevant tolerances and surface finish in the fabrication work shall
be followed as per relevant Indian Standard unless otherwise
shown in approved detail drawings.
3.4.8 Technical condition for testing and commissioning of equipment &
utility systems
1) All equipment shall be tested and commissioned as per instruction
and guidelines given in manufacturer’s manual. Approval for any
deviation or any clarification shall be taken from the Employer.
2) The water system consisting of pumps, pipelines, etc. shall be
properly purged using industrial water for removal of foreign
material before commissioning as per the instruction of the
Employer. Then the system shall be subjected to cold run for a
period of 72 hours. All the joints, valves glands etc.shallbe checked
during the cold run for leakage. Any leakage detected shall be
rectified. During commissioning proper water flow distribution as
per design/process requirement shall be checked and adjusted. If
required, restricting orifices shall be inserted in the pipelines.
3) All valves including electrically operated valves shall be operated a
few times to check free movement and operation of various limit
switches/ inter locks.
3.4.9 Erection, Testing and Commissioning of Pipelines
1) All pipelines shall be laid by the bidder as per the detailed
drawings and instruction to be given by the employer. The
interfacing and joining of the proposed pipeline with the existing
pipeline/equipment /facility are in the scope of work. Following
technical condition apply for erection, testing and commissioning
of all pipe work.
2) Before erection, pipes, valves, fittings etc. shall be thoroughly
cleaned and scales, rust, dirt, oil, grease etc. shall be completely
removed from inside as well as outside. The bidder shall provide all
cleaning materials required for this purpose.

3) Contacting surfaces of flanges shall be strictly perpendicular to
pipes and shaped parts axes. Insertion of gaskets of unusual
thickness shall not be allowed.
4) In case of pipes running horizontally, all the flanges and flanged
fittings, etc. shall be installed in such a way that top bolt holes are
displaced by half pitch from the vertical axis.
5) Flanges shall be fabricated from steel plates and shall be
machined. Unmachined flanges shall not be used.
6) Rotary flanges shall freely rotate without any jamming and closely
fit with flange rings.
7) While laying several pipelines parallel to each other, flanged joints
shall be staggered suitably.
8) Gasket materials and dimensions shall conform to the instructions
given in the relevant working / erection drawings, unless specified
otherwise.
9) The flanged joints shall be as near the supports as possible.
10) Pipelines shall rest uniformly upon each support according to the
detailed erection drawings. Yokes, if envisaged, shall not allow
lateral displacement of pipes.
11) Distances between axes of parallel pipelines and position of
pipelines relative to building walls, equipment etc. on the route
shall conform to the detailed drawings.
12) Slope of pipelines, drainage, vents, and arrangement of pipe-
connections for inlet and outlet of various services etc. shall be in
conformity with the drawings.
13) Valves with spindles, location of that is not provided in the
erection drawings shall be installed in such a way as to ensure easy
access from the ground level or nearest working platform.
14) In general pipe work shall be routed overhead. All overhead pipe
work shall have a minimum clearance of 6 m over the ground
installation.
15) Joining
a) All pipes shall be butt-welded, socket welded, flanged or
other type of joints as specified in detailed engineering
drawings.
b) For making screwed joints teflon tape shall be used.
PAGE 3.28
c) Construction materials of flanges for pipelines shall conform
to the standards indicated in the drawings.
d) For mitre bends on the pipelines, welded butts shall be
located at a distance equal to the pipelines' diameters but
not less than 100 mm from the beginning of the curve.
e) Tapping and re-tapping of pipeline threads shall be carried
out wherever necessary.
16) Welding
a) General welding shall confirm to IS 816:1969, IS 9595:1996.
However, the followings are to be followed.
b) Assembly of elements shall be carried out with devices that
ensure correct mutual location of such elements. Assembled
elements are kept fixed during welding by the use of suitable
clamps.
c) Clamps shall not be considered as secondary butt elements.
They shall be made, if possible, by the same welders who
weld butt joints or by welders of the same skill. Electrodes
and welding wires shall also be of the same quality as used
for butt-welding.
d) Pipeline welding shall be carried out by using horizontal,
vertical or overhead welding positions.
e) As a rule, butt-welding shall be carried out without
interruptions. No interruption shall be allowed until at least
50% of welding thickness is completed.
f) If there is an unscheduled interruption in such work, it is
necessary to ensure slow and uniform cooling of material by
covering it with asbestos or other similar material for
eliminating the possibility of sharp zone cooling of metal.
Before starting the welding work again, it is necessary to heat
the butt weld up to required temperature and maintain this
temperature until the end of welding.
g) Welding of flanges, tees and other shaped parts to pipes
shall be carried out under the same conditions as specified
for welding of pipes.
h) Following material shall be used for welding of steel
pipelines.
 For gas welding - welding wire as per IS 1278:1972.

 For arc welding - Electrode as per IS 814:2004.
i) Welding Quality
 All field welding of carbon steel shall be executed by
qualified welders using standard welding procedure.
 Besides systematic operational control in the process of
pipeline erection, the quality of welded joints shall also
be checked by visual inspection and non-destructive
testing.
 All the welded joints shall be subjected to visual
inspection with the aim of detecting the following
possible defects.
 Cracks that come out on the joint surface of base
metal located in the zone of thermal influence of
welding.
 Weld fuses or cuts in spots where joint passes over
the parent metal.
 Sponginess and porosity of the other surface of
the joint.
 Irregular width and height of a joint and its
possible deviation from axis.
 Deviation from joint-dimensions shown in the
drawing or in the specification.
 Defective spots found by such visual inspection shall be
chipped off and re-welded.
3.4.10 Erection of Valves
1) Before erection of valves, the bidder shall ensure that
a) All grit and foreign materials are removed from the inside of
the valves.
b) All machined faces are thoroughly cleaned and coated with a
thin layer of mineral grease before erection.
2) Installation of valve shall be carried out as per drawing. Clearance
between the top of stuffing box and underside of gland shall be
uniform on all the sides.

PAGE 3.30
3) Gland shall not be tightened hard. Hemp packing shall be
adequately soaked in grease and shall not be allowed to remain
dry (except valves for oxygen service).
4) The valves shall be tightly closed when being installed, as this
keeps the valve rigid and prevents any foreign material from
getting in between the working parts of the valves.
5) While installing flanged valves, diametrically opposite nuts shall be
tightened slowly and proper care shall be taken to tighten them
alternately. The practice of fully tightening the nuts one after
another is not permitted.
6) After installation of the valves, the pipeline shall be flushed with
water/ compressed air/ nitrogen, as the case may be, to remove
any foreign material that may be present in them. If any leak is
detected at the valve-seat, the same shall be examined and
rectified by scrapping or replacing wherever necessary.
3.4.11 Inspection, Testing and Acceptance of Pipelines
1) General
a) Manufactured or details shall be presented for acceptance in
unpainted.
b) Testing of pipelines shall be carried out in presence of the
Employer.
c) Prior to testing, pipes shall be cleaned up by metal swab in
order to remove the grit, sand and other solids deposited on
the inner pipe surfaces followed by blowing air through
pipes.
2) Acceptance shall be carried out as follows :
a) Documentary checking of the materials according to the
drawings / specifications / contract.
b) Checking of documents attesting the satisfactory results of
mechanical tests.
c) Visual examination of the welding quality and checking of the
result of radiographic tests (wherever carried out).
d) Checking of the dimensions and other technical details as per
the project drawings & specifications.
3) Unless otherwise specified in the working drawings, the
hydrostatic test pressure for all cooling water shall be 10 kg/cm2.

4) Hydrostatic test pressure shall be maintained for 30 minutes. At
this pressure, the pipelines shall be inspected for leakage etc.
Welded joints shall be tapped by 1.5kg hand hammer. Hydrostatic
test results are considered satisfactory, if during tests, manometric
pressure does not decrease and leakage or mist is not observed on
the welded joints, fittings, body etc.
5) The hydrostatic test shall be repeated after elimination of defects.
6) Equipment shall be disconnected before the test. Combined test of
the pipelines with equipment is not allowed.
7) Details in which same defects are found during repeated tests
(after rectification) shall be rejected and replaced by new ones. The
hydrostatic test shall be conducted again in such cases.
8) Representatives of the Employer and the erecting bidder shall
make a statement regarding the pipeline acceptance mentioning
defects found during tests, nature of the defects and method of
their elimination. Pipelines shall be identified in the statement as
per the project drawings.
9) Painting
a) After testing and acceptance all the outside surfaces of M.S.
pipes, fittings and ducts including supports shall be cleared
of loose substance and foreign material i.e. dirt, rust, oil,
grease, slag etc. so that primer coat adheres to the original
metal surface. Thereafter, Red Oxide Zinc Chromate as per IS
2074:1992 shall be applied in two coats and dry final paint
with synthetic enamel of approved quality shall be applied in
two coats with dry film thickness of each coat of 50 micron.
b) The scheme for painting shall be submitted by the bidder for
the approval of the Employer.
c) The painting shall be done in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations in respect of application of primer and/ or
paints with the approval of the Employer.
d) Paint may be applied by brush. Spray painting is however
preferred.
e) For paints, which dry by chemical reaction, the temperature
requirements specified by the manufacturer shall be met
with.

PAGE 3.32
f) Paint shall not be applied in rain, wind, and fog or at relative
humidity of 80% or above or when the surface temperature is
below 100C resulting in condensation of moisture.
g) Each coat of paint shall be continuous, free of pores and of
even film thickness.
After satisfactory erection and commissioning, all spots on the pipelines,
ducts, supply structures or equipment where the painting is damaged
during commissioning shall be touched up with same type of primer /
finish paint as that already used.
3.5 ELECTRICAL
3.5.1 Technical Specification of Electrical System
3.5.1.1 Basic Design parameter of existing power supply system:
Voltage 415 V, + 10 %
Frequency 50 Hz, +5%
Fault level at 415 V 50 kA for 1 Second
Control supply 1 ph, 230 V A.C
All electrical equipment shall be designed for 50 ºC ambient.
3.5.2 Dry Type Distribution Transformers
Specific Aspects Technical Features
Application Distribution transformer
Applicable standard IS-11171-1985
kVA rating To be specified by Bidder
Phase 3 phase + 1 Neutral
Voltage Ratio primary/ 3.3 kV/ 0.433 kV

secondary
Duty Indoor
Type 3 phase core type, Dry type, air cooled,
Cast resin moulded
Vector group DYn 11
Winding Copper

Class of Insulation F winding
Temperature rise limited to 70 deg. C as
measured by resistance over an average
ambient temperature of 50 deg C.
Overload duty Matching the load requirement
Neutral grounding 433 V secondary side solidly grounded
Percentage impedance To be indicated by the Bidder at
principal & end taps
Bushings Porcelain bushings shall be provided
and shall confirm to IS: 2099-1986
Termination At primary side – through XLPE cable.
Primary side cable box (self-supported
detachable type such that transformer
can be taken out without disconnecting
cable)
At secondary side- through bus duct/
cables
Neutral CTs 2 nos.
CT for Backup earth fault Class 5 P20
Protection
Tap changer on primary side Off circuit tap changer
Tap changer shall be hand operated
through hand wheel. Padlocking facility
to be provided.
Range + 5%
Taps above nominal voltage 2
Taps below nominal voltage 2
Voltage per step variation 2.5%
Short circuit level on primary 50 kA for 1 sec
& secondary side
Auxiliary supply voltage 240 V AC
Overload capacity As per IS 6600-1972

PAGE 3.34
Over fluxing withstand 120%
(without heating) capacity
for one minute due to
combined voltage &
frequency variation
Degree of protection for IP:21
Transformer Enclosure
Accessories  Scanner with alarm and rip contacts
for Winding temperature
 Neutral CTs (one)
 Sure arrestor along with earthing bar
for surge arrestor
 Bushing for grounding surge arrestor
 Off circuit tapping switch
 Ventilation louvers and ventilation
grid
 Roller (bi directional)
 Marshalling box
 Warning plate
 Earthing pad
 Lifting lugs for complete transformer
 Base channel with hauling hole
 Inspection cover for changing tap
with glass & door switch
 Rating and diagram plate
 Secondary neutral bushing
 Primary cable box
 Other accessories as required
Marshalling box Fabricated with 1.6 mm CRCA steel with
rubber gasket and lockable door, IP – 54
enclosure.
Suitable for housing winding temp.
indicators with 100 W lamp and 3 pin
switch socket.
Temperature Detectors Embedded thermistors/ RTD’s for
winding temperature monitoring with
alarm and trip contacts shall be
provided

3.5.3 Power Cum Motor Control Centre (PMCC) panel
PMCC shall be designed with ACB as incomer&buscoupler. It shall have
two incomer and bus coupler with necessary number of outgoing
feeders for the various loads are to be considered for PMCC.
3.5.3.1 Technical Particulars of PMCC
1. Reference Standards IEC-61439, IS 60947 (Part 1-
2004,part 2-2003, Part 3-
1999, Part 4(Sec-1)-2000 and
Part 5 (sec-I- 2003) - Low
Voltage Switchgear and
Control gear
IS 8623(Part 1-3):
1993(Reaffirmed 2008) - Low
voltage switchgear and
control gear assemblies
IS 10118(Pt 1-4): 1982-
(Reaffirmed 2006)-Code of
practice for selection ,
installation and maintenance
of Switch gear and control
gear
2. Supply system & variation
Voltage 415 V+10%
Phase 3 phase & Neutral
Frequency 50 Hz + 5%
3. Neutral system Solidly grounded
4. System fault level 50 kA (RMS) for 1 second
5. Rated insulation voltage 2.5 kV for 1 min
6. Construction
i) Type of board Single front &
compartmentalised. PMCC
shall have draw out type
incomer. Outgoing feeder
boards shall be non-draw out
type.

PAGE 3.36
ii) Degree of protection IP-54
iii) Mounting Vertical, floor mounted, free
standing
iv) Front access Hinged door
v) Back access & Hinged two part door each
clearance not exceeding 600 mm.
vi) Sheet Steel type & Cold rolled sheet steel, 2mm
thickness & 1.6 mm (for door).
vii) Paint Shade No.631 (light grey) of
IS 5: 2007
viii) Cabling space Side cable alley
7. Busbar
i) Main horizontal 3 Phase and neutral (RYBN)
busbar
ii) Busbar Material Aluminium alloy
iii) Max. temp. rise 900C
including the
specified ambient
temp. and de-rating
factor if any
iv) Bus bar arrangement Top horizontal
v) Power feed to Sleeved busbar dropper
outgoing module
vi) Insulation Heat Shrunk PVC Sleeve
vii) Short time withstand 50 kA (RMS) for 1 sec
current of Neutral Bus
viii) Short time 50 kA (RMS) for 1 sec
withstand current of
earth bus
ix) Clearance between 25 mm (minimum)
Phase & Phase and
Phase & earth/
neutral
8. Component Details
8.1 Incomer & Bus coupler ACB

i) Rated Interrupting 50kA with Ics=100%Icu
capacity
ii) Draw out type Yes
iii) Under voltage trip No
iv) Short circuit trip Yes
v) Over load trip Yes
vi) Earth fault trip Yes
ACBs shall have self-powered microprocessor based
release and release shall be settable at site. The incomer
panel shall have Ammeters, Ammeter Selector Switch
(ASS), Voltmeter, Voltmeter Selector Switch (VSS) and
indication lamps.
8.2 MPCB shall be provided for motors rated below 7.5 KW
MCCB with contactor and O/L relay shall be provided for
motor feeders rated 7.5 KW & higher.
8.3 Technical parameters of MCCB /MPCBs for outgoing
feeders
i) Rated Interrupting 50 kA (RMS)
capacity (symmetrical)
ii) Current limiting type Yes, for all motor feeders.
iii) Capacity to protect Type 2 Co-ordination IS
downstream 60947(Part 4/Sec 1): 2000
equipment
8.4 Contactor
i) Utilisation Category AC3 for non-reversible
feeders and AC4 for
reversible feeders.
ii) Coil voltage (VR) 240V AC
iii) Drop out voltage 50 %VR
iv) Pick up 85-110 % VR
v) Auxiliary Contacts & 2 NO + 2 NC, 10A, 240 V AC
rating

PAGE 3.38
vi) overload relay Thermal overload
relay/Electronic Motor
Protection Relay (EMPR).
All motors above 15kW shall
be with EMPR
8.5 Wiring
i) Power circuit Insulated (1.1 kV) Flexible
Copper wire/ strip
ii) Control circuit Copper 1.5 mm2 multi strand
PVC wire, insulated
8.6 Control transformer 2 no. with auto and manual
change over.
8.7 Indication lamps LED cluster with luminous
intensity min. 100 mcd.
8.8 CT & PT As required
8.9 Ammeter For incomer & all motor
feeders of 15kW or above
rating.
8.10 Voltmeters For incomer
3.5.4 Electric LT Motors
1) System voltage and design basis
i) Motors shall be designed for respective duty/ operation
requirement under the stipulated site condition.
ii) All motors and accessories shall comply with the latest
revision of the Indian electricity rules as regards safety,
earthing and essential provisions specified therein for
installation and operation of electrical plants.
2) Standards
The motors shall comply with the following publications of
standard specification of ISS and IPSS:
IS 325 : 1996 Three phase induction motors
IS 4722 : 2001 Rotating electrical machine
IS 900 : 1992 Code of practice for installation and
maintenance of induction motors

IS 4691 : 1985 Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IS 6362 : 1995 Designation of methods of cooling for rotating
electrical machine.
IS 4029 : 1967 Guide for testing three phase induction motors.
IS 7816 : 1975 Guide for testing insulation resistance of
rotating machine.
IS 2253 : 1974 Designation of types of construction and
mounting arrangement of rotating electrical
machine.
IS 4728 : 1975 Terminal markings for rotating electrical
machinery.
3) Technical specification
The LT motor shall have the following technical specifications:
Sl. No. Specification of motors Requirement
1 Driven equipment As per requirement
2 Type Squirrel cage induction motor
3 Duty As per requirement
4 Overload As required
5 Mounting As required
6 Enclosure type & degree IP55
of protection
7 Rated voltage 415 volt
8 Rated frequency 50 hz
9 Efficiency class IE3
10 Class of insulation F
11 Temperature rise (over 70 0C
ambient temp. of 50oC).
12 Method of starting DOL/VFD
13 Starting time at 100% Not more than 10/ 15 Sec for
and 85% rated voltage 100% & 85% rated voltage.
with load

PAGE 3.40
14 Torque/ speed The torque/ speed
Characteristics of Motor characteristics of motor shall
and Load match with the same
characteristics of load for
desired starting and
acceleration.
15 Thermal time constant, 45 min.
in min.
16 No. of starts per hour As per requirement
i) Equally spread
ii) Successive hot
iii) Successive cold
17 Minimum permissible
voltage at terminal for 85% of rated voltage for 415V
starting (with full load)
18 Permissible running time 5 min
with full load at
minimum (75%)
allowable voltage.
19 Transient recovery after The motor shall be capable to
temporary system accelerate with load to rated
disturbance for 0.2 Sec operating point from such
and sudden restoration condition.
to 70% of rated Voltage
20 Fault withstand current 50 kA for 0.25 sec
and time for terminal
box
21 Withstanding ability of As per relevant standards

switching Surge of (4U +
5kV), where U is rated
line voltage. For HT
motors
22 Cooling System/ type IC 0141

23 Direction of rotation Bi-direction
24 RPM (Synchronous) As per system requirement
25 Winding material Copper
26 Winding insulation type Non-hygroscopic, oil resistant
and resistant to flame
propagation
27 Winding connection delta for LT motors
28 Whether adequate Yes
tropical protection
against fungus,
corrosion etc. provided.
29 Degree of protection for IP 55
terminal boxes
30 Grounding of motor Each motor frame shall have
body two distinct grounding pads,
one on each side, complete
with tapped hole and bolt
3.5.5 Low Voltage Variable frequency Drives

a) VFDs shall be provided for the motors as per requirement. The
drives shall be able to meet the load torque requirement at all
range of the speed. The VFD shall be such that the rated current of
the VFD is not less than 150% of the current at rated power of the
corresponding motor. .
b) The motors to be controlled from variable frequency drives shall
have suitable insulation system to withstand the high voltage
spikes from IGBT-type VFD. In order to provide protection against
damaging bearing current due to circulating currents, insulated
bearing/ bearing housing at NDE shall be provided for motors of
frame sizes 250 S and above. 20% spare I/O shall be provided.
c) Details of VFDs are mentioned below.
1. Basic - Digital control technology with vector control
design (with programming (PG) unit as per requirement).
particulars - IGBT based with sine coded PWM control.

PAGE 3.42
- VFD shall communicate to basic automation
system on system communication bus.
- Suitable for variable torque or constant torque
applications requiring harmonic control as
defined by IEEE 519-1992.
- The drive shall have an internal EMC filter capable
of meeting the second environment levels for the
EMC directive without the need for additional
components.
- hall conform to IEC 146 - International Electrical
Code.
2. Drive - Software configurable to Sensor less Dynamic
controller Torque Vector mode (single motor).
technology - Full, closed loop flux vector control shall be
available for constant torque applications.
- Drive can be operated with motor disconnected
for testing purpose.
- Adjustable PWM carrier frequency within a range
of 3 – 15 KHz.
- Suitable for use on both Constant & Variable
Torque loads as per operational requirement.
- Multiple programmable stop modes including -
Ramp, Coast, Ramp-to-Hold.
- Multiple acceleration and deceleration rates.
3. Type Air-cooled designed as per requirement for :
 Single quadrant operation, 6/12 pulse, line
commutated
 Four quadrant operation, 6 pulse line commutated
4. Type of - Three full wave diode rectifiers to provide a fixed
connection DC voltage.
- DC bus inductor on all ratings
- DC link capacitors
- Latest generation IGBT based Inverter section for
variable/ constant torque applications. The power
section shall use vector dispersal pulse width
modulated (PWM) IGBT gate control algorithm and

soft switching IGBTs to reduce motor terminal dv/dt
and allow longer cable length from drive to motor
without output filters.
- Common control connection for all ratings.

5. Efficiency More than 95% or better at full speed and full load.
6. Input - Suitable line chokes to mitigate the harmonics.

power AC side reactor/ communication choke. Isolation
supply transformer for group drives shall be provided.
However, there is no group drives in LF and
isolation transformer shall not be supplied for
individual drives.
7. Voltage - Voltage variation of (+/-) 0.1 % with an input
variation variation of +10%, - 10%.
- Steady state regulation of (+/-) 0.25% guaranteed
against 100 to 200 % load disturbance and + 5%
& -5% input supply frequency variation.
- The drive should be designed to operate on an
AC supply, which may contain line notching, and
up to 10% harmonic distortion.
9. Reference
9.1 Input +/- 10 V DC / 0 – 10 V DC / 4 – 20 mA
reference
voltage
9.2 Reference All reference signals may have a trim signal applied
signals to them for finer resolution and accuracy. Trim
source and amount should be programmable.
VFD shall receive the input reference via profibus
communication. For cranes input shall be hardwired
to VFD.
9.3 Loss of The drive should be capable of sensing the reference
reference loss conditions.
In the event of loss of an analog input reference
signal, the drive should be user programmable to the
following
Fault the drive
PAGE 3.44
Alarm and maintain last reference
Alarm and go to preset speed
Alarm and go to minimum speed
Alarm and go to maximum speed
Alarm and maintain last output frequency
Signal loss detection should be available regardless
of the function of the analog input.
VFD shall receive the input reference via profibus
communication
If there is a communication break, drive shall be
‘coast’ or ‘controlled trip’ depending on process
safety.
10. Output
10.1 Output From 0 to rated motor voltage.
voltage
10.2 Output Shall have provision for minimum 6 step set points
frequency or as per operational requirement
10.3 Output The inverter section should produce a pulse width
Waveform modulated (PWM) waveform using latest generation
IGBTs.
10.4 Output 0.01 Hz.
frequency
resolution
11. Reflected As per relevant standards
wave Maximum of 3.15 times the bus voltage or 1600 V,
whichever is less, up to cable lengths of 200 metre.
12. Overload For multi motor drive
relay
13. Starting As per process or operational requirement
torque
14. Torque + / - 5 %.
accuracy
15. Speed Not more than ±0.2%.
control
accuracy
16. Ramp rate - Ramp set within the drive is the maximum

permitted for safety. Ramp settings required by
the process shall be derived in the PLC
- Linear acceleration and deceleration adjustable
independently from 0 to 3600 seconds.
- Provision of remotely selectable accel / decel
settings should be accessible through digital
inputs also.
17. Main - ACB/ MCCB with 50 KA rating
power - Line side choke to mitigate the harmonics, AC side
componen reactor/ communication choke shall be provided
ts in as per manufacturer’s recommendation
incoming - Matching input isolation transformer / line reactor
AC side for harmonic and noise suppression. For input
isolation transformer, the K factor shall be 4.0 or
less.
- AC line surge suppression network.
- Input contactor.
18. Converter - 4Q regenerative PWM-type controlled rectifier
–Inverter bridge with IGBTs or 6-pulse diode rectifier bridge
Equipment on the input
- DC link circuit with reactor/ capacitor.
- IGBT bridge for Inverter.
- Harmonic transformer.
19. Load side - Filter network
componen - Electronic over-load relay for each motor (with
ts display) for VFD bypass circuit.
- Line contactors in output side (if required).
- Output reactor / terminator to take care of extra
cable length than specified for the drive
20. Terminal - Separate for control and power wiring.
blocks - Terminal blocks with colour codes for different
voltage levels in VFDs shall be considered.
- Power terminal blocks to withstand a minimum of
90 deg C and marked for both inputs and outputs.
21. By-pass By-pass arrangement for transfer cars shall be
Arrangeme provided to operate the motor in case of failure of
PAGE 3.46
nt VFD.
22. Diode Minimum ratings of Diode cells.
Bridge - PIV rating: 2.5 times the peak value of line voltage
- dv/dt rating: 200V/microsecond for voltage
control and 1000V/ microsec. For inverter control.
- di/dt rating: 100A / microsecond.
23. Input / - Hard-Wired I/O shall be supplied for E-stop
Outputs function only. For other functions, VFD shall be
on the network.
- Inbuilt I/O. One spare I/O card shall be supplied
as loose item for each VFD
- Standard I/O card
- Inbuilt I/O board consists of only digital signals
and only 24 V DC.
- ANALOG I/O CARD
- Encoder signal shall be connected to PLC
- Digital Outputs
- I/Os are inbuilt. External relay boards to be used
for relay output, if required.
- Contact output rating: Inbuilt I/O is 24 V DC 0.5
A maximum. External relay boards to be used for
relay output, if required.
- PTC provision: PTC connection to protect the
motor from over temperature.
24. Protective - AC line surge suppression network and
features overvoltage protection.
- Under voltage in supply network
- Phase sequence protection and monitoring
- Single phase failure
- Motor loss
- Under voltage in DC bus
- Over voltage in DC bus
- Over load
- Earth fault
- Instantaneous over current
- Cooling fan failure

- Stall monitor for motor alarms
- Stall protection
- shall have a selectable function to prevent reverse
operation of the drive.
- Password protection, if available.
25. Annunciati Following faults shall be annunciated in keypad of
ons the drive / HMI.
- AC line surge suppression network and
overvoltage protection.
- Under voltage in supply network
- Phase sequence protection and monitoring
- Under voltage in DC bus
- Over voltage in DC bus
- Over load
- Earth fault
- Instantaneous over current
- Cooling fan failure – Stall monitor for motor
alarms
- Motor fault (winding/ bearing temperature,
vibration) as applicable
- Loss of frequency command
- Shall be able to store at least 16 previous faults in
memory on FIFO sequence.
26. Meters - Output voltmeter and ammeter with selector
switches.
- Input volt meter and ammeter with selector
switches.
- Output frequency meter (digital type).
- KW meter for drive ratings and below 200 KW.
- All digital display shall be programmable.
27. Other
features
27.1 Load Programmable current limit from 0.1 amps to 150%
dependent of drive rated amps. Current limit to be active for all
current drive states; accelerating, constant speed and
limit decelerating.
PAGE 3.48
27.2 Dynamic The drive shall have an internal, built in 7th IGBT for
braking use as a dynamic braking chopper. This IGBT shall
have enough capacity to handle greater than or
equal to 100% regeneration power from the output,
continuously. The drive shall also have a “drive
mounted” dynamic braking resistor for low level
braking applications and interactive software to
protect the “internally” mounted resistor from abuse.
The braking resistor of a hoisting drive shall be
selected considering the possible lowering height of
the load being lowered at the maximum speed. The
sizing of the braking resistor shall take into
consideration the regenerative energy due to
overhauling load and the lowering time The Hoisting
drive should preferably have the flexibility of
connecting external Dynamic braking module. For
cross traverse and long travel motions, the braking
resistor shall be capable of absorbing the
regenerative energy during deceleration of the
motion also taking into account the possibility of a
swinging load (the load and load attachment
included).The braking resistor shall be thermally
capable to absorb the regenerative energy during
successive drive cycles of the application.
27.3 Fault 16 nos. of faults to be stored on FIFO basis for fault
Memory analysis.
27.4 Ride The control logic should be capable of "riding
Through through" a power outage of at least 0.5 seconds in
duration. The inverter section should be shut off
after an 18% drop in bus voltage to conserve power
for the drive logic.
28. Selector - Local / Remote.
switches - Auto / Manual.
- Main / Bypass.
All the selector switches shall be of 10 A rating.
29. Pushbutto - Trip reset.

ns - Start.
- Emergency stop.
30. Lamps - Drive ready.
- Drive trip.
- R, Y, B phase power ON.
- Control supply ON
31. Remote - Shall have transducer to monitor the outputs like
control motor speed at remote place / HMI.
facilities - Facility to accept speed reference from HMI /
engineering station.
32. Communic - RS485 (ModBus, ProfiBus-DP, DeviceNet) bus
ation Bus - Internally mounted interfaces shall be provided to
connect to different buses
33. Test points Two electronic test point parameters should be
available to examine data within the drive memory
that is not available through other parameters.
34. Operator - Basic operator panel is considered mounted on
panel drive unit.
- IP 54/55 protection class.
- All adjustments to be made with the door closed.
- Status and Power LEDs viewable through the
cover
- Status LEDs for communications status,
35. Membrane - The keypad shall be logically designed for two
keypad operating areas with required number of keys.
- Local operator control like
- Local start /stop ,
- jog forward / reverse .
- Programming.
- Facility to run the drive without HIM shall be
provided.
36. LCD - Display shall be black lighted , enabling viewing
display in extremes of lighting conditions
- Display shall be in alphanumeric (in English only)
- All the faults stored in memory shall be displayed

PAGE 3.50
by scrolling.
37. Constructi - Floor mounted /panel mounted
on features - Cubicles shall have illumination lamps, door
switches, space heaters and adequate sockets for
soldering.
38. Enclosure - Enclosure conforming to IP-42 or better with
and weather proof enclosures
ventilation - Units shall be provided with cooling fans and
louvers at the bottom sides.
- All louvers shall have fine mesh filter behind
them.
- For larger drives cooling fans of drives shall be
powered from different power source.
39. Painting Rigorous metal treatment, degreasing, rinsing,
pickling, passivating, oven drying followed by two
coats of red oxide primer and two coats of finished
stove enamelled painting.
Paint shade as per IS:5, 1994
40. Safety Inverters shall be complete with safety devices
against hazards and shall be suitable for provision
for safe access of operation and maintenance
41. Selection Characteristics of the VFD Inverters matching the
criteria speed torque characteristics of the a.c motors
associated with the mechanisms shall be the prime
consideration for selecting the VFD Inverters.
3.5.6 Soft starters

3.5.6.1 The Electronic soft starter shall be suitable for 415V, 3 phase, squirrel
cage induction motor as per requirement. The soft starter shall be
designed for reference from PLC. Soft starter shall have local testing
facility from panel to check its healthiness. The panel shall also have
arrangement for DOL starting by passing the soft starter. For selecting
this mode from the panel, one selector switch shall be provided on the
panel itself.
3.5.6.2 The soft starter shall be microprocessor based using solid state
electronic devices. The starter shall be complete with MCCB,
semiconductor fuse, contactors, electronic/ thermal overload protection
and electronic unit. The voltage ramp during starting shall be adjustable

to suit the requirement. Indication lamps for “On” & “Off” and ammeter
& voltmeter with selector switch shall be provided on the panel.
3.5.6.3 The panel shall also have arrangement for DOL starting by passing the
soft starter. For selecting this mode from the panel, one selector switch
shall be provided on the panel itself.
3.5.6.4 The soft starter shall be enclosed in panel made of cold rolled sheet
steel of minimum 2 mm thickness. The panel shall have IP-54 degree of
protection. The panel shall be floor mounted & suitable for cable entry
from bottom.
3.5.7 Local Control Station (LCS)
Local Control Station (LCS) shall have two push buttons, viz. lockable
stop push button and start push button. The stop push-button shall be
mushroom headed with ‘press to lock” and ‘turn to release’ type.
Degree of protection for LCS shall be IP-54. Enclosure of die cast
Aluminium or cold rolled sheet of thickness not less than 2.5 mm.
The Local Control Station shall be provided with “DRIVE ON” and “DRIVE
OFF” indicating lamps. Indicating lamps shall be industrial LED type.
3.5.8 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System

3.5.8.1 The UPS system shall be complete with battery bank, battery charger,
UPSDB & interconnecting cables as per the requirement.
1. System Features
Under normal conditions, both the units of UPS in parallel redundant
mode shall supply regulated AC power continuously to share the loads.
The rectifier battery charger shall convert the normal AC incoming
power to DC power for the inverter and for float charge of the storage
battery. When incoming AC power supply to one of the UPS fails or it
suffers from loss of output/ half cycle operation, the other UPS system
shall take full load immediately to ensure un-interruptible power supply
to critical loads. The configuration of the UPS system shall be such that
the rectifier and inverter section of both the UPS can function in criss-
cross manner such that rectifier of one UPS can feed inverter section of
both UPS and vice-versa.
a) If either AC incoming power supply fail or deviate from specified
tolerances, the storage battery shall supply DC power to the
inverter of working UPS system upto specified time of 30 minutes
and ensure continuous AC Power supply to the loads.

PAGE 3.52
b) When incoming AC power supply returns to normal, rectifier/
charger of UPS system assumes the DC load from the battery and
simultaneously supply the DC power to inverter and recharge the
storage battery. This shall be achieved automatically without any
disturbance in power supply to the loads.
c) When both UPS systems develop fault, static by pass transfer
switch shall automatically transfer the loads from inverter output
to bypass AC incoming power supply. The static by pass transfer
switch shall automatically re-transfer the load back to UPS, when it
starts functioning in normal condition and stabilizes. Retransfer
shall be inhibited if the two sources are not in phase. Manual by-
pass transfer switch shall also be provided for test / repair /
maintenance of the UPS system.
d) The battery reserve time capability shall not be available if it is
taken out of service for maintenance. However, UPS system shall
continue to function as before and meet all performance criteria as
specified.
2. Technical Parameter
a) Input power supply conditions shall be as below :
Voltage: 415 V + 10%, -10%, 3 phase 4 wire AC
Frequency: 50 Hz + 5%, -5%
Power factor: 0.8 lagging (minimum)
b) The UPS System shall be designed to function under the
following design conditions:-
Applicable standard: IEC – 62040-3
Design ambient temperature: 50 deg C at 95% humidity
Acoustic noise: 60 dBA at 1 M
Degree of enclosure: IP 42
c) UPS output shall meet the following requirements:
Voltage Input: Through input isolation transformer
Output: Suitable for required nos. of 230
V single phase and 415V three phase
Frequency 50 Hz
Power rating As required; Sizing calculations to be
submitted for approval;
Voltage regulation +1%, -1% in steady power conditions;
+5%, -5% from 0% to 100% step load.
Voltage transient 10% maximum deviation (average over

response half-cycle for 100% load application or
removal)
Voltage adjustability + 5 %, -5%
Voltage wave form 5% total harmonic distortion (THD)
maximum with loads containing upto at
least 25% third and 10% fifth harmonic
current
Frequency stability + 0.1% free running
Frequency slew rate 1.0 Hz / second (maximum)
Frequency adjustability + 2 Hz
Overload capacity As per IEC: 100 % continuous, 110% for 1
hour, 125% for 10 minutes, 150% for 1
minute, 1000% for 1 sec
Battery recharge time 8-10 hours upto 95% Charging
d) Storage battery
Voltage As required by the inverter
Protection time 30 Minutes
Type Inverter grade SMF 2V VRLA (lead acid);

The Bidder to submit the sizing
calculation of UPS batteries considering
all derating factors.
End Cell Voltage 1.75V
e) The rectifier and inverter section of UPS system shall be IGBT
based.
f) The static bypass circuit shall be with isolation transformer
and solid stage voltage stabilizer.
g) Parallel redundant UPS system shall have common battery
bank.
h) Complete operation and control of UPS system shall be
microprocessor based with fault diagnostic and data logging
features.
i) Touch membrane switches along with LCD display on the
front side of UPS panels shall be provided to facilitate UPS
operation in desired mode locally and for display of all input,
output and battery parameters.

PAGE 3.54
j) Bypass mode facility (service/ static) shall be considered.
Change over time shall be less than 10 msec. Make before
break switch shall be provided with the bypass system.
k) LED based block mimic diagram shall be provided on the UPS
panels indicating the complete status of the system including
the power route to the UPS, output and other system
elements which are in energised state of operation.
l) Provision of contacts shall be kept in the UPS panel for
annunciation of abnormal operation/ alarm condition in any
other operator panel/ annunciation panel.
m) UPS system shall also have RS-232 serial communication port
interface capacity for alarm and status monitoring at
supervisory control station. The UPS system shall have data
as well as I/O communication with the PLC system. Necessary
hardware & software for the same shall be included.
n) UPS shall have battery health management & monitoring
feature.
o) UPS shall have selectable feature of automatic charging/
discharging the battery for enhancing the battery life.
3. Protection Indication and Annunciation
The protection of the UPS system is to be provided as suitable and
required for rectifier and inverter unit and shall generally include
the following:
a) Rectifier
i) Current limiting to maximum value.
ii) Reduced setting of current limiting value when cooling
system failure occurs
iii) Current limiting during boost charging & float charging
iv) Control power supply failure
v) Any other protection as required for particular application.
b) Inverter Unit
i) High or low output voltage
ii) High or low link voltage
iii) Overcurrent on rectifier output
iv) Overcurrent on inverter output
v) Low battery voltage

vi) Cooling fan failure
vii) Auxiliary supply failure
viii) Control & regulation failure
ix) Any other protection as required for particular application
c) The following high quality meters shall be provided:-
i) Output voltage
ii) Output frequency
iii) Ammeters
iv) Ammeters for battery charging/discharging
d) The annunciation /alarms shall be provided as listed but need
not be limited to:
i) Main power off
ii) Control supply off
iii) Earth fault
iv) Load on AC mains/battery
v) Battery run out warning
vi) Cooling fan failure
e) The following indication are to be provided for the rectifier
unit:-
i) Rectifier on
ii) Cooling fan failure
iii) Battery on float charge
iv) Battery on boost charge
v) Charging failure
vi) AC mains failure due to fuse blown
vii) Overcurrent
viii) High battery voltage
ix) Low battery voltage
x) Battery on load timer
xi) Tests
3.5.9 Illumination
PAGE 3.56
Power supply in proposed conveyors & junction houses shall be
through proposed SLDBs. These SLDBs shall feed proposed LED lighting
fixtures along conveyors & in junction houses through junction boxes.
Following major equipment are considered for illumination
requirements:
3.5.9.1 Sub Lighting Distribution Board (SLDB)
i) SLDB shall receive power at 415V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz and
distribute it into 240V, single phase circuits for connection to the
lighting fixtures and other single phase load of designated
premises as per detail engineering drawings. The SLDBs shall have
the following technical specifications:
a) The SLDB shall be made of MS sheet steel of thickness 2 mm.
The board shall be dust and vermin proof with rubber/
neoprene gasket. The board shall be wall mounted type &
front operated only. All the equipment inside the boards shall
be covered in front with a 3 mm thick bakelite sheet. Only the
operating knobs of the equipment shall be protruding
outside the bakelite sheet.
b) The SLDBs shall have one no. 63A TPN- MCB – incomer and
required nos. of 10A/20A (10 kA) single pole MCBs for
illumination loads. Bus-bar shall be of electrolytic grade
aluminium of grade E91E, as per IS: 5082 -1998 and shall be
colour coded. Bus-bar clearance shall be maintained as per
IS. However, ample clearance shall be kept considering the
future maintenance.
c) The lighting circuit shall be segregated in such a way that in
case of any problem in any SLDB few lamps glow in every
area of illumination
d) The SLDBs shall be provided with two no. earthing studs.
e) Inscription plate shall be given for each board with white
letters in black background and shall be fixed with brass
screws.
f) The recommended level of illumination, type of fittings and
mounting heights of various units shall be considered as:
Sl. Area Lux Type of energy efficient
No. lighting fixture
level
1 Inside shop 150 LED
2 Area 20 LED
lighting

g) Maintenance factor for design of the illumination system in
the electrical rooms/ buildings the maintenance factor shall
be considered as 0.8.
h) All the SLDB distribution boards shall be of steel clad, dust &
vermin proof design.
i) From SLDB to respective lighting fixtures, wiring shall be
through 1.1kV grade PVC insulated 2.5 sq.mm copper wires
in GI conduits or through PVC insulated PVC sheathed 2.5
sq.mm coppers armoured cables in trays. The control rooms
and offices shall have concealed wiring through MS conduits.
3.5.9.2 Small power receptacles (Socket outlets)
20A, 240 V, 3 pin (2 pole and earth) receptacles (socket outlets) of
suitable rating with interlocked switches in sheet steel enclosure shall be
provided at suitable intervals along conveyor gallery.
3.5.10 LT Power and Control Cables
The supply, laying and termination of all LT power and control cables
required for the proposed facility shall be within the scope of the
Bidder. Brief technical specification of LT power and control cables is as
follows:
3.5.10.1 The cable supplied shall work satisfactorily for the power supply system
and climatic condition prevailing at the site.
3.5.10.2 LT power cable up to 240 sq. mm can be used. Control cables shall be
2.5 sq. mm copper cable.
3.5.10.3 The cables shall comply with the latest revision of the following Indian
Standard Specifications (ISS) and to the specific standards mentioned, if
any, in the respective clauses:
IS 1554 (Pt 1) : PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables
1988
IS 7098 (Part-1) : Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC
1988 sheathed cables: Part 1 for working voltage
up to and including 1100 V
IS 8130 : 1984 Conductors for insulated electric cables
and flexible cords
IS 5831 : 1984 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
IS 10810 (Part.1 to Methods of testing of cables
3) : 1985, 1981,
1981

PAGE 3.58
3.5.10.4 Technical Specification of LT Power and Control Cables
Sl. No. Technical specification
1. Grade 1.1 kV grade
2. Core (power) 3 Core for motor feeder, 3.5 for power
feeder
3. Type Heavy duty, XLPE/ PVC insulated,
armored, FRLS PVC sheathed.
4. Conductor Power cable: stranded Aluminum
conductor
Control : annealed tinned high
conductivity stranded copper
conductor
5. Inner sheath Extruded PVC (ST2)
6. Armouring GS flat/ round steel armoured
7. Outer sheath FRLS PVC
3.5.11 Earthing
Earthing shall be done covering the electrical systems; equipment etc. of
the new facility in accordance with the code of practice for earthing in IS
3043:1987 and shall also comply with the relevant clauses of Indian
electricity rules/ relevant international standards. Existing earthing
system shall be used.
Following minimum sizes of conductors shall be considered for
earthing.
Sl. No. Description Materials
1. Underground earthing 75 x 10 mm galvanised steel flat
ring
2. LT equipment 50 x 6 mm galvanised steel flat.
3. Earthing pit 3000 mm deep earthing pit as per
IS 3043 : 1987

3.6 PROCESS CONTROL AND AUTOMATION
3.6.1 Design Criteria
Design, manufacture, installation, testing, inspection and commissioning
of the electrical equipment and facilities shall comply with latest
versions of IEEE/ IEC/ IPSS/ IS, Indian Electricity Rules, laws and
regulations in force in the state of Jharkhand. If relevant IPSS/ IS is not
available for a particular application, the IEC (International Electro-
technical Commission) standards shall be applicable. All plans, design,
manufacture, installation and cabling work shall be based on the ISO
metric system.
3.6.2 Applicable design Standards
Codes & Standards DESCRIPTION
IS/IPSS/IEC/ISA
IS
IS:1554 Part 1-1988 Specification for PVC insulated heavy duty electric
cables upto 1100 V
IS:5831-1984 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of
electric cables
IS:8130-2013 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible
cords
IS:2175-1988 Heat sensitive fire detectors for use in automatic fire
alarm system
IS:3975-1999 Low carbon galvanized steel wires formed wires an d
tapes for armouring of cables
IS:6392-1971 specification for steel pipe flanges
IS:8945-1987 Electrical measuring instruments for explosive gas
atmospheres
IS:9858-1981 Safety requirements for electronic measuring
apparatus
IS:12754 Part 1-1989 process measurement control functions and
instrumentation symbolic representation

PAGE 3.60
IS:13947-2004 Low-Voltage switch gear and control gear
specification
IS:2053-1974 Specification for thermocouple pyrometers
IS:6720-1972 Reference tables for platinum 30 per cent rhodium-
Platinum 6 per cent rhodium thermocouples
IS:7358-1984 Specifications for thermocouples
IS:8018-1976 Specification for platinum alloy wires for
thermocouple elements
IS:8495 part 1-1977 Specification for ceramic components for
thermocouples and resistance thermometers
IS:8784-1987 Thermocouple compensating cable
IS:12579-1988 Specification for base material mineral insulated
thermocouple cables and thermocouples
IS:16923 part 1-2018 Thermocouples part 1 EMF specifications and
tolerances IEC 60584 1 2013
IS:2848-1986 Specification for industrial platinum resistance
thermometer sensors
IS 5, 1994 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels
IS 3043 2018 Code of Practice for Earthing
IEC : International Electrotechnical Commission
Programmable controllers (PLC)-General

IEC 61131-Part 1 to
Information, Definition of basic terminology and
4-1992
concepts
3.6.3 Design Condition for Instrumentation & Automation System

3.6.3.1 All instrumentation & automation equipment shall be designed for
continuous duty operation in steel plant environment.
3.6.3.2 System shall be designed with inbuilt safety system for operating and
maintenance personnel. Facilities for inspection, testing, maintenance
and adjustment at site shall be provided without disrupting process.
3.6.3.3 System shall be of modular design for future
expandability/modification. Necessary redundancy shall be considered
for reducing extent of abnormality and Mean Time to Repair (MTTR).
3.6.3.4 Selection of actuators and final control element shall be based on fail
safe principle.

3.6.3.5 All electrical equipment shall be designed as per IEC safety regulation.
3.6.3.6 Instrumentation equipment shall be standardized to enable maximum
interchangeability of parts and reduce inventory requirement.
3.6.3.7 Equipment noise limitation shall be as per IEC-179 (generally not
exceeding 85 dB).
3.6.3.8 All process parameters, in general, shall be hooked up with PLC for data
acquisition purpose.
3.6.3.9 The design shall include all reasonable precautions and provisions for
the safety of operating and maintenance personnel.
3.6.3.10 The design shall take care of safe operation of the process in case of
trouble in process, power failure etc. Accordingly, selection of an
actuator and final control element for a process shall be based on the
fail-safe principle, that is, on the failure of actuating energy, the final
control element/actuator shall either stay in "as is where is" state or
open full or close full as required.
3.6.3.11 Transmitting system shall generally be electronic unless otherwise
mentioned.
3.6.3.12 The various elements of entire instrumentation & process automation
system shall be generally as per the specification laid down in Technical
specification & GTS.
3.6.3.13 The equipment shall be selected keeping in view of the
interchangeability of parts and less inventory. Due care shall be taken
for standardization in line with the instruments those exists in the Plant.
All the equipment shall be selected from indigenous sources unless it is
not available in India.
3.6.3.14 Cabling: - Cables shall be FRLS type taken over racks/ trays. Cables shall
also be taken through GI conduits at strategic places. All power cable
size shall be selected with due regards to the necessary factors of
selection like fault level, voltage drop, ambient temperature length,
grouping etc. the control cable shall have at least two spare cores for
cables above 5 core. The cables up to 5 core shall have one spare core
& cables above 5 core shall have minimum 2 spare cores.
3.6.3.15 Earthing:- The earthing shall be considered with Earth Pit and Earth
electrodes. The total earth resistance for electrical earthing shall be kept
below one ohm. There shall be separate earth system for electronic item
with resistance value not exceeding 0.5 ohm. The earthing shall be
generally as per IS: 3043-1987.
3.6.4 Instrumentation & control system
1. Magnetic Flow transmitter shall be used for flow measurement.

PAGE 3.62
2. RADAR type level measurement instrument shall be used for level
measurement.
3. Suitable protection shall be provided for protection against
lightening for the instruments mounted in open areas.
4. All the field transmitters shall have external lightning protector.
5. The electronic instruments and control equipment shall be
compatible to an analog signal of 4-20 mA DC. The pneumatic
equipment shall be operated with a signal of 0.2-1.0 kg/cm2 of
compressed air (instrument quality) pressure.
6. The pressure / vacuum / differential pressure/ flow transmitter
shall be of SMART type with two-wire transmission. All transmitters
shall have built-in digital output indicator
7. All the pressure / differential pressure/level/ flow transmitter
transmitters shall have remote sealed diaphragm with capillary.
The impulse line & fittings for the same shall be of stainless steel.
All the pressure gauges and dial thermometer shall have stainless
steel body & measuring system.
8. Erection hardware including impulse pipes (50mm, 20mm & 6mm
OD), conduits, tag marks, root valves, isolating valves, unions, etc
required for completion of the job.
9. All process parameters, (preferably in 4-20 mA analog signal), shall
be hooked up with the instrumentation PLC system.
10. Junction box and pull box shall preferably of thermoplastic
material, IP65 protected with polyamide cable gland having
internal embedded gasket system.
3.6.5 Primary & Secondary Instruments
3.6.5.1 Smart Type Pressure / Flow Transmitters
The pressure /flow transmitters shall be of smart type with variable
capacitance / silicon chip type sensor. Transmitters shall be with built in
local indicator, two / three way manifold and mounting accessories etc.
For flow transmitters square root extractor shall be provided. One set of
Hand Held Calibrator shall be provided for calibration. The transmitters
shall have the following specifications:
Range As Required.
Output 4-20 mA dc & superimposed digital signals on
HART protocol.

Power supply 12-48 V dc.
Power supply Maxim. Zero shift 0.005% of span/volt change
variation effect in power supply.
Load limit 600 ohms.
Zero adjustment Continuously adjustable.
Ambient temp. 0 to 60 deg.C (design limit).
Over pressure limit 200% of upper range limit.
Accuracy + 0.25% of span.
Linearity + 0.1% of span.
Repeatability + 0.05% of span.
Sensitivity + 0.05% of span.
Dead band + 0.05% of span.
Elevation/suppressi - 50% of lower range limit to + 100% of upper
on range limit.
Transient protection Upto 2500 v pulse (8 micro sec rise time and
20 micro sec decay to half value). Inbuilt
Lightning protection shall be provided.
Damping Damping shall be step or continuously
adjustable, so that the time constant varies
from 0-3.0 sec or 0-6.0 sec.
Humidity limit 0-100% R.H.
RFI, EMI effect R.F.I. filter shall be built in. The output error
due to this shall be less than 0.1 % of span for
frequency upto500MHz & field intensity
20v/m/60 to 120 dB.
Temperature effect Maximum zero shift + 0.5% upto 55.5 oC
Over pressure effect Maximum zero shift + 0.5% by 100% maxm.
static pressure
Vibration effect + 0.05% of URL/g for frequency 15 to 150 Hz.
Mounting position Rotation in plane of diaphragm should have
no effect. Maximum zero shift 1.0% for 90
deg.tilt.

PAGE 3.64
Static pressure Zero shift less than 0.5% of span for pressure
effect change upto static pressure limit.
Response time Less than 0.1 sec.
Housing IP-65, IS-2147-1990.
Mounting Suitable mounting on a 50 mm pipe support.
3.6.5.2 Resistance Temperature detectors

The resistance elements shall be of platinum (Pt-100) conforming to
Grade B of IS -2848-1986-platinum resistance thermometer element.
The element shall be duplex ungrounded with 3wire connection. The
resistance values at different temperatures and corresponding
tolerances shall be as per IS : 2848 : 1986. The element shall be wound
on ceramic block. External teflon / fibre glass insulated silver wires
which connect the element to the terminal head shall be welded. The
elements shall have specifications as follows:
Response time Better than 40 seconds with well and 15
seconds without well
Protective Tube  Material-SS 316 Seamless.
 Filling - Magnesium Oxide (Purity- above
99.4%)
 OD- 8 mm or as required.
Loading Spring loaded to ensure positive contact with
well. Rotation of insert with respect to head
& resultant twisting of leads shall be
prevented.
Terminal Head Die cast Al painted with black enamel paint.
Terminal block Brass screw type / silver plated on ceramic
head.
Cable Connection With cable gland and Neoprene / Teflon
grommet of nominal dia 3/4 inch.
Terminal head Nema-4 screwed type with gasket and SS
cover chain
Insulation The insulation resistance between terminal
and the sheath shall not be less than 100 M
Ohms at 100 V dc at room temperature as
per IS : 2848 : 1986.

Immersion length As applicable
Tests As per IS 2848-1986
Accessories  Extension nipples with thermo well
connection,
 Compression fittings / unions,
 SS 304/316 thermo well,
 3 Mtr long flexible conduit of SS.
3.6.5.3 Smart Temperature Transmitter
Input RTD input - Pt-100./K type T/C
Output 4-20 mA dc ( Load resistance 0-600 ohms or

more) and superimposed digital signals on
HART protocol.
Power supply 24 V dc.
Ambient design 60oC

Temperature
Process temp. 0-150oC
Humidity 0-100 %
Accuracy + 0.25 % of full span
Range adjustment Adjustable throughout the range.
I/O isolation The input, output and power circuit shall be

isolated.
3.6.5.4 Thermocouples
The thermocouple element shall be of Ni Cr-Ni Al (Chromel-Alumel)
type K, Pt/Pt-Rh type S conforming to general requirements as per I.S:
7358 : 1984. The thermocouple junction shall be spot welded, duplex
type and ungrounded.
Wire gauge 3.2 mm dia for K type simplex ( 1.6 mm
for duplex ) &
0.5 mm dia for S type

PAGE 3.66
Protective tube OD -15 mm or as required.
Protective tube material 316 SS Seamless / Ceramic sheath
Filling Magnesium Oxide (Purity above 99.4%)
Loading Spring loaded
Accuracy As per IS:7358: 1984.
Response time Better than 8 seconds when checked in
water bath at 90 oC.
Reference for temp. versus IS : 2054 : 1962 for K type T/C.
mV characteristics IS : 2055 : 1962 for S type T/C.
Head Material Die cast aluminium painted with black
enamel.
Terminal blocks Brass screw type / silver-plated.
Cable Connection With cable gland and Neoprene / Teflon
grommet of nominal dia 3/4 inch.
Terminal head cover Nema-4 screwed type with gasket and
SS chain
Accessories  Extension nipples with thermo well
connection,
 Compression fittings / unions,
 SS 304 / 316 thermo well,
 3 m long flexible conduit.
3.6.5.5 Digital Indicator

Digital process indicators shall be generally used for valve position
indication only. This shall receive valve position signal from the valve
position transmitters and display the valve position in terms of
percentage valve opening.
Display Red LED seven segment digits in 3 1/2

digital display.
Accuracy 0.5 %
Alarm High and low alarm indicator and selectable

for each channel

Alarm setting 0-100 % range
Alarm output 2 points/input
Digit Height 15 mm
Input 4-20 mA DC analog, isolated

Impedance - 1Mohm
Output Alarm output of 0.1 A at 220V AC , isolated

dry contact with NO or NC contact
selectable internally.
Power supply 24 V DC
3.6.5.6 Pressure / Differential Pressure Gauge

Direct mounted SS 316 bourdon tube type pressure gauge with SS 3 -
way cock, mounting accessories and suitable for bottom / back entry.
For Steam application the pressure gauge shall be with built-in pigtails.
For viscous fluids / slurries application the pressure gauge shall be with
built-in SS diaphragm separator.
Dial Size 150 mm
Case Cast Aluminium
Blowout Protection Required
Moving parts material AISI 316 SS
Element material AISI 316 SS
Element C - Bourdon
Accuracy +1%
Process Connection M20 x 1.5 / 1/2 " BSP
3.6.5.7 Annunciator
The annunciator shall be solid state (IC CMOS based ) electronic type
and shall conform to the following specifications :
Window configuration As per equipment schedule
Window size 2" x 3"
Mounting Flush panel
Power supply 240 V, 50 Hz AC

PAGE 3.68
Contact Interrogation 24 V DC (Power supply by vendor)
voltage
Contact on alarms Fail-safe
Features "Test", "Reset" &"Acknowledge",
pushbuttons.
Sequence As per ISA - S 18.1
Display White translucent (Back lighted).
Enclosure IP-20, IS-2147-1990
Lamps per Alarm Two.
Logic Solid state IC CMOS based.
First-up features Yes.
Hooter Electronic hooter required.
Mounting Accessories Required.
3.6.5.8 Electromagnetic Type Flow transmitter

Type: Pulsed DC type, Microprocessor based
Mounting Integral
Output 4-20 mA, HART
Max Load 500 ohms
Power supply 220 V, 50 Hz
Parameters Actual flow rate, totalised flow, flow
direction.
Area Classification Non Hazardous
Protection Class IP 67
Flow tube, coil housing, MOC for all shall be as peer process
Liner, Electrodes, grounding requirement.
ring material, Flanges.
3.6.5.9 Pressure Switch

The pressure switch shall be diaphragm, bellows or bourdon type. The
sensing element material shall be SS 316. The case shall be of die cast
Aluminium, weather resistant, black epoxy resin painted and provided
with neoprene gasket. The scale shall have black graduation on white

linear scale with 0-100 % graduation with red pointer. The switches shall
have specifications as follows:
Range As specified in the schedules.
Over range  PS-150% of maximum pressure
protection.
 DPS-Static pressure on one side with
other side open to atmosphere.
Adjustment  Set point
 Internal differential adjustment nut with
dial.
 Set point adjustability over span range.
 ON-OFF differential limit +/- 0.5% FSD or
better adjustable throughout the range.
Switch Two nos SPDT suitable for 240V AC 5 Amp
or 220 V DC, 2 Amps.
Accuracy + 0.5% of span or better
Repeatability + 0.5% of span or better
Enclosure class Hermetically sealed.
Protection class As per standard.
Accessories 1. SS union nut and tail piece suitable for
welding to impulse pipe.
2. Snubber for pulsating fluid.
3. Siphon for steam/hot water services.
4. SS 316 with Teflon Coating diaphragm
seals (with capillary extension if required)
for corrosive, viscous, solid bearing or
slurry type process fluids.
5. Valve SS manifold for PS.
6. Blow out disc.
7. Chemical seals.
3.6.5.10 Temperature Gauge

Rigid Stem type industrial bimetallic thermometer with thermo well and
mounting accessories.
PAGE 3.70
Dial Size 150 mm
Case Cast Aluminium
Bulb, stem and connection AISI 316 SS
Moving parts material AISI 316 SS
Accuracy +1%
Process Connection 1/2 " BSP( M )
3.6.5.11 Electro hydraulic Actuator

1. Type Self-Contained type compact electro-hydraulic
actuator with built-in electronic valve position
feedback transmitter.
2. Enclosure Totally enclosed, dust and weather proof with
high corrosion protection feature suitable for
hazardous area.
3. Accessories Oil tank, filter, relief valve, pressure gauge, level
gauge etc.
4. Power Cylinder Built-in inside the totally enclosed self-contained
chamber of oil tank.
5. Degree of All the oil pipelines, pumps, filter control etc.
compactness inside the totally enclosed chamber of self-
contained oil tank.
6. Oil leakage Nil
7. Vibration Nil
8. Degree of IP 65 for electrical & electronic items
protection
9. Ambient 500 C
temperature
10. Power Supply 3-phase, 415V AC +10%, 50 Hz + 5%
11. Control Supply  4-20 mA for servo valve;
 24V DC for electronic valve position
transmitter;
12. Motor  Explosion proof, continuous duty, Class F
insulation with temperature rise limited to

Class B;
 Motor shall be provided with DOL starter
having electronic relay for O/L & short circuit
protection;
13. Pump Continuous duty double pump with check valves
14. Provision for Actuator to be equipped with hand operated
manual hydraulic pump & direction control valve
operation
15. Interface With DCS
16. Provision for  Remote control through DCS (4-20mA)
local & remote  Local control through hand pump & direction
control control valve
17. Fail safe position  In case of power supply: Stayput
 In case of control signal: Stayput
18. Coupling Shall be equipped with linkage rod having two
mechanism universal ball & socket joints to provide easy
coupling with adjustable length with the butterfly
valve for movement in horizontal & vertical plane
19. Regulating speed To be furnished during DE stage with calculation
& torque
20. One set of following accessories to be provided with EHA of each
type: Set of seals for cylinder, hand pump, gear pump, actuator &
pressure relief valve.
3.6.5.12 Control valve with pneumatic actuator

Line fluid Steam
Pressure drop Minimum
Shutoff pressure 10 kg/cm2
Valve type Globe, flanged
Line size As per schedule
Valve size As per schedule
Body material Carbon steel ( AISI 216 WCB )

PAGE 3.72
Trim material SS 304
Leakage class Class IV
Valve duty Throttling
Actuator type Pneumatic diaphragm type
Input control signal 4-20 mA dc
Air supply At 3 kg/cm. sq
Travel time Minimum
Limit switches Required, 2 Nos.
Hand wheel Required
Accessories Companion flanges (150 #), ANSI
B16.5
3.6.5.13 24 V DC Regulated Power Supply Unit

Input power supply 220 V ac + 10 %, 50 Hz
Output 24 V dc, 10 A
Output adjustability V + 10 %
I 10 % to 115 %
Line regulation for + 10 % + 0.05 % plus 7 mV
change in supply
Load regulation for No Load to + 0.05 % plus 7 mV
Full Load
Transient recovery 100 micro seconds
On - off switch Required
Terminals for input & output Required
LED output indicator Required
3.6.5.14 Signal Isolator

Power supply 220 V ac + 10 %, 50 Hz.
I/P Signal 4 – 20 mA dc analog,
O/P Signal 4 – 20 mA dc / 1 – 5 V dc
No. of O/P channels 2/3
Isolation Optical

o
Working temperature 0 – 55 C
Mounting Back panel.
3.6.6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

Technical Particulars
Sl. No. Specific aspects Technical features

1. System Parameters
1.1 Ambient Operating 50 deg C

temp
1.2 Usage condition Industrial dust prone

environment prevalent in an
integrated Steel Plant
1.3 Power Supply Input power supply to PLC/PCS

System shall be through UPS for rack
supply as well as I/O
interrogation. Auxiliary supplies
for panel lighting, fans, switch
sockets etc shall be raw supply
through isolating transformer
1.4 System Fault level 50 kA (RMS) for 1 second at 415
V
2. Power Supply Unit
2.1 Voltage Levels Voltage levels shall be as

required by the accepted
system.
2.2 Protection Electronic over current
protection with feedback
feature.
Over & under voltage
protection.
Surge voltage protection &
short circuit protection.
Insulation level – 2.5kV for 1
minute
Thermostat protection against
PAGE 3.74
over temperature
Fuse protection in the input &
output circuit
2.3 Voltage distribution through MCBs
2.4 Features Power supply unit shall have
isolating transformer with
proper shielding & filtering.
Redundancy in all power
supplies including input power
supply from UPS. Each chassis
shall have redundant power
supply modules with diode
ORing.
Both UPS power supply units
shall have auto changeover
facility as well as manual
changeover facility through
selector switch.
Power supply unit shall be
provided with diode multipliers
for input interrogation & output
voltage for driving outputs
(interposing relays, solenoid
valves, lamps etc.)
Monitoring of healthiness of all
power supply units
Separate power supplies for
digital & analog I/Os
Earth fault monitoring for all DC
power supplies
DP MCBs shall be provided for
each rack of PLC/PCS system.
20% spare DP MCB shall be
provided in each rack.
3. Construction & Other features

3.1 Panel type Totally enclosed, vertical floor
mounted, sheet steel (CRCA)
clad cabinet of minimum 1.6 &
2.0 mm thickness; PLC/PCS shall
be finish painted as per shade
no. 631 (light grey) of IS5: 1994
or RAL 7035
3.2 Enclosure IP-42 degree of protection
(NEMA 12) in air-conditioned
PLC/PCS Room, Control Room.
However, PLC/PCS system; even
if housed in air-conditioned
enclosure, shall be suitable for
50 deg C ambient temperature
IP-54 for remote I/O Panels
located in shops/ bays
3.3 PLC/PCS System Bus based modular structure
Structure with field expandable design (to
facilitate incremental increase in
memory & input/output).
3.4 Panel Layout Incomer, power equipment,
isolating transformer etc. are to
be segregated from CPU,
memory, I/O and other sensitive
electronic modules.
3.5 Panel accessories 5A, 240 V AC socket outlet with
miniature circuit breaker (MCB).
Cubicle illumination lamps with
switch.
Faceplates for Input and output
modules for marking or labeling
in accordance with the system
drawings.
Dedicated supply sockets for
testing facility.
3.6 Earthing of Panel Continuous copper grounding

PAGE 3.76
bus (25 x 3 mm) size along the
bottom with provision at both
ends for connection to the
earthing grid. Separate isolated
earth bus for electronic earthing
shall be provided.
3.7 Earthing of Metallic parts of all components
components to be effectively earthed. All
hinged doors to be earthed
through flexible earthing braids
of copper.
3.8 Termination of Wherever termination of

shielded cables shielded cables is envisaged,
provision for termination of
cable shields shall be made.
4. Controller Performance Specifications (CPU)
4.1 Type Modular and plug in type.
32 bit micro-processor
(minimum) based fault tolerant
type.
Shall be able to scan & execute
40 PID loops in less than 100
milli seconds & scan digital
inputs in 50 milli-seconds
simultaneously.
Execution time shall be less than
0.5 millisecond per 1K
instruction.
Shall be with in-built serial
communication port; add-on
communication port shall be
provided as required for high
speed I/O update (minimum 5
Mbps).
CPUs shall be capable of

handling 30% additional (future)
I/Os over and above 20 % spare
(installed) I/Os.
CPU loading shall be limited to
maximum 60%. I/O handling
capacity shall be minimum 100K.
Peer to peer communication
through I/O Channel shall be
possible.
4.2 Redundancy Processor redundancy shall be
hardware based system with
dedicated fibre optic media to
connect the primary and
secondary control system.
Implementation of processor
redundancy system shall be
possible without additional
programming and the
changeover between primary
and secondary controller shall
be bumpless.
Changeover shall be within 20
milliseconds.
4.3 Memory Memory shall be fully
(programming & configurable for data/ ladder
data) programme.
Memory size shall be minimum
8MB.
Battery backed (5 weeks)
internal RAM.
User memory cartridge (Flash
EPROM) - 4MB.
Minimum 40% spare capacity for
user memory shall be provided
over and above the requirement

PAGE 3.78
of the application softwares.
4.4 Memory expansion By addition of EPROM memory
cartridge
5. I/O Systems
5.1 Total no. of points As required for the application;
20% spare I/Os shall be
provided over and above the
requirement;
20% I/O in each card;
All spare I/Os shall be wired
upto terminals One spare I/O
Card of each type
5.2 I/O architecture Local and Remote (co-axial/
fibre-optic); Remote I/O shall be
considered if required for the
project and the user
department.
5.3 I/O Units I/O shall be from the same
series as that of CPU
High density, modular, rack
based and plug in type/
Alternatively, I/O modules can
be DIN rail mounted
Insulation level of 1.5kV
Individual fuse shall be provided
for protection against earth fault
5.4 Digital/ Discrete 16/32 input per module
input module
Input interrogation voltage –
24VDC
Opto-coupler to galvanically
isolate each input module from
controller
LED status indication
Shall be suitable for pulse inputs

(incremental encoder/ digital
tacho), Absolute/ incremental
encoder inputs, frequency
inputs, High speed counter type
inputs, proximity switch input
All cards shall be compatible of
receiving digital inputs directly
5.5 Analog input Shall be 4/8 channels, rack
modules based & plug-in type
12 bit or 16 bit resolution
Suitable for 4-20mA/ 0-10V DC/
RTD/ thermocouple/ weighing
signal inputs
5.6 Digital/ Discrete 16/32 points per module
output modules Isolated outputs with two
separate terminals for each
outputs
Output interrogation voltage –
24VDC
Output modules shall be able to
drive interposing relays (24V DC
coils), solenoids, annunciation
lamps, LEDs, Instrumentation
control equipment; Power
contactors shall be actuated
through interposing relays.
Special requirement like position
control shall be met using
separate interface modules.
All discrete O/P shall have fuse
protection
BCD output units shall be
suitable for four digit output
and shall be rated to drive seven
segment LED displays

PAGE 3.80
5.7 Analog Output Shall be of 4/ 8 analog output
channels
Suitable for 4-20mA/ 0-20mA/
+/- 20mA/ 0-10V DC/ +/-10V
DC outputs
With necessary D/A converters
having 12 bit resolution
Each output shall be galvanically
isolated
5.8 Field inputs Field inputs other than MCC
shall be through interposing
relays.
5.9 Special Modules High speed counting
Position sensing control
Real time clock
Process control (PID)
Communication
5.10 Other I/O features
5.10.1 Inputs and outputs I/O modules shall be wired
through solder-less connections;
Input and Output wires shall be
colour coded with colour
terminals.
Fuse terminals with LED
indication shall be considered.
Only positive logic I/O modules
shall be considered;
Channel level diagnostics and
hot swap features shall be
available,
Fault reporting up to HMI shall
be possible.
5.10.2 Grouping of I/Os I/Os of different functional areas

to be accommodated in
different racks so that a rack
failure would affect only one
functional area. Sufficient no. of
spare I/Os wired up to the
terminals shall be considered in
each I/O modules.
5.10.3 Prevention of Each rack position with a
incorrect module mechanical interlock for each
insertion. type of I/O module to prevent
insertion of an incorrect module.
5.10.4 I/O system The I/O system to be
expansion expandable in groups of two I/O
modules.
5.10.5 Diagnostic I/O All I/O modules shall be
modules for control diagnostic I/O modules and
& feed back shall provide following channel
or module level information:
Channel level monitoring of wire
break on field side.
Channel level monitoring of
Short Circuit on field side
Module level monitoring for
interrogation supply missing
Channel level monitoring of
failure of its sensor or its power
Failure of I/O modules or its
power
I/O modules that are used for
purpose like annunciation and
mimic display etc, may be
without diagnostic
5.11 Enhanced Features, Real time Clock: year, month,
day, hour, min., sec., day
PID Loop

PAGE 3.82
On line replacement of any
module shall be possible
without de-energizing the entire
system.
6. Communication High speed communication
Functions through Ethernet TCP/IP, Device
level, I/O level communications
and RS232/ RS485.
Redundancy in communication
modules including I/O
communication module for each
bus
6.1 Serial interface RS232C/ RS485/ USB (two or
more ports depending upon the
requirement)
6.2 PLC/PCS to Through Ethernet/ DeviceNet/
PLC/PCS Specific Profibus/ Modbus
protocols
Deterministic (irrespective of
length & no. of nodes) and fast
communication protocols of
latest technology.
7. System Software PLC/PCS programming software
shall be latest,licensed version,
window based, menu driven
with following minimum
features:
Cyclic, time controlled, interrupt
controls
Retentive/ Non-retentive timers,
Bi-directional counters, latches
etc.
Internal flags generated by
PLC/PCS
All Boolean logic functions
Data transfer

Block transfer
Sub-routines
Arithmetic functions & formula
calculation
Communication functions with
remote I/O as well as
programming/ engineering
stations
Close loop PID control function
Simulation facility/ software for
programme testing without
disturbing the working PLC/PCS
Operating software of all
PLC/PCS under the package
shall be complete with valid
license
8. Application Application software shall be
Software downloadable and editable for
the all PLC/PCS to be supplied
under the package
PLC/PCS programming
language shall be in ladder
diagram.
Programming terminal shall
have feature of rung to rung
comparison between PLC/PCS to
PC and PC to PLC/PCS
programmes with detailed
display of discrepancies
On line and off line
programming shall be possible
and program shall be displayed
on Monitor.
I/O forcing shall be possible
from the programming terminal.

PAGE 3.84
All I/O forces applied to the
primary controller shall be
automatically transferred to the
secondary processor.
To avoid tampering of program,
key/password shall be provided.
Terminal can be used as
diagnostic tool.
Software program shall be
downloaded, debugged &
monitored from the
programming unit.
9. HMI Software Window based latest version at
the time of supply
Development version for
engineering (programming
station) and servers and runtime
versions in operator’s station
Shall have facility of handing
unlimited tags (digital as well as
analog)
Minimum 20% spare HMI tags
shall be available
Software package shall have
facility to perform multitasking,
data acquisition, supervisory
control, monitoring, control
development and routine
software
Shall have features for alarming,
trending, data logging,
production back-up history,
operator’s action list, creation
of shift reports, on line printing
of events
Number of graphic pages shall

not be a limit
Shall be capable of curve fitting,
co-relation and regression
functions
10. Database software As required and supported by
the system offered.
11. Terminal blocks
11.1 Grade and rated Terminal blocks shall be of 1100
Amps V grade rated for 10 Amps
11.2 Type Screwless Cage Clamp type
WAGO/ Phoneix/ Siemens make
terminal blocks
11.3 Features The common points shall be
arranged in looping.
Separate set of terminal blocks
to be provided for I/O.
Terminal Blocks shall be colour
coded.
Proper identification of voltage
levels shall be made on terminal
blocks.
All terminals shall be numbered
for identification and grouped
according to the function.
All terminals shall have
minimum clearance of 300 mm
to cable gland plates and of 150
mm to adjacent terminal rows,
panel sides & other equipment.
Minimum 20% percent spare
terminals shall be provided.
Terminal blocks for inputs of
PLC/PCS shall be with fuse and
LED integrated to it. The output

PAGE 3.86
terminal shall have miniature
relay integrated to it.
Placement of Teminal Blocks
shall be such that it is possible
for maintenance personnel to
operate from right hand.
12. Internal wiring
12.1 Grade and rated Internal wiring shall be of 1100V

Amps grade insulated copper wire of
adequate cross-section with
PVC/ teflon insulation
12.2 Features Minimum cross-section of
insulated wire shall be 1.5 sq.
mm.
Minimum cross-section of wiring
for DI & AI/ AO shall be 1.0
sqmm.
Colour coded wires for digital
inputs, digital outputs, analog
inputs and outputs for different
purpose and voltage rating shall
be considered.
Different colour code shall be
used for different voltage levels.
Segregation of wiring shall be
done for different voltage levels.
Cross-ferruling system shall be
followed for internal wiring.
Printed Ferrules.
Solderless wire wrap connection
shall be preferred. All spare I/O
cards shall be kept wired up to
the terminal strips.
13. Painting PLC/PCS enclosures shall be
finish painted as per shade no.

631 (light grey) of IS5:2007/
Powder coated RAL 7032.
14. HMI System Requirements
14.1 Features Colour graphic system shall be

online real time system for
remote operation, control &
monitoring of process functions.
System shall be capable of
handling large control programs
and multiple HMI screens.
14.2 Functions (with Drive control through graphic
necessary software) station and control panel.
Status information of all drives/
systems etc.
Command execution
Report generation.
Data logging
Dynamic graphic display
System overview
Real time/ historical trending
etc.
Event logging
Alarm logging
Future development of screens
and addition of tags shall be
possible using same licensed
software
Software modeling.
14.3 Operator’s Start/ stop of various equipment
Commands /drives and setting of
parameters for the system

PAGE 3.88
3.6.7 List of Measurement & Control for Instrumentation & Automation
System
3.6.7.1 An indicative list of measurements, controls, alarms & interlocks is given
below and bidder shall comply with the same. However, Bidder shall
offer all the measurements, controls, alarms & interlocks as may be
required for efficient & satisfactory operation of the offered system,
and indicate detailed list of the same in their offer.
1. Flow and pressure measurement before classifying cyclone.
2. Flow measurement before flotation cell.
3. Density meter before flotation cell.
4. Flow measurement before conditioner.
5. Flow measurement before emulsifier.
6. Control valve before emulsifier and conditioning tank.
7. Level measurement in flotation feed sump.
8. Pressure gauge before and after all pumps.
9. Pressure transmitter for torque measurement in slurry thickener
(installed in Hydraulic power pack)
10. Bed level analyzer in the new slurry thickener
11. Bed mass transmitter in the new slurry thickener
12. Flow of slurry to new and existing slurry thickener
13. Blowing and drying air pressure measurement in filter presses
14. All measurements related to hydraulics of filter presses
3.6.7.2 Control Loops
PLC system (Level 1) will carry out the various feedback control loops
envisaged in the process. Brief description of the feedback control
loops is given below:-
 Pressure before raw coal classifying cyclone will be taken to
control pump for feed control to raw coal classifying cyclone.
 Flow before conditioning tank and flow between emulsifier &
conditioning tank will be measured to control the ratio of flow
through control valves to flotation cell.
 Level measurement will have interlock with the pumps.
 Sequencing of batch wise operations in the filter presses
3.6.8 Cables
i) The power wiring within the cubicle shall be done with minimum
2.5 sq. mm copper conductor.
ii) The cable laying shall be as per IPSS : 2-07-040-88

iii) Cable entry to the panels/junction boxes shall be through suitable
gland plates and glands.
iv) The control and signal cables shall have spares as mentioned
below:
 6 - 10 cores: Minimum 2 spare cores.
 11 - 20 cores: Minimum 3 spare cores.
 More than 21 cores: Minimum 4 spare cores.
v) No. of twists per metre for paired/ thermocouple compensating/
triad/ cables shall be 10-12.
vi) Nylon rip cords shall be provided for paired cable.
vii) PTFE insulation, instead of, PVC insulation shall be provided for
paired/ control/ power/ thermocouple compensating/ triad/ load
cell & load cell extension/ FDA/ CCTV cables only in case when
temperature application of relevant cables is > 85 degree celsius.
Following cables shall be considered for instrumentation system:
Type of cables Paired Control Power

Voltage Grade 500 V 1100 V 1100 V
Conductor High conductivity High conductivity High conductivity
Material annealed tinned annealed tinned annealed bare
copper electrolytic copper electrolytic copper electrolytic
grade multistrand grade multistrand grade multistrand
(as per IS-8130, (as per IS-8130, (as per IS-8130,
1984); 1.0 sq. mm 1984); 1.5 sq. mm 1984); 2.5 sq. mm
size. size. size.
Primary insulation Extruded PVC type Extruded PVC type Extruded PVC type
C to IS-5831/ 84, C to IS-1554 (P1)- C to IS-1554 (P2)-
ST-2 with nominal 1988, ST-2 with 1988, ST-2 with
thickness: 0.6 mm. nominal thickness: nominal thickness:
0.6 mm. 0.9 mm.
In case control In case power
cables with XLPE cables with XLPE
insulation are insulation are
considered, then, considered, then,
referred standard referred standard
shall be IS-7098, shall be IS-7098,
1990. 1990.

PAGE 3.90
Individual pair Individual pair NA.
Individual pair screening: Al. screening: NA.
screening / Overall mylar tape, helical, Overall screening:
screening 0.05 mm thick. Al mylar tape,
Overall screening: helical, 0.075 mm
Al mylar tape, thick.
helical, 0.075 mm
thick.
Drain wire Annealed tinned Annealed tinned NA.
(individual & copper, 0.5 mm2 copper, 0.5 mm2
overall) area, 0.3 mm dia. area, 0.3 mm dia.
Armouring Single layer, Single layer, Single layer,
galvanised steel galvanised steel galvanised steel
round wire/ strip, round wire/ strip, round wire/ strip,
size: 0.9 mm wire/ size: 0.9 mm wire/ size: 1.4 mm wire/
4X0.8 mm strip. 4X0.8 mm strip. 4X0.8 mm strip.

Inner Sheath/ Inner sheath: PVC Inner sheath: PVC Inner sheath: PVC
Outer Sheath (ST-1) with (ST-1) with (ST-1) with
minimum minimum minimum
thickness as 0.3 thickness as 0.3 thickness as 0.3
mm. mm. mm.
Outer sheath: Outer sheath: Outer sheath:
Extruded PVC type Extruded PVC type Extruded PVC type
ST-2 of IS-5831/ ST-2 of IS-5831/ ST-2 of IS-5831/
84 with FRLS 84 with FRLS 84 with FRLS
properties & properties & properties &
resistance to resistance to resistance to
ultraviolet ultraviolet ultraviolet
radiation. Minm. radiation. Minm. radiation. Minm.
thickness: 1.24 thickness: 1.24 thickness: 1.24
mm. mm. mm.
FRLS properties of FRLS properties of FRLS properties of
outer sheath:- outer sheath:- outer sheath:-
Minm. O2 index: Minm. O2 index: Minm. O2 index:
29%. 29%. 29%.
Minm. Minm. Minm.
Temperature Temperature Temperature
index: Minm. index: Minm. index: Minm.
250deg.C. 250deg.C. 250deg.C.
Maxm. HCL Maxm. HCL Maxm. HCL
emission: 20%. emission: 20%. emission: 20%.
Maxm. smoke Maxm. smoke Maxm. smoke
density rating: density rating: 60% density rating: 60%
60%. as per. as per.
Standards Conductor Conductor Conductor
pertaining to material electrical material electrical material electrical
Electrical parameters: As per parameters: As per parameters: As per
Parameters IS-8130, 1984 IS-8130, 1984. IS-8130, 1984.

PAGE 3.92
Standards Armour test: As Armour test: As Armour test: As
pertaining to Tests per IS-3975, 1984 per IS-3975, 1984. per IS-3975, 1984.
High voltage test High voltage test High voltage test
(core to core and (core to core and (core to core and
core to screen): Ascore to screen): As core to screen): As
per BS 5308, 1984. per IS 1554 (P2), per IS 1554 (P2),
Tests pertaining to1988. 1988.
PVC insulation & Tests pertaining to Tests pertaining to
sheath: As per IS PVC insulation & PVC insulation &
5831, 1984. sheath: As per IS sheath: As per IS
5831, 1984. 5831, 1984.
Major specifications for Thermocouple, Triad and Load cell cables.
Type of cables Thermocouple Triad
Compensating (J/
K/ E/ T/ N/ B/ R/
S)
Voltage Grade 600 V 600 V
Conductor As per High conductivity
Material thermocouples annealed tinned
considered; 1.5 sq. copper electrolytic
mm size. grade multistrand
(as per IS-8130,
1984.); 1.0 sq. mm
size.
Primary insulation Extruded PVC type Extruded PVC type
C to IS-5831/ 84, C to IS-5831/ 84,
FRLS, ST-2 with ST-2 with nominal
thickness: As per thickness: 0.6 mm.
IS-8784, 1987.
Individual pair Individual pair
Individual pair screening: Al. screening: Al.
screening / Overall mylar tape, helical, mylar tape, helical,
screening 0.05 mm thick. 0.05 mm thick.
Overall screening: Overall screening:
Al mylar tape, Al mylar tape,
helical, 0.075 mm helical, 0.075 mm
thick. thick.
Drain wire Annealed tinned Annealed tinned
(individual & copper, 0.5 mm2 copper, 0.5 mm2
overall) area, 0.3 mm dia. area, 0.3 mm dia.

Armouring Single layer, Single layer,
galvanised steel galvanised steel
round wire/ strip, round wire/ strip,
size: 0.9 mm wire/ size: 0.9 mm wire/
4X0.8 mm strip. 4X0.8 mm strip.
Inner Sheath/ Inner sheath: PVC. Inner sheath: PVC
Outer Sheath Outer sheath: (ST-1) with
Extruded PVC type minimum
ST-2 of IS-5831/ 84 thickness as 0.3
with FRLS mm.
properties & Outer sheath:
resistance to Extruded PVC type
ultraviolet ST-2 of IS-5831/
radiation. Minm. 84 with FRLS
thickness: 1.24 properties &
mm. resistance to
FRLS properties of ultraviolet
outer sheath:- radiation. Minm.
Minm. O2 index: thickness: 1.24
29%. mm.
Minm. FRLS properties of
Temperature index: outer sheath:-
Minm. 250deg.C. Minm. O2 index:
Maxm. HCL 29%.
emission: 20%. Minm.
Maxm. smoke Temperature
density rating: index: Minm.
60%. 250deg.C.
Maxm. HCL
emission: 20%.
Maxm. smoke
density rating:
60%.

PAGE 3.94
Standards Maxm. Conductor Conductor
pertaining to DC resistance at 20 material electrical
Electrical deg. C: 18.2 parameters: As per
Parameters Ohm/Km. IS-8130, 1984.
Minm. Insulation
resistance at 20
deg. C: 25
MOhm/Km.
Mutual
capacitance (core
to core & core to
screen): 250/400
Pf/mtr.
Mutual inductance:
4mH/mtr (maxm).
L/R ratio: 40
microH/ohm
(maxm).
Recommended
minm. bending
radius: 12XOD.
Interval between
identification
marks on cable: 1
mtr.
Standards Armour test: As per Armour test: As
pertaining to Tests IS-3975, 1984. per IS-3975, 1984.
High voltage test High voltage test
(core to core and (core to core and
core to screen): As core to screen): As
per BS 5308, 1984. per BS 5308, 1984.
Tests pertaining to Tests pertaining to
PVC insulation & PVC insulation &
sheath: As per IS sheath: As per IS
5831, 1984. 5831, 1984.
3.6.9 Cables (L.T. Power & Control Cable)
3.6.9.1 TheL.T power cable shall be 1.1 kV grade multi core heavy duty
PVCinsulated, PVC sheathed steel wire armoured with stranded
aluminium conductor. The cable shall be suitable for steady conductor
temperature of 70oC. The PVC insulation of inner and outer sheaths

shall be of extruded PVC type .The PVC outer sheath shall be of PVC
compound suitable for general purpose insulation.
3.6.9.2 All cables shall be tested as per routine and type tests recommended in
the relevant IEC. However flammability test shall be as per IEEE-383 and
maximum acid gas generation and the light transmission shall be as per
or IEC-754-1:1982 .Oxygen index, temperature index and smoke density
tests shall be as per ASTMD- 2863 and 2843-1981 respectively.
3.6.9.3 The bidder shall carry out all routine tests as per relevant standards
referred above, at the manufacturer’s works. However, the following
routine test shall necessarily be carried out in the presence of employer
/ consultant unless otherwise waived off in writing by the employer.
3.6.9.4 All cables irrespective of type of installation shall be protected by
means of GI pipes or sheet metal protective cover up to a height of
1500 mm from the working floor level and platforms for protection
against mechanical damage.
3.6.9.5 All cables shall be provided with identification tags indicating cable
numbers in accordance with the cable/circuit schedule. Tags shall be
fixed at both ends of cable, at joints and at 20 m spacing for straight
runs.
3.6.9.6 Adequate length cables shall be pulled inside the switchboards, control
panels, terminal boxes etc so as to permit neat termination of each
core/conductor. Control cables entering switchboard or control panels
shall be neatly bunched/strapped with PVC perforated tapes and
suitably supported to keep it in position at the terminal block. All spare
cores shall be neatly dressed and suitably taped at both ends.
3.6.9.7 Power cable terminations shall be carried out in such a manner as to
avoid strain on the terminals by providing suitable clamps near the
terminals. All power cable terminations shall be by means of crimping
type cable lugs. Control cables shall be terminated directly at the
terminal blocks by screws.
3.6.9.8 All opening for cable entry in the equipment shall be sealed and made
proof against entry of creeping reptiles.
3.6.9.9 For future installation of cables, provision shall be made to keep 20
percent space as spare on each rack. Alternatively, one spare rack can
be provided all along the route.
3.6.9.10 Cable racks shall be so arranged that they do not obstruct or impair
movement in passage way.

PAGE 3.96
3.6.10 GI Pipes/conduits
3.6.10.1 GI pipes/ conduits shall be used to provide protection against
mechanical damage to cables. These shall be medium gauge, hot dip
galvanised, electric resistance welded (ERW) screwed.
3.6.10.2 Not more than 40% of GI pipe cross sectional area shall be used
(Blocked).
3.6.10.3 In damp locations exposed GI conduit and connections shall be
made water tight. Also, the conduit shall be mounted on steel
spacers having a minimum thickness of 6 mm. Stub ups of
embedded GI pipes shall be fitted with coupling plugged suitably to
avoid damage to threads or entry of foreign matters during
construction.
3.6.10.4 Where a number of GI pipes or conduits are run in a bunch adequate
number of spare pipes (minimum two nos. of comparable diameters)
shall be provided for any unforeseen use.
3.6.10.5 The termination of GI pipes/conduits to equipment subject to
vibration or connection/disconnection at intervals shall be made by
means of flexible metallic conduits. The use of flexible metallic
conduits in outdoor locations shall be avoided as far as practicable.
Flexible metallic conduits shall be liquid tight, galvanised heavy duty
interlocked type with extruded PVC jacket on. The adapter for
coupling flexible conduit to rigid pipes/equipment shall be of cast
aluminum, screw/gland type
3.6.11 Instrument Panels& Cabinets
3.6.11.1 The panel shall be of 2250mm height and open type or cabinet type in
simplex or duplex construction as per the requirement of
instrumentation systems. The panels shall be manufactured from cold
rolled carbon steel sheet conforming to IS 513-1992. Panels shall be
manufactured of 3 mm thick sheet except for doors which can be of 2
mm thick sheets. For duplex panels sheets of 4/5 mm may be used
depending upon size of the panels.
3.6.11.2 The panels shall be free standing type and of welded/bolted
construction. All weld shall be ground smooth, all corners be rounded
and all weld spattered shall be cleared. Surface of panel shall be free
from all mars & defects. Removable eye-bolt lifting lugs shall be
furnished and installed in all panels.
3.6.11.3 All instrument cut outs and drilling shall be straight and through. All
panels shall be supported on suitably sized vibration isolators, designed
for bolting to panel frame and flooring. Access doors on enclosed

panels shall be 750 mm wide by 1800 mm high, single sheet with
suitable latch, hooks, knobs on inside and outside and shall open
forward.
3.6.11.4 The panel surface shall be thoroughly degreased, smoothed
phosphated, filled and painted with rust resistant primer to present a
flat and smooth finish.
3.6.11.5 The legend plates of non-conducting material shall be installed on
panel face for identification. The overall dimension of name plates shall
preferably be 20x80 mm.
3.6.12 Name Plates and Labels
3.6.12.1 Each panel shall be provided with prominent, engraved identification
name plates subject to employer’s approval.
3.6.12.2 All name plates shall be of non-rusting metal or 3-ply Lamicoid, with
white engraved lettering on black back ground.
3.6.12.3 For easy identification of all equipment from inside the panel, they shall
be marked with suitable, clear, indelible paint markings. Use of stickers
for identification is not preferred. Labels for fuses shall also clearly
indicate current ratings of the respective fuses.
3.6.12.4 These labels shall be positioned so as to be clearly visible and shall give
the device number, as mentioned in the wiring drawings.
3.6.13 Terminal Blocks
3.6.13.1 Terminal blocks shall be of 650 volts grade, rated for 10 Amps and in
one piece moulding. They shall be complete with insulating barriers,
clip-on-type terminals, and identification strips. Marking or labels on
terminal blocks shall correspond to their identification or wiring
diagrams. All terminal blocks shall be Elmex type.
3.6.13.2 All terminal blocks shall be suitable for terminating on each side, two (2)
nos. 2.5 mm2 size stranded copper conductors. Not more than two (2)
wires shall be connected to any terminal.
3.6.13.3 All terminals shall be numbered for identification and grouped
according to the function.
3.6.13.4 Terminal blocks shall be properly arranged to facilitate easy termination
of cables. They shall have minimum clearances of 200 mm to cable
gland plates, and of 150 mm to adjacent terminal rows, panel sides and
other equipment.
3.6.13.5 Twenty (20) percent spare terminals shall be provided, distributed over
all terminal blocks.

PAGE 3.98
3.6.14 Wiring
3.6.14.1 All internal wiring shall be carried out with 650 V grade, single core,
1.5 sq.mm or larger, stranded copper wires with colour coded PVC
insulation. Space heater circuits shall have wires having adequate
current carrying capacity, but the size shall be not less than 2.5 mm2
copper wire. Colour shall be identified for AC/DC. Internal wiring
within panel shall be 1mm2 flexible copper.
3.6.14.2 Extra-flexible wires shall be used for wiring to devices mounted on
moving parts such as doors. Suitable guards and grommets shall be
provided for the wiring wherever it could get damaged in their
absence.
3.6.14.3 All wiring shall be properly supported, neatly arranged, readily
accessible and securely connected to equipment terminals and
terminal blocks. Grouping of AC/DC circuit shall be made separately.
3.6.14.4 Internal terminations of stranded conductors shall be made with
solder less crimping type tinned copper lugs which shall firmly grip
the conductor. Insulating sleeves shall be provided over the exposed
part of lugs.
3.6.14.5 Engraved core identification ferrules marked to correspond with
panel wiring diagrams, shall be fitted at both ends of each wire.
Jumper wires between two terminal blocks shall also be ferruled at
both ends.
3.6.14.6 The ferrule numbers shall identify the equipment terminals to which
a wire is connected. The extra ferruling arrangement shall be to
employer’s approval during detailed engineering.
3.6.14.7 Spare contacts of switches, push buttons etc shall be wired up to the
terminal blocks.
3.6.14.8 The panel/desks shall have separate wire for internal wiring of the
panels, distinct and physically separate from wire ways for external
cablings.
3.6.14.9 Internal wiring shall be done so as to facilitate termination of the
external multicore control cables of the adjacent terminal of the
same terminal block.
3.6.14.10 Suitable clamping facility for external cables shall be provided in the
panels.
3.6.15 Impulse pipe laying
3.6.15.1 Impulse pipe laying shall be as per IPSS: 2-07-040-88.
3.6.15.2 All Impulse piping in general shall be given a slope of not less than 1
in 12 except where otherwise specified. The scope of impulse pipe
work shall be done from the tapping point from liquids, steam &

condensable and up from the tapping points for gases unless specific
provisions are made for venting and drawing.Impulse pipe for
process connection shall be of 20mm OD (SS) and that for
Pneumatic signal 12/6 mm OD(SS). For GCM it shall be 50 mm
OD(SS).
3.6.15.3 Vents and drains shall be ensured at the highest or lowest points of
piping run respectively Impulse pipelines shall be kept as short as
possible consistent with good practice and accessibility. Piping &
tubing shall be adequately supported.
3.6.16 Grounding
3.6.16.1 A continuous copper grounding bus of 25 mm x 3 mm size shall be
provided along the bottom of the panel structure. It shall run
continuously throughout the length of the panel and shall have
provision at both ends for connection to the grounding grid.
Wherever terminations of shielded cables are envisaged, provision
for termination of cable shields shall be made.
3.6.16.2 Metallic parts of all components shall be effectively earthed using
green coloured insulated copper wire or other approved means.
However, earthing through effective connection with the metallic
control panel surface by approved type of washers shall also be
acceptable. Electrical continuity of the whole enclosure/frame work
shall be maintained even after painting. All hinged doors shall be
earthed through flexible earthing braids of copper.
3.6.16.3 Electrical & Electronic earthing shall be separate and marked in
panels.
3.6.17 Earthing
3.6.17.1 General:- The method adopted for system as well as equipment
earthing shall be in accordance with IS : 3043-1987 and shall also
comply with the relevant clauses of the latest Rules and Regulations
of electrical authority of Govt. of India.
3.6.17.2 The earthing system shall conform to I.E. rules and latest revision of
relevant Indian Standards.
3.6.17.3 Earthing resistance of the pit should not be more than 0.5 ohms.
3.6.17.4 A continuous copper bus (size 25 mm x 3 mm) shall be provided as
logical earth grid, from earth pit to the local Junction Boxes.
3.6.17.5 The metal frames or enclosures of each electrical equipment shall be
connected firmly to the safety ground at the nearest point, The
connection should be protected such that it does not loose the bond
by vibration or personnel movement.

PAGE 3.100
3.6.17.6 The logic ground bus shall run near each cubicle / equipment and
shall be connected to logic ground of each equipment with smallest
length of wire as possible.
3.6.18 Electronic Earthing System
For electronic circuits like Computer, PLC and peripherals, an
independent earthing system shall be set up with separate electrodes.
The earth resistance of electronic system shall be less than 0.5ohm.
Earth electrode for electronic earthing stations shall be made
comprising of GI pipes of 100 mm internal diameter and 3.0 meters
long, and a copper tube of 25 mm dia shall run inside the pipe and
brazed to a 600 mmx600mmx6 mm copper plate at the bottom. The
equipment / panel to be earthed is to be connected to this through
copper cable. Suitable clamps shall be provided with the electrodes for
connecting earth conductors. The top of the electrodes shall be about
200 mm below ground level. The top portion of the electrodes shall be
enclosed in a 300mmx300mmx300 mm M15 concrete housing and
provision shall be made at each station for testing earthing resistance.
Each earth station shall be complete with alternate layers of coke and
salt. All electronic equipment e.g. PLC , MMI , Computer etc shall be
connected to this network.
3.6.19 Tests
After installation of the earthing, the following site tests shall be carried
out in presence of employer to prove proper design of the systems.
1. Check continuity & tightness of all earth connections.
2. Check earthing of all metallic equipment & all electrical
equipment.
3. Measurement of earth resistance for each electrode.
4. Measurement of total earthing resistance.
5. Measurement of earth loop resistance for E/F path of biggest
drive.
3.6.20 Schedule of equipment
The schedule of equipment given below in tableare indicative only and
do not include all the items covered in the specification. The equipment
shall be covered as per the scope of work laid down in the Chapter-2
and the specification of the items shall be generally as per the details
given in the Chapter-3.

S.NO. Description Qty
Instrumentation & control system
1. PLC system complete with power supply, CPU, I/O 1 set
system, communication sub-system, power
distribution system, HMI, system cabinet, peripherals,
system S/W & application software etc
2. All primary sensors for measurement of process 1 set
parameters complete with matching flanges, thermo
well, erection hardware, connecting assembly,
impulse line, control valves, Electro hydraulic
actuators, pneumatic actuators, transmitters, signal
isolators, relay, pressure switches, final control
element.
3. Power supply & distribution equipment for providing 1 set
power to instrumentation & control system.
4. Signal cable, LT power & control cables, 1 set
compensating cables, special cables, F.O. cable etc.,
cable laying accessories including termination
accessories.
5. Erection Hardware 1 set
3.7 STEEL STRUCTURAL WORK

3.7.1 DesignParameter
3.7.1.1 The Bidder shall carry out the complete design and engineering of the
steel structural work as per provisions of IS 800: 2007.Manual check for
design adequacy shall be provided for major structural members.
3.7.1.2 Conveyor galleries shall be designed as per IS 11592: 2000.
3.7.1.3 The design shall take into account all dynamic loading effects in vertical,
lateral and longitudinal directions apart from dead and superimposed
loads from moving machineries.
3.7.1.4 Dead load shall generally conform to IS 875: PART 1: 1987.
3.7.1.5 Structures shall be designed either for wind or seismic loads whichever
produces worse effect. Wind load on structures shall be considered as
per IS 875: PART 3: 2015 whereas seismic loads shall be taken as per IS
1893: 1984, IS 1893: PART 1: 2016, IS 1893: PART 2: 2014, IS 1893: PART
4: 2015.
PAGE 3.102
3.7.1.6 All structures subjected to dynamic loading shall be checked in
accordance with IS 1024: 1999.
3.7.1.7 Structural steel work shall be of welded construction as far as possible.
Necessary provision in the design shall be kept for temporary loads,
which are expected during erection and maintenance of equipment.
3.7.1.8 Superimposed loads shall be considered in accordance with IS 875:
PART 2: 1987 in addition to technological or operational loads from
equipment as supplied by equipment manufacturer.
3.7.1.9 Special loads and load combination in general shall be considered as
per IS 875: PART 5: 1987.
3.7.1.10 However, uniform live load on the following working platforms shall not
be less than as under:
Lighting walkway/ cat walkway: 200 kg / m2
Structural platform (areas other than platforms having moving
machineries): 500 kg / m2
Staircase tread: 500 kg / m2
Ladder: 120kg at centre of rung
Pipe trestle walkway: 300 kg/m2
Dust load on roof: 50-75 kg/m2. Dust load should be taken over and
above the specified live load.
On Conveyor Gallery
a) Walkway beams: - 400 kg/m2
b) Vertical Girder design: - 300 kg/m2
c) JH floors:- 400 kg/m2
3.7.1.11 The structures shall be designed to resist full dead load, live load, crane
load, superimposed load, technological load, equipment load,
temperature load, construction load, surge load with appropriate
combination of wind or seismic load and due allowances for impact,
vibration, temperature and other secondary effects. The design shall
take into account both static and dynamic loading effects in vertical,
lateral and longitudinal directions and shall be as supplied by
equipment manufacturer apart from dead and superimposed loads from
moving machineries.
3.7.1.12 Permissible vertical and horizontal deflection shall generally be as per IS
800:2007 unless otherwise specified.

3.7.1.13 Design drawings of structures prepared by the Bidder shall contain:-
 Dimension
 Level
 Plan and sectional views showing general arrangement of
structures
 Member sizes
 Member forces
 Complete base plate details including welding detail
 Nature and type of connection details of major structural members
like beams, girders, bracings etc. showing weld details (type, size,
length etc.), gusset plate / face plate thickness etc. Connection
detail shall be shown for all major members
 Bolt hole details (number, diameter, dimension etc.)
 Quantity of structural steel involved etc.
3.7.1.14 For all major structural columns, base shear shall be transferred to the
foundation by shear keys only and not through foundation bolts.
Tension in column member shall be transferred to foundation by
foundation bolts.
3.7.1.15 Steel structural design drawing shall have all necessary information
required for preparing fabrication drawings. Necessary attention shall
be given while preparing fabrication detail such that it facilitates both
fabrication and erection work.
3.7.1.16 Design drawings of structures shall be under approval category. Design
calculation shall be under reference category.
3.7.1.17 Design calculation shall contain manual load calculation aided by
diagrams if necessary.
3.7.1.18 Structural fabrication drawings shall be submitted under information /
record purpose only category.
3.7.1.19 Minimum member sizes:
Sizes of ISA, ISMC, ISMB, NPB and WPB shall not be less than the
following for structural load carrying members-
a) ISA 65x65x6
b) ISMC 125
c) ISMB 150
PAGE 3.104
d) NPB 100
e) WPB 100
However ISMC 75 may be used for purlin and side runners of conveyor
galleries/ cable galleries substantiated by design calculations.
Gratings shall be 6 thick minimum.
Gusset plate shall not be less than 8 mm.
Sealed tubes and sealed hollow box sections if used for external
construction exposed to weather shall not be thinner than 4 mm and for
construction not exposed to weather shall not be thinner than 3 mm.
3.7.2 Materials
3.7.2.1 Structural Steel
Building structures
All structural steel shall be of tested quality. Structural steel conforming
to IS 2062: 2011 grade E250A (for rolled sections and plates up to
20mm thickness) or grade E250 BR (for plates above 20mm thickness)
shall be used.
High strength steel shall conform to IS 2062: 2011 / SAILMA.
Rolled steel sections shall be as per IS 808: 1989 and parallel flange
rolled steel sections shall be as per IS 12778: 2004.
Chequered plates shall conform to IS 3502: 2009.
Skelp plates shall conform to IS 10748: 2004.
All steel gratings, to be used over walkways and stair treads in open
areas, shall be galvanized as per IS 4759: 1996.
Steel tubes wherever used shall be as per IS 1161: 2014, yield strength
240 MPa and grade medium.
Steel used for construction exposed to weather or other corrosive
influences shall not be less than 8 mm in thickness and in construction
not exposed to weather, thickness shall not be less than 6 mm. The
controlling thickness as specified above, for rolled beams and channels
shall be taken as the mean thickness of flange, regardless of web
thickness.
The Bidder shall submit the test certificates conforming to appropriate
standards of all steel materials used for fabrication. All structural steel
shall be free from rust, scales, lamination, cracks, fissures and other
surface defects.

3.7.2.2 CGS Sheeting
CGS sheet shall conform to Type A (depth of corrugation 17.5 mm, pitch
of corrugation 75 mm) with zinc coating of 275gm/m2 inclusive of both
sides as per IS 277: 2018. Base material shall conform to structural steel
grade 250.
Ridging, flashing shall be made of galvanized plain sheets bent to
shape. Material specification shall be similar to that of roof / wall CGS
sheet.
Generally 18G sheet shall be used for roof and 20G sheet shall be used
for sides.
The fasteners for CGS roof and side sheeting shall conform to IS 730:
1978.
Fixing &laying of sheet shall be as per IS 12093: 1987.
3.7.2.3 Translucent Sheets
Glass fibre reinforced translucent sheets made from thermosetting
polyester resin shall conform to IS 12866: 1989 and shall be laid as per
IS 15224: 2002.
3.7.2.4 Glazing
Side glazing work shall be of 6 mm thick wired glass conforming to IS
5437: 1994/ IS 3548: 1998.
All glazing parts shall be securely fixed in the frame and shall be
weather-proof. All glazing shall be flashed with surrounding sheeting.
Glass shall be fixed with putty, suitable for structural steelwork, glazing
clips, neoprene gaskets, etc. as per Indian Standard Specification IS
3548: 1988.
3.7.3 Bolts and Nuts
All bolts and nuts shall conform to IS 1363 / IS 1364 / IS 1367 9latest for
each part) as applicable and unless specified otherwise shall be
hexagonal. Permanent bolts shall not be less than 20 mm. All nuts shall
conform to property class compatible to the property class of the bolt
used.
High strength friction grip bolts (HSFG bolts) shall conform to IS 3757:
1985. Nuts to be used with high strength bolts shall conform to IS 6623:
2004. Hexagonal fit bolts shall conform to IS 3640: 1982 with matching
nuts and washers.

PAGE 3.106
Fastening bolts for transmission line towers shall conform to IS 12427:
2001. Step bolts, wherever necessary shall conform to IS 10238: 2001.
Galvanizing of the bolts, nuts and washers shall be done as per IS 1367:
PART 13: 1983 and IS 1573: 1986.
standards of all steel materials.
3.7.4 Washers
Plain washers shall be made of mild steel conforming to IS 5369: 1975
unless otherwise specified. Heavy washers shall conform to IS 6610:
1972. Spring washers shall conform to type B of IS 3063: 1994. One
washer shall be supplied with each bolt and in case of special types of
bolts more than one washer as needed for the purpose shall be
supplied. An additional double coil helical spring washer conforming to
IS 6755: 1980 shall be provided for bolts carrying dynamic or fluctuating
loads and those in direct tension. Tapered washers conforming to IS
5372: 1975 and IS 5374: 1975 shall be used for channels and beams
respectively. Washers for high strength friction grip bolts & nuts shall
conform to IS 6649: 1985.
3.7.5 Welding
3.7.5.1 The welding and the welded work shall generally conform to IS 816:
1969 and IS 9595: 1996 unless otherwise specified. As much work as
possible shall be welded in shops and the layout and sequence of
operations shall be so arranged as to eliminate distortion and shrinkage
stresses. Electrodes shall conform to IS 814: 2004. The Bidder shall
submit manufacturer’s test certificates as and when called for.
3.7.5.2 All electrodes shall be kept under dry conditions. Any electrodes
damaged by moisture shall not be used. Any electrode which has part of
its flux coating broken away or is otherwise damaged, shall be rejected.
Any electrode older than six (6) months from the date of manufacture
shall not be used. Bidder shall submit batch certificate for electrode.
3.7.5.3 The edges shall be prepared with an automatically controlled flame-
cutting torch correctly to the shape, size and dimensions shown in the
design and fabrication drawings.
3.7.5.4 The welding surfaces shall be smooth, uniform and free from notches,
loose scale, slag, rust, grease, moisture or any other foreign material.
3.7.5.5 The welding procedure shall be arranged by the Bidder to suit the
details of the joints as indicated on the drawings and the position at

which welding has to be carried out. Welding procedure shall cover the
following: type and size of electrodes, current and (for automatic
welding) arc voltage, length of run per electrode or (for automatic
welding) speed of travel, number and arrangement of runs in multi run
welds, position of welding, preparation and set up of parts welding
sequence, pre or post heating, any other relevant information. The
welding procedure shall be so arranged that the distortion and
shrinkage stresses are reduced to a minimum and that the welds meet
the specified requirement of quality. The Bidder shall employ a
competent welding supervisor to ensure that the standard of
workmanship and the quality of the materials comply with the
requirements laid down in this specification.
3.7.5.6 Any weld found defective shall be cut by using either chipping hammer
or gouging torch in such a manner that adjacent material is not injured
in any way.
3.7.5.7 Fusion faces and the surrounding surfaces within 50mm of welds shall
be free from all mill scale and free from oil, paint or any substance,
which might affect the quality of the welds or impede the
quality/progress of welding. They shall be free from irregularities, which
would interfere with the deposition of the specified size of weld or be
the cause of defects. All mill scale within 50mm of welds shall be
removed prior to welding by thorough power wire brushing or by other
approved methods.
3.7.5.8 Parts to be welded shall be properly assembled and held firmly in
position by means of jigs and clamps or suitable arrangements prior to
and during welding.
3.7.5.9 After making each run of welding all slag shall be thoroughly removed
and the surface cleaned.
3.7.5.10 Welded joints should satisfy the following requirements
1. Strength-quality with parent metal.
2. Absence of defects.
3. Corrosion resistance of the weld shall not be less than that of
parent material in aggressive environment.
3.7.5.11 Criteria for test of weld:
1) Visual examination: 100% of the welded joints for fillet welds and
butt welds.
2) Ultrasonic method: 100% for all butt-welded joints.
3) Radiography examination: 2% of length of butt welds made by
manual or semi-automatic machine. 1% of length of butt welds if
made by automatic welding machine.
PAGE 3.108
The Bidder shall engage a reputed or any Government test agency
having Level II Ultrasonic and Radiography examination certificate
holder inspector to carry out the Ultrasonic or X- ray examination tests.
The third party shall carry out tests, interpret test results and
recommend necessary rectification measures. Bidder shall carry out the
rectification work as recommended by the test agency to ensure defect
free welding. Bidder shall obtain certificates from the testing agency
certifying defect free welds and submit to the Employer.
3.7.5.12 Tests:
1) Visual Examination
i) The Bidder shall conduct visual examination and measurement of
the external dimensions of the weld for all joints. Before examining
the welded joints, areas close to it on both sides of the weld for a
width not less than 20 mm shall be cleaned of slag and other
impurities. Examination shall be done by a magnifying glass which
has a magnification power of ten (10) and measuring instrument,
which has an accuracy of ± 0.1 mm or by weld gauges. Welded
joints shall be examined from both sides.
ii) The Bidder shall examine the following during the visual checks:
iii) Correctness and shape of the welded joints, incomplete
penetration of weld metal, influx, burns, un-welded craters, under
cuts, cracks in welded spots and heat affected zones, porosity in
welds and spot welds, compression in welded joints as a result of
electrode impact while carrying out contact welding, displacement
of welded element. All defects observed shall be made good.
The Bidder shall document all data as per standard practices.
3.7.6 Galvanisation
Zinc coating applied by hot-dip galvanizing on structural steel sections,
plates etc. shall be as per IS 4759: 1996. Threaded fasteners shall be
galvanized to conform to the requirements of IS 1367: PART 13: 1983.
The zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, reasonably smooth
and free from such imperfections as flux, ash bare patches,
black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust stains, bulky white
deposits and blisters.
3.7.7 Type of Structures

Generally steel structures shall be of welded beam column type
construction. Steel structures shall generally be fabricated at shop
according to the assembly requirements.
Splices in structures required for transportation, assembly and erection
facilities should be developed by cover plates/ angles, bolts and for
plates by butt-welding.
3.7.8 General Provision
3.7.8.1 Stair
Staircase shall generally be provided instead of vertical ladders, except
where ladders are absolutely necessary.
When ladders are used, its minimum width shall be 500 mm. Maximum
spacing of rungs shall be 250 mm. Safety cage shall be provided where
ladder height is more than 2200 mm from floor/GL.
The main dimensions staircase given below shall preferably be followed
i) Minimum width of flight (mm) 850 mm
ii) Maximum slope with horizontal 38 degrees(generally, but
not exceeding 40
degrees)
iii) Minimum headroom (mm) 2200 mm
iv) Landing width 1200 mm
v) Steps 250 mmwith 25 mm
nosing for chequered
plate steps
vi) Vertical distance between two 3000 mm
consecutive landings
Width of walkway shall generally be 800 mm and in exceptional or
unavoidable circumstances shall never be less than 600 mm.
All openings on platforms shall be either covered with steel removable
covers or handrail all around shall be provided.
Handrails wherever necessary shall be not less than 1000 mm high with
top handrail, mid rail and toe guard made of skelp 147x3.7 thick.
Spacing between posts shall generally not be more than 1000 mm.
3.7.8.2 Connection System of Structural Steel Members
Minimum weld size is 6mm.
All erection bolts shall be 16mm diameter (min).
PAGE 3.110
Minimum size of permanent bolt shall be 20mm dia.
3.7.8.3 Stability and rigidity
The support structures shall be designed for adequate rigidity and
stability in both the directions.
Normally rigidity shall be provided by fixing the column base into the
concrete foundation by means of foundation bolts. Suitable column
bracings shall also be provided to maintain the rigidity of the frames.
3.7.8.4 Shopsplice:
Where shop splices in plates are necessary due to non-availability of
plates in required lengths, full penetration defect free sound butt welds
shall be made. Shop splice in rolled steel angle, joists and channels shall
be developed by fillet welding and cover plates/angles etc.
3.7.8.5 Site splice:
Site splice for members required due to transportation, assembly and
erection facilities shall be developed by fillet welds and cover plates and
angles or high strength friction grip bolts. In case, butt welding in plates
is employed for site splice, the same shall be sound, defect free and of
full penetration
3.7.9 Fabrication
3.7.9.1 Standard
All fabrication of structural steel works shall be in accordance with IS
800: 2007and as per the approved drawings unless otherwise specified.
The tolerances of fabrication of steel structures shall be in accordance
with IS 800: 2007 and IS 7215: 1974 unless otherwise specified. Safety
measures during fabrication shall be as specified in IS 800: 2007.
3.7.9.2 Type of Construction
The steel structures shall generally be of shop-welded construction. Site
connections shall generally be provided by any of the following
methods:
i) Welding with erection bolts.
ii) Bolting with turned and fitted or HSFG bolts.
iii) Bolting with black or HT bolts.
Where erection bolts are used, a run of weld shall be provided around
the bolt head and nut.

Elements shall be fabricated in largest possible sizes optimal with
transport requirements to minimize site work.
Important members shall be assembled under control assembly in
manufacturing shop to prevent mismatch at site
3.7.9.3 Storing of Materials
All materials shall be stored properly on skids, above the ground. It shall
be kept clean and properly drained. Structural steel shall be so stored
and handled that members are not subjected to excessive stresses and
damage. Girders and beams shall be placed upright and stored. Long
members such as columns and chords shall be supported on closely
spaced skids to prevent damage from deflection.
3.7.9.4 Workmanship
1) General
All workmanship shall be equal to the best practice in modern
structural shops. Greatest accuracy shall be observed in the
manufacture of every part of the work and all similar parts shall be
strictly interchangeable.
2) Templates
Templates used throughout the work shall be of steel.
3) Straightening
All materials shall be straight and if necessary before being worked
shall be straightened and / or flattened by pressure unless
required to be of curvilinear form and shall be free from twists.
4) Clearance
The erection clearance for cleated ends of members connecting
steel to steel should not be greater than 2mm at each end. The
erection clearance at ends of beams without web cleats should not
be more than 3mm at each end, but where for practical reasons
the greater clearance is necessary, suitably designed seating or
connections shall be provided.
5) Shearing, flame cutting and planning
Shearing or flame cutting may be used at the Bidder’s option
provided that a mechanically controlled cutting torch shall be used
for the flame cutting and that the resulting edge shall be
reasonably clean and straight. Sheared members shall be free from
distortion at sheared edges. Special care shall be taken to remove
PAGE 3.112
the burnt edges of high tensile steel when flame cutting method is
employed. When gas cutting is adopted, the flame cut edges shall
be machined to a depth of 3 to 5mm depending on the thickness
of the member.
i) Chipping of angle flanges and edges of plates wherever
necessary shall be done without damaging the parent metal.
Chipped edges shall be ground to a neat finish and sharp
corners and hammered rough faces shall be rounded off.
ii) The edges and ends of all flange plates and web plates of
plate girders and built-up columns, of plates forming chords
or web members of lattice girders, and all cover plates, the
ends of all angles, tees, channels and other sections forming
the flanges of plate girders and columns, and chords and
web members of lattice girders shall be ground to plane
finish. Edge preparation for welding may be done by machine
controlled flame cutting with edges free of burrs, clean and
straight. The butting surfaces at all joints of girders or
columns shall be planed so as to butt in close contact
throughout the finished joint.
iii) The ends of all built-up girders and of all columns shall be
faced in an end-milling machine after the members have
been completely assembled. Bearing edges of bearing
stiffeners of built up girders, column caps and bases shall be
machined.
6) Holing:
i) Holes for bolts shall be drilled to conform to clause 10 of IS
7215: 1974. All holes, except as stated hereunder, shall be drilled
to the required size or sub-punched 3mm less in diameter and
reamed thereafter to the required size. Thickness of the material
for sub-punching shall not be greater than 16mm. All matching
holes for bolts shall register with each other so that a gauge of 1.5
mm or 2 mm less in diameter than the hole can pass freely
through the members assembled for bolting in the direction at
right angle to such members. All holes for turned and fitted bolts
shall be drilled undersize by one mm and after assembly reamed,
to a tolerance of +0.13mm, -0mm unless otherwise specified.
When the number of members to be bolted in an assembly
exceeds three or the total thickness is 90 mm or more the holes
shall be drilled or reamed in position after assembly. The parts

shall be firmly bolted together during such block drilling and taken
apart for removal of burrs after drilling. Drilling done during
assembly to align holes shall not distort the metal or enlarge the
holes.
Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a diameter
equal to the nominal diameter of the shank subject to specified
tolerance. Preferably, parts to be connected with close tolerance
bolts shall be firmly held together by clamps and the holes drilled
through all the thicknesses at one operation and subsequently
reamed to size. All holes not drilled through all thicknesses at one
operation shall be drilled to a smaller size and reamed out after
assembly. Where this is not practicable, the parts shall be drilled
and reamed separately through steel jigs.
Holes in adjacent part shall match sufficiently well to permit easy
entry of bolts. If necessary, holes except over size or slotted hole
may be enlarged to admit bolts by moderate amount of reaming.
Hand flame or gas cut hole is strictly not permitted.
7) Assembly:
i) All segments in each course of stove & furnace shell shall be
control assembled at shop to ensure the accuracy of each
segment and the course as a whole. Control assembly shall
be carried out for at least two courses at a time starting with
the bottom most courses. After the control assembly is
accepted, the bottom most course shall be transferred for
final erection and control assembly shall be continued for
next courses. This assembly check shall be carried out in
presence of the Employer. Suitable fixtures, clamps and clips
are to be used during assembly and final welding during
erection.
ii) All parts assembled for bolting shall be in close contact over
the whole surface and all bearing stiffeners shall bear tightly
at both top and bottom without being drawn or caulked. The
component parts shall be so assembled that they are neither
twisted nor otherwise damaged. Specified cambers, if any,
shall be provided.
iii) All parts of bolted and welded members shall be held firmly
in position by means of jigs or clamps while welding. No
drifting of holes shall be permitted except to draw the parts
together and no drift used shall be larger than the nominal

PAGE 3.114
diameter of bolt. Drifting done during assembling shall not
distort the metal or enlarge the holes.
Trial assemblies shall be carried out at the fabrication stage to
ensure accuracy of workmanship and these checks shall be
witnessed by the Employer.
8) Machining of Butts, Caps and Bases
Butt joints of struts and compression members depending on
contact for stress transmission shall be accurately machined and
close butt over the whole section. Care shall be taken that
connecting angles or channels are fixed with such accuracy that
they are not reduced in thickness by more than 0.8mm.
9) Shop Assembly
a) The steel work shall be temporarily shop assembled as
necessary so that accuracy of fit may be checked before
dispatch. The parts shall be shop assembled with a sufficient
number of parallel drifts to bring and keep the parts in place.
b) Since parts drilled with templates should be similar and so
interchangeable, such steel work may be shop erected in part
only as agreed by the Employer.
3.7.10 Erection
3.7.10.1 For erection of steel structures, IS:800-2007 shall be followed and
erection shall be carried out ensuring best workmanship, with specified
standard limits and tolerances. The tolerances in erection of steel
structures shall conform to IS 12843: 1989. Safety measures during
erection shall be as specified in IS 800: 2007.
3.7.10.2 Before the erection of structures, centrelines and level pads are to be
fixed on the foundation as per drawing. The Bidder shall also check
centrelines of all foundation blocks including checking line, level,
position and plumb of all bolts and pockets. Any defect observed in the
foundation shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer. The Bidder
shall satisfy himself fully regarding correctness of the foundation before
installing the fabricated structures on the foundation blocks.
3.7.10.3 Erectionmarking
1) Each fabricated member whether assembled prior to dispatch or not
so assembled, shall bear an erection mark, which shall help to identify
the member and its position in respect of the whole structure, to
facilitate re-erection at site.
2) These erection marks shall be suitably incorporated in the shop detail
and correction drawings.

3.7.11 Dismantling
The Bidder shall ensure that during dismantling of any structural
assembly, the stable equilibrium of balance structures is not disturbed.
a) Sequence of Dismantling and Stacking
The Bidder shall prepare the sequence of dismantling to be
employed and submit it to the Employer for his reference.
3.7.12 Painting
a) Surface preparation:
The grade of surface preparation shall be strictly in accordance
with paint manufacturer's recommendations and specifications.
All surfaces shall be cleaned of loose substance and foreign
materials e.g. dirt, rust, scale, oil, and grease, welding flux etc. so
that the prime coat adheres to the original metal surface. Any oil,
grease, dust or foreign matter deposited on the surface after
preparation shall be removed and care shall be taken so that the
surface is not contaminated with acids, alkalis or other corrosive
chemicals. The primer coat shall be applied immediately after the
surface preparation is completed. Surface preparation shall be
either by hand tool cleaning or by power tool cleaning or by
solvent cleaning, required for execution of the job.
b) Paint application
Paint shall be applied strictly in accordance with paint
manufacturer's recommendations and specifications.
Any over coating shall be done only when previously applied coat
has become hard dry. The work shall generally follow IS 1477 (Part
2) : 1971. Prior approval of the Employer shall be taken in respect
of all primers and/or paints before their use in the works.
Paint shall generally not be applied when the ambient temperature
is 10 degree C and below for paints which dry by chemical
reaction. The temperature requirements specified by the
manufacturer shall be met with. Also paint shall not be applied in
rain, wind and fog or at relative humidity of 80% and above or
when the surface temperature is below dew point resulting in
condensation of moisture. Any wet paint exposed to damaging
weather conditions shall be inspected after drying and the
damaged area repainted after removal of the paint.

PAGE 3.116
c) Each coat of paint shall be continuous, free of pores and of even
film thickness without thin spots. The film thickness shall not be so
great as to affect detrimentally either the appearance or the
service life of the paint. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to dry
sufficiently before application of the next coat to avoid damages
such as lifting or loss of adhesion. Undercoats having glossy
surface shall be roughened by mild sand papering to improve
adhesion of subsequent coat. Successive coats of same colour
shall be tinted, whenever practical, to produce contrast and help in
identifying the progress of work.
d) Painting Specification
1. Painting of covered building structures:
Two coats of single pack air drying phenolic modified alkyd
composition with zinc phosphate as a primer with total dry film
thickness of 80 microns (40 microns/coat) shall be applied. One
coat of primer shall be applied at shop before despatch. The other
coat shall be applied after erection at site.
Final paint of two coats of air drying high gloss phenolic alkyd
modified synthetic enamel paint suitably pigmented with total dry
film thickness 50 microns(25 microns/coat) shall be applied. The
finish paint shall be applied over the primer coat at site.
2. Painting of uncovered structures
Two coats of air drying phenolic modified alkyd composition with
zinc phosphate as a primer with total dry film thickness of 80
microns (40 microns/coat) shall be applied. One coat of primer
shall be applied at shop before despatch. The other coat shall be
applied after erection at site.
The intermediate coat shall be high build phenolic based paint
with micaceous iron oxide (MIO). The dry film thickness shall be
not less than 75 microns.
Final paint shall be two coats of air drying high gloss phenolic
alkyd modified synthetic enamel paint suitably pigmented with
total dry film thickness 50 microns(25 microns/coat) shall be
applied. The finish paint shall be applied over the primer coat at
site.
3.7.13 Testing & Commissioning
Testing and commissioning of steel structures shall be in accordance
with IS 800: 2007.

3.8 CIVIL – DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
3.8.1 General
3.8.1.1 This specification covers the design criteria for Civil Engineering work.
The term ‘Design Criteria’ includes loading standards, permissible
stresses, functional requirements and quality standards to be adopted
as a basis for preparation of designs and drawings by the bidder. These
designs and drawings shall cover buildings for production and non-
production facilities, auxiliary facilities, ancillary buildings and structures,
foundations for buildings and equipment, roads, railways, drains, sewers
and other miscellaneous civil engineering items of work to be provided
and/or to be modified/ rectified by the Bidder.
3.8.1.2 The designs prepared by the Bidder shall not only provide for the
requirements indicated in this specification but also consider the overall
process requirements, and service conditions. The new facilities shall be
planned in such a mane that the existing structures in the vicinity shall
be in anyway adversely affected. The designs shall be compatible with
the existing and proposed structures.
3.8.1.3 Standards
The design criteria for civil engineering work shall be in accordance with
this specification. Detailed instructions on such aspects as are not
indicated herein shall be as per the latest standards, codes. In the
absence of suitable IS specification and codes of practices other
recognized international standards and codes may be followed with the
prior approval from Employer.
This specification covers design of major Civil Engineering items of
work. Other items of work shall be designed according to the relevant
standards, recommendations and stipulations referred above.
In case anything mentioned in this specification is at variance with IS or
other codes of specification mentioned herein, the provisions of this
specification shall prevail.
3.8.1.4 Setting out and Leveling
The Bidder shall set out and level the work and shall be responsible for
the accuracy of the same. He has to provide all instruments and
qualified staffs with labour for getting his work checked by Engineer-in-
Charge, if so desired by the Employer. Such checking, if any, shall not,
however, relieve the Bidder in anyway, of his responsibility for correct
setting out.
3.8.1.5 Safety

PAGE 3.118
The Bidder shall take adequate precautions to ensure complete safety
and prevention of accidents at site and shall be responsible for the
same. The safety precautions shall conform to the safety regulations
prescribed by the safety code for constructions and relevant Indian
Standard Codes, some of which are listed below:
IS: 3764-1992 : Safety code for excavation work.
IS: 4014-1967 : Safety regulations for scaffolding work.
IS: 4081-1986 : Safety code for drilling and blasting

operations.
IS: 4138-1977 : Safety code for working with compressed

air.
IS: 7923-1985 : Safety code for working with construction

machinery.
3.8.1.6 Keeping Work Free from Water
The Bidder shall provide and maintain at his cost, pumps and other
equipment to keep the works free from water and shall continue to do
so until the handing over of the works.
3.8.1.7 Cleaning of site
The Bidder shall keep the site clear on a continuous basis, from muck,
rubbish etc., which may arise out of the work executed by him and
dispose them suitably in allotted areas.
3.8.1.8 Bench Marks, Reference Pillars etc.
The Bidder shall protect all benchmarks, and reference pillars /lines
including ground water gauges from damage or movement during
working. In case of any damage the Bidder shall have to restore the
same to its original condition at his own cost.
3.8.2 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete for Structures and Foundations
3.8.2.1 General
a) Concrete work shall secure a dense, homogeneous, smooth mass
including required finishes, possessing required strength and
resistance to weathering and abrasion for the structures and
foundations.
b) Design of all reinforced concrete structures shall be as per IS: 456-
2000. The structural safety of all foundations on soil shall, in
general be based on IS: 1904-1986.

c) All reinforced cement concrete structures shall be in minimum
grade of M-25 (with 20 mm and downgraded aggregates).
d) For floor laid on grade with boulder soiling base, drains &
trenches, the grade of concrete shall be M-20 (with 20 mm and
downgraded aggregates).
e) Plain cement concrete shall be M-10 (with 40 mm and
downgraded aggregates). However, for mass filling plain cement
concrete PCC 1:5:10 (I cement, 5 sand, and 10 aggregates) shall be
used.
f) For calculation purpose ‘Limit State Design’ methods shall be
adopted.
g) The minimum grade of RCC shall be M25 and PCC shall be M10.
3.8.2.2 Permissible Stresses
Allowable stresses for all reinforced concrete structures shall be as per
IS: 456 – 2000.
3.8.2.3 Foundations
a) Selection of type of foundation shall be based on the
recommendations of soil investigation & survey report, supported
loads, system requirements and site constraints.
b) Open foundations for structures and equipment shall be
proportioned to resist the worst conditions of loading and shall be
generally designed as per the provisions of IS:1904-1986.
c) The depth of foundation shall be determined based on loading on
foundations and bearing capacity at the founding level,
constructional and technological requirements. The maximum
allowable bearing pressure for design of foundation shall
correspond to values indicated in detailed soil investigation report
taking into account limits of allowable settlement considered for
design of structures. However, in no case shall be the foundation is
taken down to less than 600 mm below natural ground level in
case of soil and 200 mm in case of rocky strata. In no case
foundation shall be placed on the filled up soil and the depth of
the foundation shall be taken upto the depths where the virgin soil
strata is found and extra depth shall be filled with PCC 1:5:10
(cement: sand: aggregate).
d) The foundation of the new structure /facility shall be taken at least
to the depth of the foundation of adjoining existing structure/
facility, if any. In no case the loads from the new foundations shall
be transferred to the existing foundation. However in exceptional
PAGE 3.120
circumstances, if it is required to be done, then the existing
foundation shall be checked for the additional load transferred
and shall be supported with design calculation.
e) All faces of concrete or plastered surfaces in contact with earth
shall be provided with two coats of bituminous protective coatings
of approved make. Ground floor slab shall be cast on a layer of
building paper of approved make on boulder/ Blast Furnace slag
soling with moorum binding.
3.8.2.4 Soil Conditions
a) Pile Capacity shall be considered as 50T for 600 mm dia piles in
compression, 9.49 T for lateral load and 29 T for uplift. Minimum
shaft length shall be 15m.
b) Less important foundations of minor structures carrying low loads
can be laid on backfilled soil with 250mm thick compacted boulder
soling, and the allowable bearing capacity shall be considered as 5
Ton/m2.
3.8.3 Floorings
a) In general, all floors on ground except in areas like public
buildings, offices and toilet blocks, shall be made of minimum M15
concrete of 150mm minimum thickness.
b) For the production buildings, including pump houses, stores and
electrical buildings shall be made of minimum M20 RCC of 150mm
minimum thickness. The design of floor shall be done taking into
consideration technological requirements, imposed loading and
other service conditions etc.
c) For areas where the loading is high (more than 5T/Sqm), like Mill
floor, SMS floor etc, the floor shall be designed for actual loads.
The computation of edge and corner stress can be done using IRC
58:1988 or other accepted analysis procedures including finite
element modeling of the structure in Structural analysis software.
The design of RCC floor shall be done as per IS:456-2000.
d) The sub-grade below the floor slab shall be minimum 250 mm
thick stone boulder soling blinded with moorum. Building paper
shall be provided on top of sub-grade before casting the concrete
slab.
e) All sub-grade shall be laid on compacted soil.
f) In specific areas of production buildings where concrete floor is
not required at ground floor level, the flooring shall consist of

minimum 250mm thick stone boulder soiling blinded with
moorum and compacted.
3.8.4 Floor Finishes
Floor finishes for production buildings and auxiliary buildings/areas
shall be shall be provided according to technological and functional
requirements, service conditions and duty and as per manufacturer’s
instruction where applicable. However, the following types of finishes
are suggested for use in the specified areas:
a) Shop Floor: Ironite flooring.
b) Control rooms, PLC Rooms, Computer Rooms, SAS Rooms, control
pulpit: Particle board false flooring/cable vault with suitable antistatic
PVC tiles.
c) Shift office in production buildings: IPS flooring.
3.8.5 Underground and Water Retaining Structures
3.8.5.1 All underground and water retaining structures shall be designed with
using Limit state design / Working stress design as per IS:3370-Part-2:
2021. In case the water retaining structure is being designed using Limit
state design, crack widths shall be taken as below:
a) Generally all water retaining structures shall be designed for crack
width of 0.1mm. All water retaining structures shall be designed
for Severe exposure condition as per Table 3 of IS:456-2000.
Example of this type of structures are Basin of Cooling Tower,
Water tank, settling ponds etc.
b) Generally all underground structures coming in contact with damp
earth shall be designed for crack width of 0.2mm. All underground
structures shall be designed for moderate exposure condition as
per Table 3 of IS:456-2000. Example of this type of structures are
Basement of Electrical rooms, Pipe tunnel / Cable Tunnel etc.
3.8.5.2 All crack widths shall be computed as per the procedure specified in
IS:456-2000 / IS:3370(Part 2):2021. The partial safety factors to be
considered of moments for the computation of crack width shall be
partial safety factor for limit state of serviceability as per Table 18 of
IS:456-2000.
3.8.5.3 The computation of moments can be done using IS:3370 (Part 4):2021
or other accepted analysis procedures including finite element
modeling of the structure in Structural analysis software.
3.8.5.4 In addition to the design to be done as above, to account for any
construction joints and constructional limitations, all underground
PAGE 3.122
structures and water retaining structures shall be water-proofed with by
injections of non-shrink polymeric water proof grouting compound
from inside along with an applications of water proof plaster on external
surfaces as per approved manufacturer’s specification.
3.8.6 Water-Proofing and Damp-Proofing
3.8.6.1 Water-Proofing
a) Underground structures
All underground structures and water retaining structures shall be
water-proofed with by injections of non-shrink polymeric water
proof grouting compound from inside along with an applications
of water proof plaster on external surfaces as per approved
manufacturer’s specification.
b) Roof
All roof surface exposed to atmosphere shall be made water proof
by integral water proofing compound and application of 4mm
thick Atactic Polypropylene modified plastomeric bitumen based
membrane with glass fiber reinforcement as per manufacturers’
specifications
3.8.6.2 Damp Proof Course Concrete
a) Thickness
It shall be as specified in the drawings or in the items. However,
minimum 75mm thickness shall be maintained.
b) Mix
The grade of mix shall be as specified in the drawing or schedule
of quantities. If nothing is specified, the mix shall be 1 part of
cement: 1 ½ part of coarse sand : 3 parts of stone chips. The stone
chips shall be 12 mm downgraded. Approved water proofing
admixture shall be mixed with cement as per manufacturer's
specifications. The water cement ratio shall be as low as possible
to increase the impermeability of concrete and in no case more
than 0.5.
c) Preparation of base surface
The base surface shall be well roughened by chipping and
brushing with steel brush and shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust,
grease, oil and all other foreign & deleterious materials. Then the
surface shall be well moistened with water.
d) Placing and compaction
Just prior to placement of D.P.C. Concrete, a thick coat of cement

slurry shall be applied on the base surface. The placement shall be
as specified for the concrete in beams. The concrete shall be well
compacted to make it dense.
e) Finishing
When the concrete has set enough but remains still green, the top
surface shall be marked in regular pattern by steel trowel so as to
have proper bond with the future work.
f) Curing
The D.P. course shall be kept continuously moist at least 10 days.
3.8.7 Storm water Drainage
3.8.7.1 The design of storm water drainage system shall be based on maximum
hourly precipitation for a storm of duration of 20 minutes. Roof
drainage system shall be designed on the basis of an hourly
precipitation for storm duration of 5 minutes.
3.8.7.2 Gully, traps, inspection pits, junction pits, collecting pits etc. as well as
other facilities shall be located suitably and designed considering easy
access, maintenance and safety.
3.8.7.3 For the purpose of calculation of run-off from catchments area of any
drainage line, the bidder shall estimate areas of buildings, paved area,
roadways, parking areas and open areas within tree catchments area.
Run-off coefficients for design shall be as follows:
a) Open areas : 0.50
b) Roads and paved/parking areas : 0.70
c) Roof surface : 1.00
3.8.7.4 The pipes shall be so designed as to give a velocity of flow not less than
one metre per second when running half full. The maximum velocity
shall not exceed 2.5m per second.
3.9 CIVIL - MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP SPECIFICATIONS
3.9.1 Piling
3.9.1.1 The materials and workmanship shall conform to the provisions of the
following codes and standard specifications in particular mentioned
hereinafter.
IS: 456-2000: Code of Practice for plain & reinforced concrete.
IS: 2911(part –I/section 2)-1979 : Code of practice for design
&Construction of bored cast-in-situ pile foundations.
3.9.1.2 Materials & Workmanship
PAGE 3.124
1) Concrete
Minimum grade of concrete of grade M 25C shall be used for all
piles.
2) Sequence of piling
Individual piles and pile group shall be driven in such a sequence
that the adjacent piles already installed are not disturbed, nor their
carrying capacity reduced: by subsequent driving operation.
3) Driving / Boring
For bored piles, boring shall proceed by alternately driving the
casing and extracting the bored material with the boring tools.
While boring in soft material is liable to cavitation, boring tools
shall not be operated at level below the toe of the casing. Care
shall be taken to ensure that the volume of water added to the
bore shall not be more than the minimum requirement for the
operation of the boring tools.
The casing shall be driven down through the soft material to
penetrate a hard stratum not subjected to cavitation and shall be
sealed in this material as far as possible. Thereafter the boring shall
be continued by means of the boring tools until the approved
bearing layer is reached The bearing layer shall consist of sound
materials capable of safely sustaining the load imposed by the pile
and shall be consistent in quality for a depth of minimum 300 mm.
in the pile bore.
Immediately before concreting the borehole shall be cleaned of all
the loose materials, debris and all the water shall be removed by
pumping and bailing. Concrete shall be so placed as to fill the
entire volume of the borehole without the formation of voids
caused by the faulty compaction or entrapped air. Great care shall
be taken to ensure that the fluid alluvial soil does not penetrate
between batches of the concrete.
Concrete shall not normally be placed through water and in
unavoidable cases such concreting shall be done with necessary
precautions. The ground water shall be balanced by adding fresh
water to the bore and the concreting shall be placed by means of
an enclosed placer or by tremie pipe. In case bf bored piles after
the uncased portion of the bottom of the bore has been
concreted, further concrete is to be added. The sequence of
placing concrete and withdrawing the casing shall be so arranged

that the head of concrete above the bottom of casing is never less
than 3 metres. Once the concreting of the pile is commenced the
work shall proceed without interruption until the pile is completed.
Concreting of the pile shall continue until the pile is fully formed
up to a level not less than 600 mm. above the soffit of the pile cap.
Extraction of casing shall be done in such a way that no necking or
shearing of the concrete in the shaft takes place.
4) Trimming of pile heads
Completed pile shall be trimmed to the cut-off levels as shown on

the drawings when sound concrete has been formed. In the event
of trimming being carried below the cut-off level, the pile shall be
made up to the correct cut-off level with concrete of the same
quality as used in the piles. Reinforcement shall be exposed for the
full bond length appropriate to the diameter of the bar and
projected in the pile-cap. The minimum distance of keying of the
pile into pile cap shall be 50 mm. All concrete and cement shall be
removed from the bars, which shall also be wire- brushed to
remove any loose rust, "dirt and scale.
5) Lengthening of Piles
Where it is necessary to increase the length of any pile after it has

been driven, the head of the pile shall be cut-off to expose the
reinforcement for a full bond length of the bars to lap with the
new bars. The exposed surface of the concrete shall be hacked to
form a key, brushed to remove loose material and covered with 25
mm. thick cement mortar (1: 2 mix,) immediately before the new
concrete is placed.
3.9.1.3 Load Test
The longest practicable time shall be allowed to escape between driving
and testing to allow the recovery of soil conditions around the pile and
it shall not be less than two weeks.
The gross settlement under test load of any pile shall not exceed 12
mm. in case of 150% working load tests, and 20 mm. in case of 200%
working load tests.
3.9.1.4 Standard of Acceptance
The piles shall be accepted as satisfactory only when the work has been
executed in accordance with, this specification and the Standards stated

PAGE 3.126
hereinafter:
1) The head of the pile shall be within 65 mm. of the specified
position on the drawings.
2) The pile shall not be out of plum by more than 1 in 100.
3) The toe of the pile shall be as per the drawings.
4) The total volume of concrete shall not be less than 10% and not
more than 40% greater than the calculated volume. The calculated
volume for this purpose shall be the cross-sectional area inside the
casting multiplied by the length of the shaft. The concrete shall
show the specified strength as indicated by the cube-test results.
5) The results of the load tests carried out in accordance with the
contract and with specifications for load testing shall be
satisfactory.
3.9.1.5 Defective piles
If an individual pile fails to meet the requirements specified in clause
above such pile may be deemed to be defective. When any pile is found
defective; one or more of the following remedial measures shall be
carried out:
1) Replacement of defective piles.
2) Driving additional piles.
3) Alteration in design of pile caps.
3.9.1.6 Recording of Data
For each pile, a record of the following data shall be kept
1) The date and time of commencement and finishing of the driving
operation.
2) The particulars of the equipment and method of driving.
3) The location and type of the pile, with a reference to approved
drawings.
4) The diameter of the pile.
5) The length and cut-off level of the pile.
6) The quantities of concrete, reinforcement, cement and w/c ratio
used.
7) The sequence of the driving in pile groups.
8) The test load and settlement for test piles as required under clause

of load testing.
3.9.2 Excavation and Back Filling
3.9.2.1 Stripping
The bidder shall strip the surface of the site prior to the commencement
of excavation to remove soil containing vegetation/ organic matters and
transport such soil to soil dumps in the allotted site/areas including
handling, within the plant boundary. The Bidder shall not remove any
tree without prior permission of the employer.
3.9.2.2 Excavation for foundations and Trenches
a) Bidder shall visit the site physically for study &refer the
information available with the employer regarding over ground
facilities, underground facilities & adjacent facilities to plan the
excavation activities accordingly, before commencement of work.
In case of non-availability of information regarding underground
facilities, test pits/ peripheral trenches up to 2.0 m depth from
existing ground level (EGL)/ up to top of rock shall be made
manually as per the direction of the employer.
b) The Bidder shall excavate at various levels including soft rock, hard
rock, and weathered rock, to remove materials of any nature or
description such as slag, coal, coke lumps, metallic objects, raw
material lumps etc. , which may be encountered. Side slopes,
benching and/or shoring/strutting for excavation work shall be
sole responsibility of the Bidder. The bed of the excavation shall be
properly dressed and made level. All mud and slush shall be
removed before taking up concreting work. The last 150 mm of
excavation shall be done just prior to laying of concrete. The
excavated materials shall not be placed within 1.5 m from the edge
of any excavation. The Bidder shall take suitable precautions to
prevent ingress of water into the excavated areas during
construction.
c) In case of large quantity of excavated earth for stacking with
respect to available space at work site, employer shall allocate a
temporary space for stacking the excavated earth within the plant
boundary. The bidder shall transport and handle the excavated
earth including levelling, sorting, loading & unloading at his own
cost.
d) The Bidder shall account for all excavated rock, if any. He shall
stack excavated rock and if the Bidder for his works requires
serviceable boulders, it may be issued based on stack
PAGE 3.128
measurement less 40% for voids at the rate to be decided by the
Employer.
e) In case of exposure/ close proximity of existing adjacent
underground facilities/ foundation during execution, the
excavation for proposed/ new facilities/ foundation shall not be
extended below the bottom level of existing facilities/ foundations.
The bidder must inform the employer, consultant and designer
with site sketches for modification of the new facilities/
foundation. However, in unavoidable circumstances, the
bidder/designer shall prepare the protection scheme of existing
adjacent facilities/ foundation and submit for employer’s clearance
before taking up further excavation.
f) The surplus excavated materials and excavated unserviceable
materials from rock excavation shall be transported and disposed
off by the Bidder in spoil dumps or fill areas as directed by the
Employer.
g) If the Bidder excavates to levels lower than those shown on the
drawings, he shall fill up such extra depth at his own cost to the
proper level with lean concrete of volumetric mix 1 cement : 5
coarse aggregate : 10 fine aggregate.
h) Should the bottom of any excavation appear to be soft, unsound
or unstable, the Bidder shall excavate the same to required depths
and the Bidder shall fill up the extra depth with lean concrete of
volumetric mix 1cement : 5 coarse aggregate : 10 fine aggregate.
i) The Bidder shall take all precautions against slips and falls in the
excavation. No extra payment shall be made for removal of slips
and for back filling the space with materials as directed by the
Employer.
j) The excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping on
continuous basis by the bidder at his own expense. In small pits,
water may be bailed out with buckets. Pumping of water shall be
carried out either directly from the excavation or from sumps
made outside the excavation as directed. Adequate care shall be
taken to prevent movement of water through freshly laid concrete
or masonry work. Further, in case of closely located existing
facilities/ foundation, the effect of pumping shall be monitored
continuously for movement of soil from under the existing
facilities/ foundation and pumping shall be stopped immediately,
if the same is noticed.

k) If any excavation for foundation gets filled up with water due to
rain, seepage or for any reason, the water shall be removed and
bottom of the excavation shall be completely cleared of all
silt/slush by the Bidder at his own expense.
l) All water pumped or bailed out during de-watering of pits and
trenches shall be disposed off suitably through properly laid
channels or pipes. Disposal of water shall be carried out in such a
way that no inconvenience or nuisance is caused to the work in
progress in the area or to other agencies working in the area or
cause damage to property and structures nearby.
3.9.2.3 Back Filling
a) Materials
Suitable materials obtained from excavation of foundations shall
be used as far as possible for back filling. Earth used for filling shall
be free from organic and other objectionable matter. All clods of
earth shall be broken or removed. If sufficient amount of suitable
materials are not available at site to complete filling work, then
earth shall be brought to site from outside by the Bidder as
directed by the Employer at his own cost.
b) Filling around foundations with earth
Before commencement of back filling, the Bidder shall remove
from the space around foundations all accumulated water and
slush, shoring and formwork, all debris, brickbats, bits of timber,
cement bags and all other foreign materials. Filling shall be carried
out in uniform horizontal layers, each layer not exceeding 200 mm
in thickness. Each layer shall be watered, rammed, and thoroughly
compacted before the next layer is deposited.
c) Plinth filling and special compaction with earth
Plinth filling or filling where special compaction is required shall be
carried out in uniform horizontal layers, each layer not exceeding
150 mm in thickness. Each layer shall be well watered and
compacted by mechanical means. The Bidder shall take core
samples for each layer, determine the dry density and maintain
logs. The minimum dry density to be achieved shall be 95% of
maximum dry density as obtained by Standard Proctor Test. Tests
shall be conducted by the Bidder as directed by the Employer at
his own cost.
d) Removal of heaps & Mounds
PAGE 3.130
Immediately upon completion of each phase of work, the Bidder
shall at his own cost clear the mounds or heaps of earth which
may have been raised or made and remove all earth and rubbish
which may have become surplus in the execution of works, as
directed.
e) Filling with sand
Filling with sand shall be carried out in uniform horizontal layers,
each layer not exceeding 200 mm in thickness with approved river
sand and each layer to be watered and compacted mechanically to
a well compacted mass.
3.9.3 Plain And Reinforced Concrete Work

3.9.3.1 Materials
a) Cement
1. Ordinary Portland cement shall conform to IS: 269-2015.
2. Portland Pozzolana cement shall confirm to IS:1489-1991.
3. Portland blast furnace slag cement shall conform to IS: 455-
1989. Sampling &testing, as specified in the relevant code, is
to be carried out on cement samples from time to time.
Frequency of these tests shall be increased during monsoon
period.
b) Aggregates
All aggregates shall conform to IS: 383-2016. Sampling & testing
of aggregate shall be carried out as per the provisions of the code.
c) Reinforcement
Reinforcement bars shall be SAIL steel. In case of non-availability
of SAIL steel, steel bars from non-SAIL integrated steel plants shall
be used after prior permission of the employer.
Cold twisted steel bars or TMT bars conforming to IS: 1786-2008,
shall be used as per drawings. However, MS round bars
conforming to IS: 432-1982 or IRC mesh fabric reinforcement
conforming to IS: 1566-1982 can also be used if specifically
required and indicated in the drawings. The binding wire shall be
20 SWG approved annealed iron wire.
All such material shall be free from oil paint and rust coatings.
Manufacturer’s certificate or test certificates for compliance of

provisions of IS:1786-2008 shall be submitted for non-SAIL
product.
d) Shuttering & Scaffolding
In general, material for shuttering & scaffolding shall be steel
and/or ply boards only, as per IS:14687-1999. However, other
material as specified in the code may be used for specific
purposes.
Hot dip galvanized steel deck sheet from approved manufacturer
shall be used as permanent shuttering only (not as composite
construction) in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications/
guidelines & site requirement. Manufacturer’s guarantee for
withstanding the specific use for the project is to be submitted by
the bidder.
e) Water
Water shall be clean and of potable quality as per clause 5.4 of
IS:456-2000.
f) Admixtures
Concrete admixtures confirming to IS:9103-1999 shall be used as
per requirements. The admixtures shall be of approved make and
shall be used as per the manufacturer’s specifications/ guideline.
Bidder has to submit the datasheet of the approved product
before use.
g) Concrete Joints
Joints in concrete shall be taken care in accordance with SP:62-
1997. However, material for joint filler shall be as per durability
requirement, aesthetic requirement, serviceability condition and
technological requirement.
3.9.3.2 Workmanship
a) Concrete
1. Production and control of concrete shall be as per IS:456-
2000. The grades of concrete shall be as indicated in the
drawing. The Bidder shall at his own cost, grade the
aggregates and control the water cement ratio, design the
different mixes to required strength and workability. The
design mix shall conform to the requirement of IS:456-2000
and recommended guidelines in SP:23-1982. The minimum
cement content and maximum water cement ratio of
PAGE 3.132
concrete work shall conform to the requirements of durability
of concrete for moderate exposure as indicated in Table-5 of
IS: 456-2000. All concrete shall be machine mixed, and no
hand mixing shall be permitted.
2. The maximum size of aggregates used shall be as indicated
in the drawings and IS: 456-2000. Where reinforcement is too
closely spaced for the maximum size of stone in a range, the
largest suitable range shall be used. Before commencement
of work, the Bidder shall submit to the Employer for his
approval complete details of the tests for design mixes
together with the grading analysis and mix design
calculations. No concrete shall be placed on site until the
Employer has approved the mix design.
3. Where nominal mixed concrete as defined by IS: 456-2000 is
permitted by the Employer for any specific reason, the
proportion of the materials shall be as indicated in IS: 456-
2000. The water cement ratio shall not exceed those specified
in IS: 456-2000. If the quantity of water is required to be
increased for better workability, the cement content also shall
be increased proportionately so that the water cement ratio
as specified in IS: 456-2000 is not exceeded.
b) Mixing
Except where nominal mix concrete as defined in IS: 456-2000 is
permitted by the Engineer to be used, all components of concrete
shall be proportioned by weight using weigh batches for each
grade of concrete. Mixing shall be carried out in mechanical mixers
and preferably a batch mixing plant shall be used. Batches shall
not exceed the capacity, which can be mixed efficiently as
determined by the mixer efficiency test, and peripheral speed shall
conform to the manufacturer's recommended rate but should not
vary by more than ±10%. Mixing shall continue until the mass is
uniform in colour and consistency but in no case net minimum
mixing time shall be less than 1.5 minutes. Net minimum mixing
time shall begin when all ingredients including water is in the
mixer. Excessive mixing shall be avoided. Mixers shall be operated
only by trained operators. Weigh batches shall be placed level
during use and the hoppers shall be loaded evenly.
c) Consistency
Consistency of concrete shall be controlled as per IS: 456-2000 and

the Bidder shall carry out slump tests in accordance with IS: 1199-
1959.
3.9.3.3 Work tests
Over the full period of construction, the Bidder shall carry out works
tests of concrete cubes at his own cost. Sampling, making up, curing
and testing of specimen shall conform to IS: 456-2000, IS: 516-1959 and
IS: 1199 -1959. The number of specimen to be tested and their criteria
for acceptance shall be according to IS: 456-2000. Frequency of work
tests shall be as per IS:456-2000.
No cost towards sampling & work tests including transportation, if any,
shall be paid separately by the employer.
3.9.3.4 Reinforcement
a) Workmanship shall conform to IS: 2502-1963. All reinforcement
shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, oil, grease and paint, etc.
Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that
shall injure the material, and all bars shall be bent cold.
b) Reinforcement bars shall be placed and maintained accurately in
the position as shown in the drawings. The correct cover to the
reinforcement shall be maintained by use of pre-cast concrete
blocks.
c) The bar bending details of reinforcement bars shall be in
accordance to SP:34-1987 unless specifically indicated in the
drawings.
d) All intersections of longitudinal and transverse bars of stirrups and
all laps shall be securely tied together with approved binding wire.
The binding wire shall be so placed that it touches all the four
corners of the intersection and the two ends shall be looped with
pliers and the end should be turned into the body of the concrete.
e) Welded joints may be used in cases of important
connections.Tests shall be made at the cost of the Bidder to prove
that the joints have reached the strength of the bars connected.
Welding shall be done in accordance with IS: 2751-1979 & SP:34-
1987.
3.9.3.5 Embedments
a) All embedment shall be accurately set and rigidly fastened. Anchor
bolts shall be set to template and firmly secured in vertical and
horizontal line at required positions. Water stops shall be secured
PAGE 3.134
against displacement during the placing of concrete. The joints for
G.S. sheet water stops shall be soldered watertight and those of
PVC and rubber shall be joined by cementing and vulcanizing.
Expansion joint fillers shall be for the full depth of slabs or full
width in walls and shall be cemented with bituminous cement
against previously placed concrete. The ends shall be butted tight
and the upper edge set flush with finished slabs.
b) Anchor holes and anchor bolts shall be protected by covering
suitably.
3.9.3.6 Placing of concrete
a) Transporting concrete
Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the forms
as rapidly as possible by means that shall prevent segregation or
flash set in the concrete during hot weather. The containers shall
be such as to prevent large evaporation. At the time of placing
concrete in very hot weather, care shall be taken to see that the
temperature in wet concrete does not exceed 38°C. Before placing
the concrete, all formwork, embedment and reinforcement shall be
checked for completeness, location, dimension, square and plumb.
All chips and sawdust or other foul matter shall be removed from
within the forms. The base surface shall be well moistened and
puddles wiped out. Placing equipment and accessories shall be
kept clean and free of partially set grout and concrete, and
maintained in proper working order. Suitable walk cradles shall be
placed over the reinforcement when the concrete is placed by
manual transportation.
b) Placing
Concrete shall be placed within a maximum period of 25 minutes
of its removal from mixer. No concrete shall be placed until the
place of deposit has been inspected and approved by the
Engineer. In general, placing shall be direct, by transporting
buckets. Where it is necessary to deposit the concrete at level
differences of more than 1.5 m, short chutes shall be used. Short
chutes and hoppers shall be so designed and installed that
segregation shall not take place. In cases where chutes are
impracticable due to excessive drop to placing level, hoppers and
sectional tubes (elephant trunks) shall be used. Concreting in open
shall not be allowed during rains unless all precautions have been

taken by the Bidder and permission has been given by the
Engineer.
c) Construction joints
Construction joints shall be located such that they do not impair
the strength of the structure. In walls and columns, height of each
lift shall not generally exceed 1.5 m unless otherwise specified in
the drawings. Method of forming all construction joints shall
conform to the provision of IS: 456-2000. All construction joints in
the underground structures shall be provided with rubber or PVC
water bars. The surface of previously placed concrete at the
construction joint shall be thoroughly hacked to expose the coarse
aggregates of previously placed concrete and cleaned with wire
brush and water to remove all laitance. Immediately before placing
fresh concrete, such prepared surface shall be coated with a thin
layer of cement slurry.
d) Expansion joints
Expansion joints shall be provided at locations as shown in
drawings or as per IS code. Details of expansion joints shall be as
shown in the drawing and all materials like polysulphide, bitumen
impregnated fiber board, PVC water bar, metal
(aluminum/copper/GI) sheet etc. shall be of approved make and
quality. Bidder shall ensure that all expansion joints are 100%
watertight. If concrete is found to leak at construction/ expansion
joints or at other places, the Bidder shall carry out necessary
remedial measures at his own cost such as pressure grouting etc.,
immediately to make the structure watertight.
e) Compaction
Concrete in general shall be consolidated by vibration using high
frequency mechanically driven vibrators. Consolidation of concrete
by immersion vibrators shall be done strictly in accordance with
the IS:3558-1983
3.9.3.7 Grouting bases of machine, columns, foundation bolts, etc.
a) Level pads
For preparing the level pads, the top of the foundation concrete
shall be chipped off to remove laitance formed on the concrete
surface, and all loose materials shall be thoroughly cleaned and
the surface is wetted before the grouting. In case level pads are
constructed they shall be of cement concrete with one grade
PAGE 3.136
higher than the mother concrete with 6mm nominal size stone
aggregates in conformity with the grouting requirements with 6
mm size ballast. The top of the level pads shall be finished & fine
and true to level.
b) Grouting:
1. Before placing the grout, the concrete surface shall be
thoroughly cleaned with compressed air and/or water jet. The
surface shall be thoroughly wetted with water for several
hours. Grout concrete/ readymade grouting compound shall
be of grade as per item of work/drawing. Before placing the
grout all free water shall be removed and the flat surface
shall be treated with thin cement slurry/ as per
manufacturer’s specifications.
2. The quantity of mixing water shall be minimum
commensurate with the workability, compaction, and filling
of the grout in all corners and crevices. The grout shall be
evenly spread and compacted by rodding or a vibrator until
the whole of the space is completely filled with concrete. The
grout shall be carefully observed for initial settlement. If any
settlement is observed, further grout is to be poured and
rodded.
3. For base plate having ribs underside the base plate, proper
care is to be taken to ensure filling of the cavities between
the ribs.
4. In case of wide base plates or bedplates having ribs
underside, it may be necessary to do pressure grouting.
5. Thickness of readymade grouting compound in one
operation shall not exceed the manufacturer’s specifications.
6. In case, loosely held / cracked grouting layer is observed, the
grouting shall be removed completely and re-grouting shall
be done.
c) Curing
The grout must not dry out after it is placed in position. The
surface shall be kept moist with wet sacks for at least seven days.
3.9.3.8 Curing and protecting
Curing of concrete with water shall comply with IS: 456-2000. The
Bidder shall keep the exposed surfaces of concrete in a constantly wet

condition for at least 7 days from the date of placing the concrete.
Curing compound may be used subject to approval by the Engineer.
Finished floor and concrete shall be protected carefully until completely
set. Protection of concrete against extreme weather conditions shall
comply with the Code.
3.9.3.9 Repairing and patching
Pockets honey combing and other defects, which may be formed due to
segregation, improper vibration and any other reason whatsoever shall
be completely repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The voids, if
any, shall be properly keyed and reinforced, if necessary. The face shall
be tightly formed and arranged for providing a head in the concrete.
The cavities shall be filled with the same concrete as used for the
structure and thoroughly rodded or vibrated where possible. The filled
hopper shall be left in place until shrinkage has taken place and the
concrete sets sufficiently to stay in place. While still `alive', the upper
part of form hopper shall be removed and excess concrete struck off
and finished with wooden flat or trowel to match existing concrete. Any
fins or unsightly grout runs or bulges shall be removed from the
surfaces exposed to view. The rod holes shall be finished with cement or
grouted to match the existing surface as closely as possible. No cement
wash shall be used unless particularly called for in the drawings.
3.9.3.10 Tolerances
Tolerance is a specified permissible variation from lines, grades or
dimensions given in drawings. No tolerances specified for horizontal or
vertical building lines or footings shall be construed to permit
encroachment beyond the legal boundaries. Unless otherwise specified,
the tolerances shall be as per IS:456 – 2000 or technological
requirement, whichever is stringent.
3.9.4 Boulder Soling
3.9.4.1 Work included
The Bidder shall furnish materials, labour, plant, equipment and tools to
complete the work as specified and/or as shown in drawings.
3.9.4.2 Materials
a) Stone: The boulder for soling shall be granite, trap, basalt, or
similar hard stone as approved by the Engineer. Stone shall be free
from cavities, patches of soft materials, cracks etc. Soling stones
shall generally be 250 mm thick. The other dimensions shall be
300 to 375 mm unless otherwise specified.
b) Sand: The sand shall be of approved river or pit sand conforming
PAGE 3.138
to IS: 383-2016
c) Ballast: The stone ballast shall be of durable, tough, close and hard
texture. Each piece shall be square and sharp. No round or oblong
pebbles or angular chips or flakes or soft sand stones shall be
used.
3.9.4.3 Workmanship
a) The sub-grade shall be dressed to correct level and shall be
rammed or rolled to proper consolidation before laying the soling.
b) The stones shall be placed absolutely close to each other. The
thickness up to 250mm thickness shall be made up in one layer
and thickness beyond 250 mm thickness shall be provided in two
or more layers only. The crevices between the stones shall be hand
packed with stone ballasts which shall be hammered into positions
so as to completely fill-up the crevices. No stone, after packing,
shall move or tilt in any direction when walked over or pushed
with hand. The soling shall be watered and rolled with a power
roller.
c) Selected moorum of approved quality shall be laid over the rolled
surface to a thickness of 25 mm and brushed into surface voids
and well watered and rammed. The operation shall be continued
till the moorum layer stops disappearing from the top.
3.9.5 Granolithic Bedding and Floor Hardener Finish (Ironite Flooring)
3.9.5.1 Work Included
The Bidder shall furnish materials, labour, plant, equipment and tools to
complete the work as specified and/or as shown in the drawings.
3.9.5.2 Materials
a) Cement: Cement shall conform to IS 269-1989 or IS 455-1989.
b) Coarse aggregates: It shall be of approved broken graded stone of
size 10 mm and down, conforming to IS 383-1970.
3.9.5.3 Sand: The sand shall be approved river or pit sand shall conform to IS
383-1970.
a) Floor hardener: It shall be of best quality heavy duty metallic
hardener -Ironite or approved equivalent.
b) Water: Water shall be clean and of potable quality.
3.9.5.4 Proportion of Mix:

The proportion of mix for granolithic bedding shall be 1 part of cement,
1 part of sand and 2 parts of granite chipping. The mix for the floor
hardener shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specification.
3.9.5.5 Workmanship
a) The thickness of granolithic finish shall be 25 mm and shall be laid
in accordance with IS 5491-1969 -Code of Practice for laying in-
situ granolithic concrete floor toppings. The surface of the base
concrete shall be thoroughly hacked or chipped to remove
laitance, well saturated with water and cleaned. Immediately
before laying granolithic finish, any excess water shall be removed
and the surface of the base concrete shall be covered with a thin
layer of cement slurry well brushed in. Just sufficient water shall be
added to the ingredient of granolithic mix to obtain enough
plasticity. The mix shall be laid over the freshly grouted base in
suitably divided panels and evenly well tamped into place,
screeded and lightly floated to required levels. No dimensions of a
panel shall exceed 2 m.
b) When the granolithic finish has partially dried, approved floor
hardener mix shall be applied on the granolithic finish in two or
more coats and finished evenly with a trowel. Each coat shall be
applied before the previous coat dries. Workmanship for floor
hardener finish shall conform to manufacturer's specification. The
thickness of the floor hardener topping shall be 15 mm minimum.
3.9.5.6 Curing
The finished surface after hardening shall be cured for a minimum
period of seven (7) days by impounding water on the finished
surface.
3.9.6 Cast-in-Situ Cement Concrete Floor and Skirting Finish
3.9.6.1 Materials
a) Cement
Cement shall conform to IS:269-1989 or IS:455-1989.
b) Aggregates
The aggregates shall conform to IS:383-2016. Coarse aggregates
shall be approved broken stone of size 12 mm and down.
c) Water
Water shall be clean and of potable quality.

PAGE 3.140
d) Divider
Glass strips or Aluminium strips used shall be 2 mm thick and the
depth shall be equal to the thickness of the floor finish.
e) Colouring pigment
Pigments, synthetic or otherwise, used for colouring shall have
permanent non-fading colour and shall not contain matters
detrimental to concrete. The pigment shall be of approved brand
and tints shall be uniform.
3.9.6.2 Workmanship
a) Generally workmanship shall conform to IS:2571-1970 - Code of
Practice for laying in situ concrete floors.
b) Before in situ concrete floor finish is laid, the surface of the base
concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose materials, dirt and
laitance by steel wire brushing. Where the base concrete is
hardened so much that roughening of surface by wire brush is not
possible, the entire surface shall be roughened by chipping or
hacking and cleaned. The surface shall be then soaked with water
for 12 hours before laying the topping. The surplus water shall be
mopped up, neat cement slurry spread and the concrete for the
topping deposited in suitably divided panels as specified below.
The thickness shall be as indicated in the Technical
Specification/drawing and the mix shall be M-25C concrete and as
stiff as possible consistent with workability so as to prevent
accumulation of excess water or laitance. After thorough
consolidation the topping shall be struck off level and surface
floated with a wooden float. It shall be tested with a straight edge
and mason's spirit level to detect any inequalities and any
undulations found shall be made good immediately.
c) The area requiring finish shall be divided into suitable panels so as
to reduce the risk of cracking. No dimension of a panel shall
exceed 2 m. Flooring shall be laid in alternate panels, the
intermediate panels being filled in after one or two days.
d) After the concrete has been fully compacted it shall be finished by
trowelling or floating. Finishing operation shall start shortly after
the compaction of concrete and shall be spread over a period of
one to six hours depending upon the temperature and
atmospheric conditions. The surface shall be trowelled three times
at intervals so as to produce a uniform and hard surface. The
object of trowelling is to produce as hard and close knit a surface

as possible. Immediately after laying only just sufficient trowelling
shall be done to give a level surface. Sometime after the first
trowelling, the duration being guided by temperature and rate of
set of cement, the surface shall be re-trowelled to close any pores
in the surface and to draw out and mop up any excess water in
concrete or laitance, which shall not be trowelled back into the
topping. The final trowelling shall be done well before the
concrete has become too hard but at such a time that
considerable pressure is required to make any impression on the
surface. Trowelling with dry cement or a dry cement and fine
aggregate mix on the surface shall not be permitted.
3.9.6.3 Curing
As soon as the surface has hardened, it shall be kept continuously moist
for at least fifteen (15) days by impounding water on it.
3.9.7 Internal Flexible Partitions
3.9.7.1 Materials
a) Anodized aluminum sections of `INDAL' extrusions or of any other
approved equivalent. Minimum wall thickness of the aluminum
box section frames shall be 3.18 mm.
b) Glass shall be 5.5 mm thick, clear sheet glass of approved quality
and make.
c) Decorative laminated particle board panels of approved make and
finish. Particle board shall be conform to IS 3097:1980 exterior
grade. Minimum thickness of decorative laminate shall be 1.5 mm.
d) Minimum thickness of panels shall be 12 mm.
e) All edges of the particle board panels shall be provided with a
decorative coat of epoxy based paint over a coat of primer to
prevent moisture absorption.
3.9.7.2 Workmanship
a) All works shall be fixed straight and leveled, so as to guarantee
perfect working of all components. Assembling of components
and fixing of frames shall be as per the manufacturer's
specification/instructions.
3.9.8 Aluminium Double Swing Door with Floor Spring
3.9.8.1 The door frame section shall be made from 101.6 mm X 44.45 mm X
3.18 mm thick anodized aluminium section of INDAL or other approved

PAGE 3.142
equivalent.
3.9.8.2 Door stiles, top and bottom rails, etc. shall be made as per drawing with
anodized aluminium box section having wall thickness of not less than
2.5 mm. 5.5 m thick plate glass of approved quality and make shall be
used as glazing. Glazing shall be fixed to the shutter frame with snap on
bead of approved quality and make and neoprene gaskets. The door
shall be fixed with double action floor spring securely anchored to floor
and pivot for swing action.
3.9.8.3 All necessary fittings and fixtures like anodized Aluminium door handle,
weather strips, bolting and locking arrangements with keys in duplicate
of approved quality and make shall be provided.
3.9.8.4 All other works shall be executed as per the relevant code of practices
brought out by Bureau of Indian Standards, manufacturers specification
and prevalent sound practices in field.

4 COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
4.1 PRELIMINARY ACCEPTANCE
On completion of erection of the facilities by the bidder, trial runs for
individual equipment / units shall be conducted by the bidder to prove
that the facilities have been supplied and erected as per contract and
after erection, facilities are fit for start-up and commissioning. After
liquidation of all the defects and after fulfilling all the provision of
clause 24 of GCC of Standard Bidding Document (SBD) employer
shall issue Preliminary Acceptance Certificate (PAC) for the subsequent
commissioning of facilities.
4.2 COMMISSIONING
Commissioning test shall be undertaken by the bidder as per the
provisions of Clause 25 of GCC of SBD. On successful completion of
commissioning test employer shall issue commissioning certificate.
The facilities shall be deemed to be commissioned on fulfilment of
following:
1) Trouble free/un-interrupted on load operation (minimum 45tph
fine coal feed rate) of the entire system for 100h over a period of
7 days
2) Duration/period of commissioning tests: 7 days
In case of any interruption during the specified period/duration of
commissioning on account of reasons attributable to the employer, the
acceptance of commissioning with regards to duration of
commissioning tests shall be as per the mutually agreed terms between
the employer and the bidder.
4.3 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
4.3.1 General
4.3.1.1 The bidder shall guarantee the equipment for its workmanship,
materials, design and satisfactory operation in accordance with relevant
specifications and provisions of the contract. The guarantee for
performance shall include individual items and systems for various
ratings / outputs as well as for the integrated operation of the plant.
4.3.1.2 The details of the performance guarantee tests, test procedures, test
schedules for the demonstration of performance guarantee parameters
shall be submitted to the employer which shall be mutually agreed
upon.

4.3.1.3 The bidder shall conduct the performance guarantee tests to
demonstrate PG parameters as defined hereunder in subsequent para
and as per provisions of Clause 27 of GCC and Appendix-V of SBD.
4.3.1.4 PG Test shall be conducted within a period of six months after the date
of commissioning once facilities achieve stable operation as well as
production level.
4.3.1.5 Period of PG Test shall be for 7 (seven) days. During this period, the
proposed facility shall be in continuous on load operation at an average
washery feed rate of 430tph on any 3 (three) days. On each of these 3
days, the plant shall remain in operation for 20h. In case it fails, the
process of performance guarantee tests shall be repeated.
4.3.2 Preconditions for Performance Guarantee Tests
4.3.2.1 Preconditions for the employer:
1) Employer has to ensure an average washery feed rate of 430tph
for any 3 days (16h each day) over a period of 7 days during which
PG tests shall be conducted.
2) Employer to ensure availability of utilities.
3) Supply of entire chemicals and reagents required during
performance guarantee tests shall be in the scope of the employer.
However, bidder shall provide necessary specifications, quantity
and source of supply in their offer.
4.3.2.2 Preconditions for the bidder:
1) All the equipment shall be in operating condition in an integral
manner
2) Bidder shall ensure that all the major equipment installed under
this project i.e slurry thickener, classifying hydrocyclones, flotation
circuit and dewatering system has been operated at a minimum of
45tph capacity for continuous 3 days (20h per day) before the start
of PG tests.
4.3.3 Performance Guarantee Parameters
Bidder shall have to demonstrate following parameters as listed
hereunder:
Sl. PG Parameter Guaranteed Value
No.
1 Solids % in underflow of Solids content in underflow of
the new 45tph thickener thickener as per approved

Sl. PG Parameter Guaranteed Value
No.
at a designed slurry feed datasheet
to be finalised during
detail engineering
2 Organic Efficiency (OE) 96%
of the fine coal circuit at
an average washery feed
rate of 430tph
3 Surface Moisture of 30%
dewatered clean coal
from filter press
Organic Efficiency (OE) = Practical yield at 18% ash on air dry basis_
Theoretical yield at 18% ash on air dry basis
Organic efficiency shall be based on the washability characteristics of
the available raw coal in Chasnalla washery
4.3.3.1 Variance of input conditions for PG parameters
In the event of any variance in the input conditions w.r.t quality,
quantity, or any other parameter as defined in cl. 4.3.2 and 4.3.3, which
has a bearing on the PG parameter, the output PG parameter shall be
mutually discussed and revised as per the agreement between the
employer and bidder, before the start of PG tests.
4.3.3.2 Non fulfilment of Performance Guarantee Parameters and Liquidated
Damage
In case the bidder is unable to attain the guaranteed value of
performance guarantee parameters but attains within the minimum
acceptable level of the performance guarantee parameters as specified
either in whole or in part then employer shall recover the amount of
liquidated damage as mentioned hereunder:
Sl. PG Parameter Guaranteed Acceptable LD in % of
No. Value Limit with contract
LD value
1 Solids % in Solids 95% of the 0.75% for
underflow of the content in value in the every 2.5%
new 45tph thickener underflow of approved decrease in
at a slurry feed rate thickener as datasheet for solid
of 1050m3/h, feed per solids content in

Sl. PG Parameter Guaranteed Acceptable LD in % of
No. Value Limit with contract
LD value
slurry solid content approved content in underflow
of 4.2% and datasheet underflow of of thickener
overflow solid thickener and part
content of <150ppm there of
3 Organic Efficiency 96% 94% 2% for
(OE) of the fine coal every 1%
circuit at an average and part
washery feed rate of there of
430tph decrease
from
guaranteed
value
4 Surface Moisture of 30% 35% 1% for
dewatered clean every 2.5%
coal from filter press and part
there of
increase
from
guaranteed
value
Total Liquidated damage for non-fulfilment of PG parameters shall be

limited to 7.5% of contract value, excluding taxes and duties, as
stipulated in GCC of SBD.
4.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

Final acceptance shall be as per clause no. 28 of GCC of SBD.

Annexure 2.1.3-1
LIST OF ACCEPTABLE
CET MAKES OF
EQUIPMENT & SUPPLIES
Experience that delivers
(Indigenous Supplies Only)
MARCH 2022
This document “ACCEPTABLE
MAKES OF EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPLIES” is for indigenous
supplies/ bought out items only
and is a part of the tender
specification for various
packages.
PREAMBLE The “makes” of various

equipment and supplies are listed
out in this document. It is
essential that the equipment/
component/ materials to be
supplied indigenously by the
bidder will be of any one of the
makes listed against that
particular equipment/
component/ material in this
document as further detailed
subsequently.
CATEGORY ‘A’ ITEMS
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
These are critical equipment and items.
• Vendor shall have established Quality
Contractor/ bidder to ensure that items
Management System certified as per ISO-
listed under this category shall be supplied
9001 or equivalent
only from the makes listed.
• Vendor should have installed/ supplied at
In exceptional cases, if less than three
least any of the following within last 7 years
makes out of the listed makes for a
for the item(s):
particular equipment/ item are available to
Either at least 2 reference in any of the the bidder/ contractor for supply then
SAIL plants/ RINL additional makes can be proposed.
However, bidder/ contractor shall establish
Or at least 3 references in any of the private
the non-availability of the listed makes.
Integrated Steel Plants
Additional makes proposed by bidder/
Or at least 3 references in Maharatna Public contractor shall be approved subject to
Sector Undertakings/ Navratna Public fulfilling the acceptance criteria stipulated
Sector Undertakings/ Listed Indian alongside.
companies (excluding financial institutions)
having turnover in excess of ₹5000 crores in
last financial year.
Copy of purchase orders along with

satisfactory performance certificate/
inspection certificates for the above
references shall be provided from the
clients
• Self-declaration from vendor that the

company is not blacklisted in any SAIL
Plants or PSUs.
CATEGORY ‘B’ ITEMS
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
• Vendor shall have established Quality
Management System certified as per ISO- These equipment/ items are for general
9001 or equivalent purpose. Bidder may suggest additional
makes, if any, during tendering stage with
• Vendor should have installed/ supplied at
credentials to fulfil the acceptance criteria
least any of the following within last 7 years
stipulated alongside.
for the item(s):
In case of non-availability of listed makes
Either at least 2 references in any of the
during implementation, procedure listed
SAIL plants /RINL
under category A will apply.
Or at least 3 references in any of the private
Integrated Steel Plants
Or at least 3 references in Maharatna Public

Sector Undertakings/ Navratna Public
Sector Undertakings/ Listed Indian
companies (excluding financial institutions)
having turnover in excess of ₹5000 crores in
last financial year.
Copy of purchase orders along with

satisfactory performance certificate/
inspection certificates for the above
references shall be provided from the
clients
• Self-declaration from vendor that the

company is not blacklisted in any SAIL
Plants or PSUs.
Other Items not listed
Contractor may supply any other item not

mentioned in this list from any make.
• Self-declaration from vendor is required

that the company is not blacklisted in any
SAIL Plants or PSUs.
Note:
• The above categorization has been

given for ease of project
management. However, in
exceptional cases, empowered
committee of the Plant may
approve additional makes.
• If any of the “makes” included in

this list is banned as per the
“Banning of Business Dealings” with
SAIL, it would be applicable as per
the banning order.
CONTENTS
Section Area No. of Page Nos.

items
A Electrical 57 1-7
B Mechanical 74 8 - 16
C Mining & Mineral 12 17

Processing Area
D Process Control & 71 18 - 24

Automation
E Refractory 11 25 - 27
F Utility & Services 119 28 - 41
G Computerization & 14 42
Information Technology
SECTION-A
ELECTRICAL
ACCEPTABLE MAKES LIST ELECTRICAL
SECTION-A
S No. ITEMS CATEGORY MAKE
1. 132 kV & ABOVE EQUIPMENT
1.1. 132 kV/ 220 kV Gas A ABB POWER PRODUCTS & SYSTEMS
Insulated Switchgear INDIA LIMITED, CG POWER &
INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS LTD, GE T&D,
SIEMENS
1.2. 132kV/ 220 kV outdoor A ABB POWER PRODUCTS & SYSTEMS

Isolator/ Disconnecting INDIA LIMITED, CG POWER &
Switch INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS LTD, GR
POWER, RAYCHEM, SIEMENS,
SWITCHGEAR & STRUCTURALS, ELPRO
1.3. 132kV/ 220 kV outdoor A ABB POWER PRODUCTS & SYSTEMS

Circuit Breaker INDIA LIMITED, BHEL, CG POWER &
SIEMENS
1.4. 132kV/ 220 kV outdoor CT/ A ABB POWER PRODUCTS & SYSTEMS
PT/CVT INDIA LIMITED, BHEL, CG POWER &
MEHRU, SIEMENS, TELK
1.5. 132kV/ 220 kV outdoor A BHEL, CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL

Lightning Arrestor SOLUTIONS LTD, ELPRO, OBLUM,
RAYCHEM, SIEMENS
1.6. 132kV/ 220 kV cable XLPE A CCI (Cable Corporation of India), KEC,
KEI, UNIVERSAL
1.7. 132kV/ 220 kV outdoor B ADITYA BIRLA INSULATORS, BHEL, CG

Insulator & Bushing POWER & INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS LTD,
CJI, JAYSHREE INSULATORS, MODERN,
OBLUM, WSI
1.8. ACSR Conductor for 132kV/ B APAR, CABCON, STERLITE

220 kV Transmission Line
2. 33kV EQUIPMENT
2.1. 33 kV Indoor Switchgear A ABB, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS

MARCH 2022
1
SECTION-A
2.2. 33 kV Gas Insulated A ABB, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS,

Switchgear
2.3. 33kV outdoor Isolator/ A ABB POWER PRODUCTS & SYSTEMS

Disconnecting Switch INDIA LIMITED, CG POWER &
INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS LTD, GR
POWER, RAYCHEM, SCHNEIDER,
SIEMENS, SWITCHGEAR &
STRUCTURALS, ELPRO
2.4. 33kV outdoor Circuit Breaker A ABB, BHEL, CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL
SOLUTIONS LTD, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS
2.5. 33kV outdoor CT/ PT A BHEL, CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL

SOLUTIONS LTD, ECS, MEHRU, TELK
2.6. 33kV outdoor Lightning A BHEL, CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL

Arrestor SOLUTIONS LTD, ELPRO, OBLUM,
RAYCHEM
2.7. 33kV outdoor Insulator & B ADITYA BIRLA INSULATORS, BHEL, CG

Bushing POWER & INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS LTD,
CJI, JAYSHREE INSULATORS, MODERN,
OBLUM, WSI
2.8. ACSR Conductor for 33kV B APAR, CABCON, STERLITE, GUPTA

transmission line POWER
3. MEDIUM VOLTAGE – INDOOR (3.3 kV to 11kV)
3.1. Switchgear (Circuit Breaker A ABB, BHEL, L&T, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS

with panels)
3.2. Vacuum Contactor A ABB, ANDREW YULE, BHEL, JYOTI,

SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS, L&T
3.3. CT & PT B AEL, JYOTI, KALPA, KAPPA, PRAGATI,

PRAYOG, ECS, SCHNEIDER
3.4. Isolator B ABB, A BONDSTRAND, MEGAWIN,

PANICKKERSWITCHGEAR PVT. LTD,

MARCH 2022
2
SECTION-A
3.5. HT Bus duct B BHEL, C&S, ECC, STARDRIVE BUSDUCTS

LTD.
4. PROTECTION & METERING
4.1. Protective Relays A ABB, GE T&D, SIEMENS, SCHNEIDER
4.2. SCADA/ SAS System A ABB, ECIL, ETAP, GE T&D, HONEYWELL,

SIEMENS
5. LT SWITCHGEAR
5.1. Intelligent motor controller A ABB, L&T, ROCKWELL AUTOMATION,

for IMCC SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS
5.2. Power Control Centre (PCC) B ABB, BCH, IEE PROJECTS, L&T, PCE
PROJECTS PVT. LTD., SCHNEIDER,
SIEMENS
5.3. Motor Control Centre (MCC) B ABB, BCH, C&S, HAVELLS, IEE PROJECTS,
up to 1000 Amps and PDB L&T, MARINE ELECTRICAL, MEDITRON,
PCE PROJECTS PVT. LTD, SCHNEIDER,
SEN & SINGH, SIEMENS, SWITCHING
CIRCUITS
5.4. Motor Control Centre (MCC) B ABB, BCH, C&S, L&T, SCHNEIDER,
above 1000 Amps SIEMENS
5.5. Air circuit breaker (ACB) B ABB, L&T, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS
5.6. Moulded case circuit breaker B ABB, BCH, C&S, HAVELLS, L&T,
(MCCB) SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS, EATON, ANDREW
YULE
(with positive isolation)
5.7. Motor Protection Circuit B ABB, BCH, C&S, L&T, SCHNEIDER,

Breaker (MPCB) SIEMENS, SPRECHER & SCHUH,
HAVELLS, EATON, ROCKWELL
AUTOMATION

MARCH 2022
3
SECTION-A
5.8. Power Contactors, Auxiliary B ABB, BCH, C&S, L&T, SCHNEIDER,

contactors/ Auxiliary relays SIEMENS, ANDREW YULE, SPRECHER &
SCHUH, EATON, ROCKWELL
AUTOMATION-ALLEN BRADLEY, OEN
(AUXILIARY/CONTROL RELAY ONLY)
5.9. Control switches B ABB, BCH, EPCC, GE POWER

CONVERSION, KAYCEE, L&T, SCHNEIDER,
SIEMENS, SALZER
5.10. Thermal bimetallic Overload B ABB, ANDREW YULE, BCH, C&S, L&T,
relays ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, SCHNEIDER,
SIEMENS
5.11. Electronic over current relay/ B ABB, BCH, C&S, L&T, SCHNEIDER,
Electronic motor protection SIEMENS, SPRECHER & SCHUH,
relay (EOCR/ EMPR) ROCKWELL, EATON
5.12. LT bus duct B ECC, LOTUS POWER, L&T, SPEARHEAD,

STARDRIVE BUSDUCTS LTD.
6. ILLUMINATION
6.1. Lighting fixtures B BAJAJ, Crompton Greaves, GE LIGHTING,

HAVELLS, PHILIPS, SURYA, SYSKA,
WIPRO
6.2. High Mast Tower B BAJAJ, Crompton Greaves Consumer

Electricals Limited, PHILIPS, TRANSRAIL,
VALMONT, CONSOUL, BP PROJECTS,
VENTURA
7. TRANSFORMER

MARCH 2022
4
SECTION-A
7.1. Up to 33 kV A ABB, BHARAT BIJLEE, BHEL, CG POWER

& INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS LTD,
ESENNAR TRANSFORMER, KIRLOSKAR
ELECTRIC COMPANY, PROLEC GE,
RAYCHEM-RPG, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS,
VOLTAMP TRANSFORMERS LTD,
ANDREW YULE, TRANSFORMER &
RECTIFIER, KOTSONS (UPTO 630kVA
only)
7.2. Above 33 kV A ABB POWER PRODUCTS & SYSTEMS

INDIA LIMITED, BHARAT BIJLEE, BHEL,
CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS
LTD, GE T&D, TELK, SCHNEIDER,
SIEMENS, TRANSFORMER & RECTIFIER,
KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC COMPANY
7.3. Dry type A ABB POWER PRODUCTS & SYSTEMS

INDIA LIMITED, BHEL, CG POWER &
INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS LTD, ESENNAR
TRANSFORMER, KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC
COMPANY, RPG-RAYCHEM, VOLTAMP
TRANSFORMERS LTD, SUDHIR
8. MV REACTOR A CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS

LTD, GE T&D, PS ELECTRICALS, QUALITY
POWER, TRANSFORMER & RECTIFIER,
SCHNEIDER
9. DRIVES
9.1. Variable frequency drive B ABB, CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL

(VFD)<1.1kV SOLUTIONS LTD. (for motor upto 30 kW),
DANFOSS, GE POWER CONVERSION,
HITACHI-HIREL, ROCKWELL
AUTOMATION, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS,
TMEIC, YASKAWA, FUJI, DELTA
ELECTRONICS INDIA PVT LTD (upto
90kW only)

MARCH 2022
5
SECTION-A
9.2. Thyristor Converter/ B ABB, GE Power Conversion, ROCKWELL

AUTOMATION, SIEMENS, FUJI
DC DRIVE
9.3. Soft starter B ABB, L&T, PARKER, ROCKWELL

AUTOMATION, SIEMENS, SCHNEIDER,
DANFOSS
9.4. FCMA /series reactor type B ABB, INNOVATIVE TECHNOMICS,

soft starter ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, SCHNEIDER,
SIEMENS, LECON ENERGETICS PVT LTD
10. MOTORS
10.1. Synchronous Motor A ABB, BHEL, SIEMENS, GE
10.2. HT – AC A ABB, BHEL, CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL

SOLUTIONS LTD., KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC
COMPANY, SIEMENS, WEG, TMEIC,
JEUMONT ELECTRIC INDIA PVT LTD
10.3. LT – AC B ABB, BHARAT BIJLEE, CG POWER &

INDUSTRIAL SOLUTIONS LTD.,
KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC COMPANY, LHP,
SIEMENS, WEG, NGEF, BHEL, NORD
10.4. DC B BHEL, IEC, KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC

COMPANY, CG POWER & INDUSTRIAL
SOLUTION
11. CABLES
11.1. 33kV cable XLPE A CCI (Cable Corporation of India),

CRYSTAL, GLOSTER, KEC, KEI, POLYCAB,
UNIVERSAL
11.2. HT (up to 11kV) cable XLPE A CCI, GEMSCAB INDUSTRIES LTD.,

GLOSTER, HAVELLS, KEC, KEI, POLYCAB,
STERLITE POWER, UNIVERSAL

MARCH 2022
6
SECTION-A
11.3. LT power & control cable B CCI, FINOLEX CABLES, GEMSCAB

INDUSTRIES LTD., GLOSTER, HAVELLS,
INSUCON, KEC, KEI, POLYCAB, RAVIN,
THERMO CABLES, UNIVERSAL, LAPP,
NANGALWALA INDUSTRIES (P) LTD
12. MISCELLANEOUS
12.1. Battery charger B AMARA RAJA POWER SYSTEMS LTD,

APLAB, CHLORIDE (EXIDE), CHABI
ELECTRICALS, LIVELINE ELECTRONICS,
NELCO, SABNIFE (HBLNIFE POWER
SYSTEMS), STANDARD
12.2. Battery Bank B AMARA RAJA, AMCO, EXIDE,

FURUKAWA, PANASONIC, SABNIFE
(HBLNIFE POWER SYSTEMS), STANDARD
12.3. Master controller B EATON, ELECTROMAG, EPCC, KAYCEE,

L&T, SIEMENS, KAKKU, SPHONBUCKART,
GESMANN, SCHNEIDER
12.4. Un-interruptible power B FUJI ELECTRIC CONSUL NEOWATT P LTD,

supply (UPS): HITACHI-HIREL, LIVE LINE ELECTRONICS,
NUMERIC, SCHNEIDER (APC), VERTIV
ENERGY PRIVATE LIMITED
12.5. Nitrogen injection fire B CTR, EASUN-MR TAP CHANGERS(P) LTD.,

protection system TECTONICUS, VENDERE
13. GENERATOR B ABB, BHEL, SIEMENS, TOYO DENKI
14. AVR B ABB, BHEL, SIEMENS, TOYO DENKI

MARCH 2022
7
SECTION-B
MECHANICAL
ACCEPTABLE MAKES LIST MECHANICAL
SECTION-B
S ITEMS CATEGORY MAKE

No.
1. GENERAL
1.1. Gearbox (50 kW A BONFIGLIOLI, ELECON, SIEMENS-FLENDER, ROSSI,

and above) SUMITOMO, HEC, KIRLOSKAR, SHANTHI
Gearbox (below B BONFIGLIOLI, ELECON, SIEMENS-FLENDER, ROSSI,

50 kW) SUMITOMO, ESSENTIAL POWER TRANSMISSION,
HEC, KIRLOSKAR, NAW, SHANTHI, PREMIUM
TRANSMISSION, SAN ENGG. LOCOMOTIVE
COMPANY LTD., SUMI- CYCLO DRIVE INDIA PVT.
LTD., TRIVENI, SCHMIEDE AND MASCHINEN
1.2. Geared Motor (5 A BONFIGLIOLI, CYCLO TRANSMISSION, ROSSI,

kW and above) SIEMENS, NORD, SEW-EURO DRIVE
Geared Motor B BONFIGLIOLI, CYCLO TRANSMISSION, ROSSI,

(below 5 kW) SIEMENS, NORD, SEW-EURO DRIVE, ESSENTIAL
POWER TRANSMISSION, IC INDIA LTD., POWER
BUILD, SHANTHI, SUMI-CYCLO DRIVE INDIA
PVT.LTD.
1.3. Geared Coupling A ELECON, FLEX-TRAN INDUSTRIES, RATHI (LOVEJOY),

(50 kW and SIEMENS-FLENDER, TIMKEN, FENNER
above)
Geared Coupling B ELECON, FLEX-TRAN INDUSTRIES, RATHI (LOVEJOY),

(below 50 kW) SIEMENS-FLENDER, TIMKEN, ALLIANCE ENGG. CO.,
CONCORD STEEL WORKS PVT. LTD., ESCO, GBM,
NAW, ROMA MECHANICAL ENGINEERING CO,
WELLMAN WACOMA, FENNER, SCHMIEDE AND
MASCHINEN
1.4. Pin Bush/ Bibby A ELECON, GBM, RATHI (LOVEJOY)

Coupling (10kW
and above)
Pin Bush/ Bibby B ELECON, GBM, RATHI (LOVEJOY), NAW, ROMA

Coupling (below MECHANICAL ENGINEERING CO, FENNER
10kW)

MARCH 2022
8
SECTION-B

No.
1.5. Barrel Coupling A JAURE, MALMEDIE, RINGFEDER POWER

TRANSMISSION
1.6. Fluid Coupling A ELECON, FLUIDOMAT, GHATGE-PATIL INDUSTRIES,

PREMIUM TRANSMISSION, VOITH
1.7. Resilient Coupling A ELECON, FENNER, RATHI (LOVEJOY), NAW, TIMKEN,

WELLMAN WACOMA
1.8. Transmission B DIAMOND, REYNOLD, ROLKOBO, ROLCON, ROLON,

Chain & Sprocket GOLDEN ENGG & ENTERPRISE
1.9. DCEM Shoe Brake A BCH ELECTRIC LTD, ELEKTROMAG, KAKKU, KATEEL,
SIBRE, SPEED-O-CONTROL, EMCO PRECIMA
ENGINEERING PVT LTD.( BUBENZER BREMSEN)
1.10. DCEM Disc Brake A BCH ELECTRIC LTD, ELEKTROMAG, KAKKU, KATEEL,
PETHE, SIBRE, SPEED-O-CONTROL, EMCO PRECIMA
ENGINEERING PVT LTD.( BUBENZER BREMSEN)
1.11. Hydraulic thruster A EMCO PRECIMA ENGINEERING PVT LTD.( BUBENZER

brake BREMSEN), KATEEL, SIBRE
1.12. Non-metallic B KAVERI, TEGA, THEJO

Liner
1.13. Wearing Plates B NLMK INDIA, QUARD, HARDOX

(Metallic)
1.14. Lathe & Shaper B BATLIBOI, GUJARAT LATHE MANUFACTURING

COMPANY PVT. LTD., HEC, HMT
1.15. Welding Rectifier/ B ADVANI, ADOR, ESAB, MOGORA COSMIC, MEMCO

transformer
1.16. Bearing A FAG, NTN, SKF, TIMKEN, KOYO, SCHAEFFLER
1.17. Slew Bearing A ROTHE ERDE, SKF, LIEBHERR
1.18. Split Bearing A COOPER, TIMKEN, SKF

MARCH 2022
9
SECTION-B

No.
1.19. Passenger cum A MITSUBISHI, OTIS, SCHNEIDER, THYSSENKRUPP,

Goods Elevator SCHINDLER
(544 kg and
above)
Passenger cum B MITSUBISHI, OTIS, SCHNEIDER, THYSSENKRUPP,

Goods Elevator SCHINDLER, ECE, KONE ELEVATOR, OMEGA
(below 544 kg )
1.20. Hook (up to 10 t) B FREE TRADING CORPORATION, HERMAN MOHTA,

SMRITI FORGING & ENGG, MACHINE TOOLS, ESKAY
MACHINERY, STEEL FORGINGS & ENGINEERING
1.21. Hook (above 10t) A FREE TRADING CORPORATION, HERMAN MOHTA,

SMRITI FORGING & ENGG, STEEL FORGINGS &
ENGINEERING
1.22. Wire Rope B BHARAT WIRE ROPES, FORT WILLIAM, BOMBAY

WIRE ROPE, ORION ROPES, USHA MARTIN
1.23. Expansion Joint A FLEXATHERM, FLEXICAN, LONE STAR, MB METALLIC

for Hot Blast BELLOWS
system (metallic)
1.24. Stove Valves (two A FOURESS, JOSHI & JAMPALA, INTERVALVE, DELVAL
lever/ three lever/ FLOW CONTROL, TYCO, L&T
double eccentric
butterfly valve )
1.25. Coil Strapping B KOHAN KOGYO CO., SIGNODE, SUND BRISTA, TITAN
M/c
2. MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT
2.1. Conveyor Belt B FORECH INDIA LTD, FENNER-DUNLOP, HINDUSTAN

RUBBER, JONSON RUBBER INDUSTRIES LTD., NORTH
LAND RUBBER, ORIENTAL RUBBER, PHOENIX
CONVEYOR BELT (INDIA) PVT. LTD, SEMPERTRANS
NIRLON

MARCH 2022
10
SECTION-B

No.
2.2. Idler B AMPS ENGG. & EQUIPT. PVT. LTD., BENGAL TOOLS,
BEVCON, ELECON, GOLDEN ENGG & ENTREPRISE,
GOLDEN ENGINEERING INDUSTRIES, HITECH
EQUIPMENTS PVT. LTD., INDIANA CONVEYORS, L &
T, MACMET, MCNALLY SAYAJI ENGINEERING
LIMITED, NEWALL INDUSTRIES, SANRAJ PROJECTS
PVT. LTD., SANDVIK ASIA, SOLCON, TECHNO IMPEX,
VINAR SYSTEMS, VN INDUSTRIES
2.3. Pulley B AMPS ENGG. & EQUIPT. PVT. LTD., BENGAL TOOLS,
BEVCON, ELECON, GOLDEN ENGG & ENTREPRISE,
GOLDEN ENGINEERING INDUSTRIES, HITECH
EQUIPMENTS PVT. LTD., INDIANA CONVEYORS, L &
T, MACMET, MCNALLY SAYAJI ENGINEERING
LIMITED, NEWALL INDUSTRIES, SANRAJ PROJECTS
PVT. LTD., SANDVIK ASIA, SOLCON, TECHNO IMPEX,
VINAR SYSTEMS, VN INDUSTRIES
2.4. Belt Weigher / A ACME, FLSMIDH, PFISTER, PRECIA MOLEN, SCHENCK,

Weigh SIEMENS (MILTRONICS)
feeder System
2.5. Plummer Block A FAG, MASTA, SKF, TIMKEN

(100mm shaft dia
at bearing and
above)
Plummer Block B FAG, MASTA, NANDY ENGINEERING CONCERN, SKF,

(below 100mm TIMKEN
shaft dia at
bearing)
2.6. Belt Scraper (belt B HOSCH, KAVERI, THEJO

width 1000mm
and above)

MARCH 2022
11
SECTION-B

No.
Belt Scraper (belt B HOSCH, KAVERI, INDIANA CONVEYORS, THEJO

width below
1000mm)
2.7. Vibrating Screen A METSO, SCHENK PROCESS, SANDVIK, FLSMIDTH

(100tph and
above)
Vibrating Screen B ELECTRO ZAVOD, ELEKTROMAG-JOEST VIBRATION

(below 100tph) PVT. LTD., IC INDIA LTD., McNALLY SAYAJI
ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, SCHENK PROCESS,
SANDVIK, FLSMIDTH,
2.8. Vibrating Feeder A ELECTRO ZAVOD, ELEKTROMAG-JOEST VIBRATION

PVT. LTD, IC INDIA LTD., McNALLY SAYAJI
ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, SCHENK PROCESS,
SANDVIK, FLSMIDTH,
2.9. Apron Feeder A L & T, THYSSEN KRUPP, SANDVIK, METSO

(500tph and
above)
Apron Feeder B ELECON, HAZEMAG, L & T, McNALLY SAYAJI

(below 500tph) ENGINEERING LIMITED, TENGL, THYSSEN KRUPP,
SANDVIK, METSO
2.10. Screw Conveyor B GMV ENGG, MASYC, VINAR SYSTEMS
2.11. Electro B AUMA, LIMITORQUE, PREPEC, ROTORK

mechanical
Actuator
2.12. EOT Crane (all A ANUPAM INDUSTRIES, HEC, JINDAL STEEL & POWER,
capacities) MUKAND, TATA GROWTH SHOP, UNIQUE
INDUSTRIAL HANDLERS
EOT Crane A CENTURY CRANE, ELECTROMECH, MELTECH CRANES

(maximum 50 t) PVT. LTD., FAFECO, SMACO, ALPHA

MARCH 2022
12
SECTION-B

No.
EOT Crane B EDDY CRANE, SHIVPRA, TUOBRO FURGUSON,

(maximum 10 t) ELECTRO THERAPY
2.13. Electric Hoist B BRADY & MORRIS, CENTURY CRANE, EDDY CRANE,
ELECTROTHERAPY, GRIP ENGRS., HERCULES HOIST
LTD. (INDEF) , HI-TECH INDUSTRIES, MELTEC, REVA
ENGG, SHIVPRA
2.14. Electric Winch B EDDY CRANE, ELECTROMECH MHS PVT. LTD. ENGG,
ELECTROTHERAPY, HMTC ENGG. CO., PULLMAN
2.15. Jib Crane A BRADY & MORRIS, CENTURY CRANES, GRIP ENGG,
MELTEC, EDDY CRANE
2.16. Chain Pulley Block B BRADY& MORRIS, CENTURY CRANES, HERCULES

& Hand Operated HOIST LTD. (INDEF), HI-TECH., LIGHT LIFT IND.,
Travelling Crane REVA ENGG,TRACTEL TRIFOR
2.17. Underslung B EDDY CRANE , CENTURY CRANES, FAFECO, MUKAND,

Cranes KONE CRANES & DEMAG, REVA ENGG, ALPHA,
BRADY & MORRIS, SHIVPRA, TUOBRO FURGUSON
2.18. Shock Absorbers A ENIDINE, OLEO, ACE CONTROLS

/Hydraulic Buffer
2.19. Electro Magnet A ELEKTROMAG, SGM, SUPERLIFT
2.20. Tongs B BUCK, HEPPENSTALL, SOMERS, YELLOW STONE

INDIA
2.21. Stacker or A ELECON, FLSMIDTH, HEC, L & T, McNALLY SAYAJI

Reclaimer ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, SANDVIK ASIA,
THYSSENKRUPP
2.22. Stacker-cum- A FLSMIDTH, HEC, L & T, McNALLY SAYAJI

Reclaimer ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, SANDVIK ASIA,
THYSSENKRUPP

MARCH 2022
13
SECTION-B

No.
2.23. Bucket-Wheel A FLSMIDTH, HEC, L & T, McNALLY SAYAJI

Reclaimer ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, THYSSENKRUPP,
SANDVIK ASIA
2.24. Wagon Tippler A ELECON, FLSMIDTH, HEC, L & T, McNALLY SAYAJI

ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, THYSSENKRUPP
2.25. Hanging Magnet/ A ELECTRO ZAVOD, ELEKTROMAG, HUMBOLDT

Cross belt/ Inline WEDAG, MAGNET INDUSTRIES (CAL) PVT. LTD.,
Magnetic McNALLY SAYAJI ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO
Separator
2.26. Fork Lift B GODREJ, TIL, VOLTAS
2.27. Crusher (Cone / A FLSMIDTH, HEC, L&T, McNALLY SAYAJI

Gyratory / Jaw) ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, SANDVIK,
THYSSENKRUPP, URALMASH
2.28. Impact / Hammer A HEC, L&T, McNALLY SAYAJI ENGINEERING LIMITED,

Crusher METSO, SANDVIK, TERRASOURCE, THYSSENKRUPP
2.29. Roll Crusher A ELECON, FLSMIDTH, HEC, L&T, McNALLY SAYAJI

ENGINEERING LIMITED, SANDVIK, THYSSENKRUPP,
URALMASH
2.30. Rotary Breaker A L&T, McNALLY SAYAJI ENGINEERING LIMITED,

TERRASOURCE, THYSSENKRUPP
3. HYDRAULICS SYSTEM
3.1. Hydraulic Cylinder A CANARA HYDRAULICS, DANVER, EATON, HYDRO

PNEUMATIC CONTROLS, OSCAR, PARKER, REXROTH,
VEKTRA ENGG., VELJAN, WIPRO, YUKEN
3.2. Hydraulic System A EATON, HYDAC, PARKER, REXROTH, YUKEN

with Accessories
3.3. Hydraulic Valves A CANARA HYDRAULICS, EATON, HYDAC, MOOG,

PARKER, REXROTH, YUKEN

MARCH 2022
14
SECTION-B

No.
3.4. Accumulator A BOSCH, EATON, EPE, HYDAC, PARKER, REXROTH,

YUKEN
3.5. Hydraulic Fitting B EPE, FLUID CONTROL HYDROCRIMP, HYDAC,

& Clamp HYDAIR, HYDROMATIK, HYTECH, PTS, STAUFF
3.6. Hydraulic Filter B HYDAC, INTERNORMEN, PARKER
3.7. Hydraulic Motor A EATON, MAHA HYDRAULICS, PARKER, REXROTH,

SAUER DANFOSS, YUKEN
3.8. Hydraulic Pump A SAUER DANFOSS, EATON, MAHA HYDRAULICS,

PARKER, REXROTH, YUKEN
3.9. Hose B AEROFLEX, EATON, HYDROKRIMP, HYDROLINE,

INDIA FLEX INDUSTRIES, INDO INDUSTRIAL
SERVICES, PARKER, PSI HYDRAULICS, SONI RUBBER
PRODUCTS LTD., SUPERSEAL
4. PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
4.1. Pneumatic B CANARA HYDRAULICS, EL-O-MATIC (INDIA) PVT.

Cylinder LTD., GABRIEL PNEUMATICS, HYDAIR, HYDRO
PNEUMATIC CONTROLS, I.L. PALAKKAD, NUCON,
ROTEX, SHRADER, SMC, VELJAN, WIPRO
5. LUBRICATION SYSTEM
5.1. Oil Lubrication A HYDAC, SKF LINCOLN, LUBRICATION SYSTEM LTD.,

System for Rolling BIJUR DELIMON, REBS LUBRICATION
Mills, Sinter Plant,
Blast Furnace,
Bulk material
equip
5.2. Oil Lubrication B HYDAC, SKF LINCOLN, LUBRICATION SYSTEM LTD.,

System other PRAKASH LUBRIQUIPMENT, SHAAN LUBE, BIJUR
than above (Cl. DELIMON, REBS LUBRICATION
5.1)

MARCH 2022
15
SECTION-B

No.
5.3. Screw Pump B ROTO, TUSHACO, UT PUMPS & SYSTEM
5.4. Gear Pump B ALFA, PARKER, REXROTH, ROTO, ROTODEL,

TUSHACO
5.5. Filter Strainer B MULTITEX FILTRATION, OTOKLIN, SPAN ASSOCIATES

PUNE, SUPERFLOW FILTERS
5.6. Oil Mist / Oil-Air A BIJUR DELIMON, SKF LINCOLN, REBS LUBRICATION
Lubrication
System
5.7. Grease A BIJUR DELIMON, SKF LINCOLN, REBS LUBRICATION

Lubrication
System for Rolling
Mills, Sinter Plant,
Blast Furnace,
Bulk material
Handling Euip
5.8. Grease B AFMC, BIJUR DELIMON, CENLUB SYSTEMS, SKF

Lubrication LINCOLN, PRAKASH LUBRIQUIPMENT, REBS
System other LUBRICATION
than above
(Cl 5.7)
5.9. Hose B AEROFLEX, HYDROKRIMP, HYDROLINE, INDO

INDUSTRIAL SERVICES, PSI HYDRAULICS, SONI
RUBBER PRODUCTS LTD., SUPERSEAL

MARCH 2022
16
SECTION-C
MINING & MINERAL

PROCESSING AREA
MINING & MINERAL
ACCEPTABLE MAKES LIST
PROCESSING AREA
SECTION-C

No.
1. Sizer A FLSMIDTH, MMD, SANDVIK, THYSSENKRUPP
2. Ball / Rod / Ag Mill A CEMTEC, CHANDERPUR WORKS PVT. LTD.,

FLSMIDTH, HEC, L&T, McNALLY SAYAJI
ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, OUTOTEC,
SANDVIK , THYSSENKRUPP, URALMASH
3. Classifier A DORR OLIVER, DURGA METALS, EIMCO-KCP,

FLSMIDTH,METSO, MBE-CMT
4. Thickener A EIMCO-KCP, FLSMIDTH, McNALLY SAYAJI

ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, OUTOTEC,
TENOVA-DELKOR, WESTECH
5. Jig A ALLMINERAL, MBE-CMT, TENOVA-DELKOR
6. Filter(Vacuum A ANDRITZ, EIMCO-KCP, FLSMIDTH, METSO,

/Pressure) OUTOTEC, TENOVA-DELKOR, TH COMPANY,
WESTECH
7. Wet High Intensity A ALLMINERAL, ERIEZ, MBE-CMT, METSO, LONGI

Magnetic Separator MAGNET, MINERAL TECHNOLOGIES, OUTOTEC
/ High Gradient
Magnetic Separator
8. Low Intensity A ERIEZ, LONGI MAGNET, MBE-CMT, METSO,

Magnetic Separator MINERAL TECHNOLOGIES, MULTOTEC
9. Dewatering Screen A DERRICK, FLSMIDTH –LUDOWICI, IC , METSO,

McNALLY SAYAJI ENGINEERING LIMITED,
SCHENCK PROCESS, WEIR MINERALS
10. Spiral – Gravity A AKW A+V GMBH, FLSMIDTH, MINERAL

Concentrator TECHNOLOGIES, MULTOTEC, OUTOTEC
11. Hydrocyclones A CDE, FLSMIDTH KERBS, McNALLY SAYAJI

ENGINEERING LIMITED, METSO, MOZLEY,
MULTOTEC, WEIR MINERALS
12. Metal Detector A ELECTRO ZAVOD,ELEKTROMAG, ERIEZ, MBE-CMT,

METSO

MARCH 2022
17
SECTION-D
PROCESS CONTROL &

AUTOMATION
PROCESS CONTROL
& AUTOMATION
SECTION-D
1. FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
1.1. Pressure/differential A ABB, EMERSON, E&H, FUJI,

pressure/Level/Flow Transmitter HONEYWELL, YOKOGAWA, SIEMENS
1.2. Temperature Transmitter A ABB, E&H, EMERSON, HONEYWELL,

SIEMENS, YOKOGAWA
1.3. Pressure / DP switch A ASHCROFT, BAUMER, DANFOSS,

INDFOS, WIKA, SWITZER,
1.4. Tuning Fork/ Rod type Level A ABB, E&H, EMERSON, NIVO
Switch CONTROL, SAPCON, SIEMENS, VEGA
1.5. Conductivity/RF/Capacitance A E&H, NIVO CONTROL, P&F, SAPCON,

type Level Switch VEGA,
1.6. Float type Level Switch A BAUMER, EMERSON, ENDRESS &

HOUSER, KROHNE MARSHALL,
LEVCON, NIVO CONTROL, SAPCON,
TRAC
1.7. Ultrasonic Level Sensor A E&H, EMERSON, KROHNE

MARSHALL, P&F, SIEMENS, SICK,
VEGA
1.8. Radar Type Level Sensor A E&H, EMERSON, KROHNE,

MARSHALL, SIEMENS, VEGA
1.9. Electro Magnetic Flow Meter A E&H, EMERSON, KROHNE

MARSHALL, YOKOGAWA, SIEMENS
1.10. Flow Elements (Orifice / Venturi A ENGG SPECIALTIES, EMERSON, UNI

/ Flow nozzle / Pitot tube / CONTROL, WIKA
Annubar)
1.11. Radiation Pyrometer A CHINO, EUROTHERM, LAND,

WILLIAMSON CORPORATION, FLUKE
(online/portable)

MARCH 2022
18
PROCESS CONTROL
& AUTOMATION
SECTION-D
1.12. Level SW/ Transmitter B BERTHOLD, E&H, THERMOFISHER
(Nucleonic type)
1.13. Temperature Switch B E&H, IFM, HYDAC, WIKA
1.14. Flow Switch B EMERSON, IFM, KROHNE MARSHAL,

KOBOLD
1.15. Vortex Flow Meter A E&H, EMERSON, KROHNE MARSHAL,

SIEMENS, YOKOGAWA
1.16. Mass (Coriolis) Flow A ABB, E&H, EMERSON, KROHNE

MARSHAL, SIEMENS, YOKOGAWA,
1.17. Level Switch/Transmitter B CHEMTROL, DK INSTRUMENTS,

(Displacer Type) EMERSON, LEVCON
2. CONTROL VALVES
2.1. Globe Valve A FISHER, FORBES MARSHALL, IL

PALAKKAD, KOSO, SAMSON,
SEVERN, UNIFLOW CONTROLS
2.2. Butterfly Valve A AIRA, DEL VAL, FISHER, FOURESS, IL

PALAKKAD, KOSO, SEVERN
2.3. Pneumatic Actuator A DEL VAL, FORBES MARSHALL, IL

PALAKKAD, KOSO, OM CONTROL,
ROTEX, SAMSON, UNIFLOW
CONTROLS
2.4. Electrical Motor Actuator A AUMA, BERNARD, LIMITORQUE,

ROTORK,
2.5. Electro Pneumatic Positioner A ABB, EMERSON, FORBES MARSHALL,

SIEMENS
3. CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

MARCH 2022
19
PROCESS CONTROL
& AUTOMATION
SECTION-D
3.1. Signal Isolator A MASIBUS, MICROSYSTEMS &

CONTROLS, MTL, P&F, PHOENIX,
STAHL, YOKOGAWA
3.2. Distributed Control System A ABB, EMERSON, HONEYWELL,

TOSHIBA, YOKOGAWA,
3.3. PLC System A ABB, HITACHI, HONEYWELL,

EMERSON AUTOMATION
(FORMERLY “GE INTELLIGENT”),
ROCKWELL, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS
3.4. Technological Control System/ A ABB, DANIELI, EMERSON

Multi Tasking Control System/ AUTOMATION (FORMERLY “GE
Embedded Control System INTELLIGENT”), SIEMENS, SMS,
TMEIC
3.5. PDA A DANIELI, IBA, LMS, MICA, SOMAT
3.6. Panel / Enclosure / Rack B APW PRESIDENT, HOFFMANN,

PYROTECH, RITTAL, VALRACK
3.7. Surge Protection A DEHN, MTL, P&F, PHOENIX

CONTACT, OBO BETTERMANN
4. PANEL BASED INSTRUMENTATION
4.1. Single Loop Stand Alone A ABB, FUJI, HONEYWELL, SIEMENS,

Controller TOSHIBA, YOKOGAWA
4.2. Paperless Recorder A CHINO, EUROTHERM, FUJI,

HONEYWELL, LAXONS, YOKOGAWA,
4.3. Alarm Annunciator B IIC, IL, MINILEC, PROCON, SEMUDA
4.4. Regulated DC Power Supply Unit A APLAB, COSSEL, PHOENIX CONTACT,

/ SMPS SIEMENS, WAGO
5. ANALYSERS

MARCH 2022
20
PROCESS CONTROL
& AUTOMATION
SECTION-D
5.1. Gas Analyser A ABB CHEMTROL (AMETEK),

EMERSON, FUJI, FORBES MARSHALL,
HONEYWELL, PANAMETRICS, SICK,
SIEMENS, YOKOGAWA
5.2. Gas Detector A BEILER & LANG, DETRONICS,

DRAGGER, INDUSTRIAL SC. CORPN
MSA, TELEDYNE
5.3. Flame Detector A DURAG, ENDEE, HONEYWELL, SICK,

YAMATAKE
5.4. Moisture Analyzer (Nucleonic) A CHINO, BERTHOLD, EMERSON,

THERMO FISHER
5.5. Moisture Analyzer A ABB, CHEMTROL, MOISTECH, NDC,

SIEMENS
(Microwave/ Capacitance Type)
5.6. Opacity Analyser A DURAG, FORBES MARSHALL,

MAIHEK, SICK,
5.7. Calorific Value Analyser A CHEMTROL(AMS), REINEKE, UNION

CALORIMETER, YOKOGAWA, IGCA
5.8. pH / Conductivity / ORP A ABB, E&H, EMERSON, FORBES

MARSHAL, HONEYWELL,
Analyser
YOKOGAWA,
5.9. SOX / NOX/ CO Analyser A ABB, AIC (FUJI), EMERSON, FUJI,

FORBES MARSHAL, HONEYWELL,
SICK, SIEMENS, YOKOGAWA
5.10. Elemental Analyser A JICO, MAYA, PANALYTICAL, REAL

TIME, SCANTECH, THERMO
SCIENTIFIC
6. WEIGHING

MARCH 2022
21
PROCESS CONTROL
& AUTOMATION
SECTION-D
6.1. Electronic Weighing System A ABB, ACME, AVERY KELK, BEST,

MINEBEA INTEC (FORMERLY
(Hopper Weighing / Platform /
SARTORIOUS), PRECIA MOLEN, RICE
Scales / In-motion W.B.)
LAKE, SCHENK, TRANSWEIGH
6.2. Load Cells & Accessories A ABB, FLINTEK, HBM, MINEBEA INTEC
(FORMERLY SARTORIOUS), PRECIA
MOLEN, PRECISION, RICELAKE,
SCHENCK, SIEMENS, KELK
7. SPECIAL INSTRUMENTS
7.1. Thickness Gauge A IMS, IRM, MESACON, TOSHIBA,

THERMO SCIENTIFIC,
7.2. Hot Metal Detector A AMERICAN SENSORS, DANIELI,

DELTA, SICK,TOSHIBA, HOKUYO
AUTOMATIC CO. LTD.
7.3. Width Gauge A ABB, DELTA, DANIELI, IMS,

PSYSTEME, THERMO SCIENTIFIC,
TOSHIBA
7.4. Vibration Monitoring System B GE OIL & GAS, IRD MECHANALYSIS,

SHINKAWA
7.5. Portable Vibration Monitor B BENTLEY NEVADA, FORBES

MARSHAL, IRO
with analysis software
7.6. Test & Measuring Equipment B APLAB, FLUKE, KANE, SCIENTIFIC,

TECHNOFIX,
7.7. Laboratory Equipment B BEAMEX, FLUKE, SCANDURA,WIKA
7.8. Digital Multi-Function Meter B ACORD, CONSERVE, L&T, RISHAV,

SECURE
7.9. Strip Profile Gauge A IMS, MESACON, NDC (IRM),

THERMO SCIENTIFIC, TOSHIBA,

MARCH 2022
22
PROCESS CONTROL
& AUTOMATION
SECTION-D
7.10. Flatness/ Shape Gauge A ABB, DELTA, IMS, P-SYSTEME,

SIEMENS, THERMO SCIENTIFIC,
7.11. Laser Doppler Velocity Meter A ACCUSPEED, AMERICAN SENSORS,

DELTA, KELK, LASER SPEED,
7.12. Optical Barrier A ABB, AMERICAN SENSORS, DELTA,

PAULI, SICK,
7.13. Position Transducer A LEONARD BAUR, NSD, SONY

MAGNESCALE, TEMPOSONIC, DELTA
7.14. Optical Encoder A HUBNER, LINE & LINDEY,

STEGMANN
7.15. Surface Inspection System A ABB,COGNEX, PARSYTEC, SIEMENS,

SURCON
8. COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
8.1. Wireless Communication A CISCO, EXTREME, GE, JUNIPER,

Equipment LOTUS WIRELESS, MOTOROLA,
MOXA, RADIUS, SATELLINE, SHEETAL
WIRELESS, STAHL, PHOENIX
CONTACT
8.2. EPABX A ALCATEL, AVAYA, ERICSON, ITI,

SIEMENS
8.3. PA System/ Conferencing B AHUJA, BOSCH, HONEYWELL, PHI

system AUDIO COM
9. DISPLAY & FDA SYSTEM
9.1. Alpha Numeric Display/ Jumbo B AGLA, BCH, BEMCO, BLE BELL, EPCC,
ESSEN, GE, KHERAJ, LECTROTEK,
Display
MICROTECH, VINAY
9.2. Large Screen Display B HITACHI, LG, PANASONIC,

SAMSUNG, SONY

MARCH 2022
23
PROCESS CONTROL
& AUTOMATION
SECTION-D
9.3. Video Walls (LED) B DELTA, HITACHI, LG, PANASONIC,

SAMSUNG, SONY
9.4. Fire Detection and Alarm (FDA) A BOSCH, HONEYWELL (ESSER),

System HONEYWELL (NOTIFIER),
SECURITON, SIEMENS, TYCO
10. INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
10.1. Instrumentation/ Screened/ Co- A CCI, CORDS, DELTRON, FINOLEX,

axial/ Special Cables LAPP, MEM, NICCO,
THERMOCABLES, TOSHNIWAL,
UNIVERSAL, SUN
10.2. Telephone Cable B BELDON, DELTON, FINOLEX, NICCO,

TELE LINK, UNIVERSAL,
10.3. Load Cell Cable A FLINTEC, HBM, PRECIA MOLEN,

RICELAKE, SARTORIOUS, SCHENK,
SIEMENS
10.4. T/C Extension cable, A BELDEN, LAPP, MEM, TEMCON,

Compensating cable, PTFE cable TEMPSENS, THERMOCABLE,
TOSHNIWAL CABLES

MARCH 2022
24
SECTION-E
REFRACTORY
ACCEPTABLE MAKES LIST REFRACTORY
SECTION-E

No.
1. Fireclay Refractories B ARUN REFRACTORIES, ARVIND

INDUSTRIES, ASSOCIATED CERAMICS
(Alumina Up to 44 %)
LTD., BRAHMA REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD.,
BURNPUR CERAMICS, BURNPUR
INDUSTRIES, CHAMPION CERAMICS PVT.
LTD., DALMIA CEMENT (BHARAT) LTD.,
INDUSTRIAL ASSOCIATES, MAHAKOSHAL
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., MAITHAN
CERAMIC LTD., MANISHRI REFRACTORIES
& CERAMICS PVT. LTD., PREMIER
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., RAJHANS
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., SAIL
REFRACTORY UNIT, SHREEKANT
INDUSTRIES, TRL KROSAKI REFRACTORIES
LTD., VALLEY REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD.
2. High Alumina Refractories B ASSOCIATED CERAMICS LTD., BRAHMA

REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., CHAMPION
(Alumina Above 44 %)
CERAMICS PVT. LTD., DALMIA CEMENT
(BHARAT) LTD., INDUSTRIAL ASSOCIATES,
MAHAKOSHAL REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD.,
MAITHAN CERAMIC LTD., MANISHRI
REFRACTORIES & CERAMICS PVT. LTD.,
PREMIER REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD.,
RAJHANS REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD.,
RANCHI REFRACTORIES (INDIA) PVT. LTD.,
SAIL REFRACTORY UNIT, SAINT-GOBAIN
PERFORMANCE CERAMICS &
REFRACTORIES, TRL KROSAKI
REFRACTORIES LTD.
3. Silica Refractories B DALMIA CEMENT (BHARAT) LTD., TRL

KROSAKI REFRACTORIES LTD., SAIL
REFRACTORY UNIT

MARCH 2022
25
SECTION-E

No.
4. Insulation Refractories B ACHINT CHEMICALS, ASSOCIATED

CERAMICS LTD., CALDERYS INDIA
REFRACTORIES LTD., CARBORUNDUM
UNIVERSAL LTD., MAITHAN CERAMICS
LTD., MURUGAPPA MORGAN THERMAL
CERAMICS LTD., NAVRANG
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., NEWKEM
PRODUCTS CORPOPRATION, NUTECH
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., PREMIER
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., RAJASTHAN
CERAMICS INDUSTRIES, RELIABLE
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., VALLEY
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., SHREE
CERAMICS FIBERS PVT. LTD.
5. Basic Refractories B CHAMPION CERAMICS PVT. LTD., DALMIA

(Magnesite/ Mag Chrome/ CEMENT (BHARAT) LTD., MAITHAN
Chrome Mag/ Magnesia- CERAMIC LTD., MANISHRI REFRACTORIES
Carbon/ Alumina Magnesia & CERAMICS PVT. LTD., RANCHI
Carbon) REFRACTORIES (INDIA) PVT. LTD., RHI
MAGNESITA INDIA LTD., SAIL
REFRACTORY COMPANY LTD., SAIL
REFRACTORY UNIT, SARVESH
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., TRL KROSAKI
REFRACTORIES LTD., VESUVIUS INDIA
LTD.
6. Purging Refractories B DALMIA CEMENT (BHARAT) LTD., HI-TECH

(Porous Plug/ Purging Plug) CHEMICALS (P) LTD, IFGL REFRACTORIES
LTD., MANISHRI REFRACTORIES &
CERAMICS PVT. LTD., RHI MAGNESITA
INDIA LTD., SARVESH REFRACTORIES PVT.
LTD., TRL KROSAKI REFRACTORIES LTD.,
VESUVIUS INDIA LTD.

MARCH 2022
26
SECTION-E

No.
7. Pouring Refractories (Well B DALMIA CEMENT (BHARAT) LTD., HI-TECH

block/ Inner Nozzle/ Outer CHEMICALS (P) LTD, IFGL REFRACTORIES
Nozzle/ Slide gate) LTD., MANISHRI REFRACTORIES &
CERAMICS PVT. LTD., RANCHI
REFRACTORIES (INDIA) PVT. LTD., RHI
MAGNESITA INDIA LTD., SARVESH
REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., TRL KROSAKI
REFRACTORIES LTD., VESUVIUS INDIA
LTD.
8. Black Refractories (Shroud/ B DALMIA CEMENT (BHARAT) LTD., HI-TECH

Mono block Stopper/ CHEMICALS (P) LTD, IFGL REFRACTORIES
Tundish Nozzle/ SEN/ LTD., RHI MAGNESITA INDIA LTD.,
Single Taphole Sleeve) SARVESH REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD., TRL
KROSAKI REFRACTORIES LTD., VESUVIUS
INDIA LTD.
9. Silicon Carbide Refractories B CARBORUNDUM UNIVERSAL LTD., SAINT-

GOBAIN PERFORMANCE CERAMICS &
REFRACTORIES
10. Alumina-Silicon Carbide- B CHAMPION CERAMICS PVT. LTD., DALMIA

Carbon (ASC) Refractories CEMENT (BHARAT) LTD., MANISHRI
REFRACTORIES & CERAMICS PVT. LTD.,
RAASI REFRACTORIES LTD., RHI
MAGNESITA INDIA LTD., TRL KROSAKI
REFRACTORIES LTD.
11. Acid Resistant Refractories B CHAMPION CERAMICS PVT. LTD.,

MAHAKOSHAL REFRACTORIES PVT. LTD.,
MANISHRI REFRACTORIES & CERAMICS
PVT. LTD., RAJHANS REFRACTORIES PVT.
LTD., BURNPUR CERAMICS, SB STEEL,
ORIENT REFRACTORIES, JARIDIH
CHEMICALS & INDUSTRIES

MARCH 2022
27
SECTION-F
UTILITIES & SERVICES

ACCEPTABLE MAKES LIST UTILITY & SERVICES
SECTION-F

No.
1. PUMPS
1.1. Centrifugal Pumps (Horizontal A BHEL, FLOWMORE, FLOW SERVE,

Split Casing / Horizontal Back KIRLOSKAR (KBL), KSB, SAM, SULZER,
Pullout / Vertical axial, Volute WILO-MATHER & PLATT, WPIL, JYOTI
& Mixed flow Types – All PUMPS
ranges)
1.2. Centrifugal Pumps (Horizontal A BEST & CROMPTON, CALAMA, CHEMFLO,

Split Casing / Horizontal Back CRI, SAM, SJ INDUSTRIES, SPX FLOW
Pullout / Vertical axial, Volute (JOHNSON)
& Mixed flow Types – Less
than 100 m3/h)
1.3. Boiler Feed Pumps / A BHEL, KIRLOSKAR EBARA PUMPS LIMITED

Condensate Extraction Pump (For boiler capacity upto 50 tph), KSB,
SULZER
1.4. Submersible pump B CALAMA, CRI, DARLING, FLOWMORE,

KISHOR PUMPS, KSB, LUBI, SAM, SU
MOTORS, SULZER, VARAT, WPIL, XYLEM,
KBL, WILO-MATHER & PLATT
1.5. Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps A BEST & CROMPTON, CRI, FL SMIDTH

For Slurry Handling (DORR OLIVER), FLOWMORE, FLOW
SERVE, METSO, SAM, WEIR MINERALS
1.6. Reciprocating Slurry Pump A FL SMIDTH (DORR OLIVER), ROTO, WEIR

MINERALS
1.7. Vertical Centrifugal Pumps for A METSO, SAM, WEIR MINERALS

Slurry Handling
1.8. Reciprocating Pumps A ACME, AIRAUTO, CHEMTROL ENGG.,

FLOW SERVE, SWELORE
2. VALVES & GATES

MARCH 2022
28
SECTION-F

No.
2.1.FLUIDS (EXCEPT STEAM & OXYGEN) SERVICE
General Services-Make-up water system, Cleaning & Washing, Service air system, Purging
system
2.1.1. Gate and Globe B BHEL, FLUIDTECH EQUPT., FOURESS, GM

ENGG., INTERVALVE, IVC, JOSHI JAMPALA,
(Cast Steel)
KIRLOSKAR, KSB, L&T, MASCOT,
General Services OSWAL INDUSTRIES, STEELSTRONG, TYCO
VALVES, UNIVERSAL ENGG. CONCERN,
VALVE TECH IND., LEADER, SWIMS
TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.2. Gate and Globe A BHEL, FLUIDTECH EQUPT., FOURESS, KSB,

L&T, TYCO VALVES, SWIMS
(Cast Steel)
TECHNOLOGIES
All Process
2.1.3. Non-return Valves (Cast Steel) B ADVANCE, BHEL, DEZURIK, FLUIDTECH

EQUPT., FOURESS, GM ENGG.,
General Services
INTERVALVE, KIRLOSKAR, KSB, L&T,
OSWAL INDUSTRIES, STEELSTRONG,
UNIVERSAL ENGG. CONCERN, UNIVERSAL
ENGG., VALVE TECH IND, LEADER SWIMS
TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.4. Non-return Valves (Cast Steel) A BHEL, FLUIDTECH EQUPT., FOURESS, KSB,
L&T, SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
All Process
2.1.5. Gate, Globe and Non-return B BHEL, FOURESS, HYDRO TECH ENGG.,
Valves INTERVALVE, JOSHI JAMPALA, KIRLOSKAR
(KBL), KSB, L&T, OSWAL INDUSTRIES,
(Forged Steel)
VALVE TECH IND.,SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
General Services
2.1.6. Gate, Globe and Non-return A BHEL, FOURESS, KSB, L&T, SWIMS
Valves (Forged Steel) TECHNOLOGIES
All Process

MARCH 2022
29
SECTION-F

No.
2.1.7. Gate and Globe Valves (SS & A BHEL, FOURESS, INTERVALVE, KSB, L&T,
Alloy Steel) OSWAL INDUSTRIES, SWIMS
TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.8. Gate, Globe, Non-Return B BANKIM, CALSEN, CHEMTECH, DURGA

Valves VALVES, FLUIDTECH EQUPT., GM DALUI,
IVC, JOSHI JAMPALA, KIRLOSKAR,
(Cast Iron, & SG Iron)
LEADER, SHIVA DURGA, SIGMA FLOW,
General Services UNIVERSAL ENGG. CONCERN, UNIVERSAL
ENGG., UPADHYAY, VALVE TECH IND
2.1.9. Gate, Globe, Non-Return A FLUIDTECH EQUPT., IVC, JOSHI JAMPALA,

Valves KIRLOSKAR, SHIVA DURGA, UPADHYAY
(Cast Iron, & SG Iron)
All Process
2.1.10. Double Eccentric Butterfly A DELVAL FLOW CONTROLS, FOURESS,

Valves INTERVALVE, JOSHI JAMPALA, L&T,
STAFFORD (VIRGO), VALVE TECH IND.,
SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES, KSB, KIRLOSKAR,
IL
2.1.11. Triple Eccentric Butterfly Valves A DELVAL FLOW CONTROLS, EMERSON

(VIRGO), FOURESS, INTERVALVE,
JOSHI JAMPALA, L&T, PENTAIR (TYCO),
SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.12. Butterfly Valve B BRAY CONTROLS, DELVAL FLOW

CONTROLS, DEMBLA, DEZURIK, DURGA
General Services
VALVES, CHEMTECH, FLOW SERVE,
FOURESS, INTERVALVE, JOSHI JAMPALA.,
KIRLOSKAR, KSB, L&T, MASCOT, METSO,
ROTEX, SIGMA FLOW, STAFFORD
CONTROLS, TYCO VALVES, UNIVERSAL
ENGG. CONCERN, UNIVERSAL ENGG.,
VALVE TECH IND.,AVCON, SWIMS
TECHNOLOGIES , LEADER

MARCH 2022
30
SECTION-F

No.
2.1.13. Butterfly Valve A BRAY CONTROLS, DELVAL FLOW

CONTROLS, FLOW SERVE , FOURESS,
All Process
INTERVALVE, KSB, L&T, METSO,
TYCO VALVES, SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.14. Fabricated Valves (Gate Valves) A FLUIDTECH EQUPT., FOURESS, JOSHI

JAMPALA, L&T, CHEMTECH
2.1.15. Fabricated Valves (Butterfly A FLUIDTECH EQUPT., FOURESS, IL,

Valves) INTERVALVE, JOSHI JAMPALA, L&T
2.1.16. Goggle Valves A FOURESS, JOSHI JAMPALA, Zimmerman &

Jhonson-India, CHEMTECH
2.1.17. 3 or 4 Way Cock/Plug valve (CI B FLOWSERVE, UNIVERSAL ENGG.

/ CS/ FS) CONCERN, L&T
2.1.18. Ball Valve (SS/CS / FS / CI) B AQUA VALVES, DELVAL FLOW CONTROLS,
EMERSON (VIRGO), INTERVALVE, KSB,
General Services
L&T, MASCOT, OSWAL INDUSTRIES,
MICROFINISH, NSSL, PENTAIR (TYCO),
ROTEX, VALVE TECH IND., SWIMS
TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.19. Ball Valve (SS/CS / FS / CI) A DELVAL FLOW CONTROLS, EMERSON

(VIRGO), INTERVALVE, KSB,
All Process
L&T,MICROFINISH, , PENTAIR (TYCO),
ROTEX, SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.20. Float Valve B CALSEN, IVC, LEADER, LEVCON, SHIVA

DURGA, UPADHAYA,
2.1.21. Foot Valve B CALSEN, DEZURIK, IVC, KIRLOSKAR (KBL),

LEADER, LEVCON, SHIVA DURGA,
UPADHAYA, SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.22. Diaphragm Valve A CRANE PROCESS, FLUID SYSTEM,

MASCOT, SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES

MARCH 2022
31
SECTION-F

No.
2.1.23. Air Release Valve B BANKIM, CALSEN, IVC, LEADER, LEVCON,

SHIVA DURGA, SIGMA FLOW, UPADHYAY
2.1.24. Safety Valve A BHEL, IL, FORBES MARSHALL, MEKASTAR,

PENTAIR (TYCO), SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
2.1.25. Needle Valve A AIR CHEM, DUNCUN, SCHRODER, SEIMAG,

VALVE TECH IND
2.1.26. Knife-edge Gate Valve A DEZURIK, FLOWLINK SYSTEMS, HABONIM

VASS, JASH, JOSHI JAMPALA, METSO,
ORBINOX, PENTAIR (TYCO), VALVE TECH
IND, WEIR-MINERALS, BRAY CONTROLS
2.1.27. Pressure Reducing Valve A CRESCENT, FLOWTEK, FORBES MARSHALL,

IL, MEKASTER
2.1.28. Sluice Gate B IM ENGG, INTERVALVE, JASH, LEVCON
2.1.29. Non-Ferrous Valves (General B AKSONS, ASCO, BOMBAY METAL,

CRESCENT, FLUIDLINE, GM DALUI,
Purpose)
LEADER, SANT VALVES, VALVE TECH IND
2.1.30. Dampers – (Air and Gas B DTL, FOURESS, INTERVALVE, JOSHI

services) JAMPALA, STAFFORD
2.2.STEAM SERVICE
2.2.1. Gate and Globe A BHEL, FOURESS, HOPKINSONS-WEIR,

HYDRO TECH ENGG., INTERVALVE, KSB, L
(Cast Steel & Forged Steel)
& T, OSWAL INDUSTRIES, PRUSS(HS),
SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
2.2.2. Non-return Valves (Cast Steel A BHEL, DEZURIK, FOURESS, INTERVALVE,

& Forged Steel) KSB, L&T , SWIMS TECHNOLOGIES
2.2.3. Gate, Globe & Non-return A BHEL, FOURESS, HOPKINSONS-WEIR, KSB,

Valves L & T, OSWAL INDUSTRIES
(SS & Alloy Steel)

MARCH 2022
32
SECTION-F

No.
2.2.4. Ball valves (Cast Carbon Steel A BHEL, KSB, L & T, OSWAL INDUSTRIES,
and alloy Steel) THERMAX
3. HEAT EXCHANGERS
3.1. Heat Exchanger (Plate Type) A ALFA LAVAL, APV, HRS, IDMC, SWEP,
TRANTER, KELVION INDIA
3.2. Heat Exchanger (Shell & Tube B AIR CARE EQUIPMENTS, ALFA LAVAL, APV,
BHEL, EASTERN EQUIP ENG (EEE), EUREKA
Types)
ENGG., GODREJ, ING-TECH ENGG. CO.,
L&T, PRECISION COOLING, REILIENCE,
RELIANCE, TEMA INDIA, TEXMACO,
THERMAL SYSTEMS, THERMAX
4. COOLING TOWERS A GAMMON, GEA COOLING TOWERS,

PAHARPUR, PALTECH, SHRIRAM TOWER,
WET BULB
5. FILTERS / STRAINERS
5.1. Filters /Strainers A AMIAD, FILTRATION ENGINEERS,

OTOKLIN, SUPERFLO, SUREFLO
PUROLATOR, HYDAC FILTERS
5.2. Pressure Filters A DOSHI ION-VEOLIA, DRIPLEX, ING- TECH

ENGG. CO., EFFWA, EUREKA ENGG. RESIN
INDIA, FILTERATION ENGINEERS, ION
EXCHANGE, McLANAHAN, OTOKLIN,
PENTAIR WATER, THERMAX, VA TECH,
VOLTAS
5.3. Activated Carbon Filter A ARUDRA, ION EXCHANGE, OTOKLIN,

PENTAIR WATER, RESIN INDIA, SUREFLO,
THERMAX, VASMYL, VOLTAS
5.4. Iron Removal Filter A ION EXCHANGE, SPARKLE, THERMAX,

VOLTAS, ZEOLITE INDIA (P) LTD

MARCH 2022
33
SECTION-F

No.
5.5. Y-Strainer B CADILLAC, DRAYTON-GREAVES,

FILTERATION ENGINEERS, FORBES
MARSHALL, OTOKLIN, SUPERFLO,
UNIKLINGER
5.6. Cyclone Separator B Filtration Engineers India Pvt. Ltd., LAKOS,

SUPERFLO, TIMEX (AMIAD)
6. EXPANSION JOINTS/COMPENSATORS (Utility & Services)
6.1. Expansion Joints / A ATHULYA, DWREN, FLEXICAN,

Compensators FLEXITHERM, LONE STAR, BD ENGINEERS,
METALLIC BELLOWS,
(Metallic)
PRECISION ENGINEERS, SUR INDUSTRIES
6.2. Expansion B CORI ENGG., DWREN, GBM , KELD

Joints/Compensators ELLENTOFT INDIA, PRECISION ENGRS.,
STANDARD PRECISION BELLOWS, SUR
(Rubber)
INDUSTRIES
7. CENTRIFUGAL GAS BOOSTER A AEROTO BOLDROCCHI, ANDREW YULE,

(BF/CO/BOF/MIXED FUEL BHEL, HOWDEN, TLT
GAS)
8. INSULATION MATERIAL AND B BAKELITE HYLAM, FINLAY INSULATIONS,

WORK LLYOD INSULATION, RAYCHEM, UP
TWIGA
9. PRESSURE VESSELS / BUFFER A BHEL, L&T, NTPC-ALSTOM, PRESSURE

VESSELS VESSEL INDIA (P) LTD., TEXMACO,
TITAN ENGINEERING
10. GAS HOLDER A MB Engg (CLAYTON WALKER GROUP -UK),

LAZARUS & ASSOCIATES
(DRY SEAL TYPE)
GAS HOLDER A MB Engg (CLAYTON WALKER GROUP -UK),

LAZARUS & ASSOCIATES
(WET SEAL TYPE)
11. PIPES

MARCH 2022
34
SECTION-F

No.
11.1. Steel Pipes B INDIAN SEAMLESS, JSW, KHANDELWAL,

MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS, SAIL, SURYA
TUBES, TATA TUBES, UTKARSH,
RATNADEEP METAL & TUBES LTD.
11.2. Stainless Steel Pipes B CHOKSY, DIVINE TUBES, JINDAL,

MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS, MEC TUBES,
SURAJ LTD., QUALITY STAINLESS,
STANDARD (INDIA), STERLING, ZENITH,
RATNADEEP METAL & TUBES LTD
11.3. Cast Iron Pipes & Specials B KALINGA IRON WORKS, KESORAM INDIA
LTD.
11.4. DI Pipes B ELECTRO STEEL CASTINGS., JINDAL SAW,

TATA METALIKS DI PIPE LTD.
12. WATER TREATMENT AND DM WATER PLANT
12.1. DM , Soft Water Plant, RO A VEOLIA, DRIPLEX, EFFWA, EUREKA

PLANT FORBES, GE POWER & WATER, GEA
ENERGY SYSTEMS, ION EXCHANGE, ISGEC
(Except RO Plant), PENTAIR WATER, RESIN
INDIA, SPARKLE, THERMAX, TRIVENI
ENGG., VOLTAS
12.2. Clarifier B EIMCO-KCP, EUREKA FORBES, HINDUSTAN

DORR OLIVER, JORD ENGINEERS,
McNALLY SAYAJI, TRIVENI ENGG. Water
Systems India Pvt. Ltd.
12.3. Thickener - As per makes of Thickener mentioned in

MINING & MINERAL PROCESSING AREA
12.4. Chemical Dosing B CHEMBOND, GE POWER & WATER,

HINDUSTAN DORR OLIVER, NALCO, SJ
INDUSTRIES, TELLABS CHEMICALS,
TRIVENI ENGG

MARCH 2022
35
SECTION-F

No.
12.5. Filter Press A ANDRITZ, DINSHAW, FILTER MACHINE, FL

SMITH, PANAMA, SUREFLO
13. EQUIPMENT & SYSTEM FOR AIR AND GAS
13.1. Turbo Blower A BHEL (For Centrifugal), Howden CKD

Compressors (For Centrifugal), KAWASAKI,
Mitsui E&S Machinery Co., MAN Energy
Solutions, SIEMENS
13.2. Compressor (Centrifugal) A ATLAS COPCO, FS-ELLIOTT, INGERSOLL

RAND, KAZANCOMPRESSORMASH,
KIRLOSKAR, KOBELCO, SIEMENS
13.3. Compressors (Screw) A ATLAS COPCO, ELGI, INGERSOLL RAND,

KAEZER, KIRLOSKAR PNEUMATIC
13.4. Compressors (Reciprocating) A BURCKHARDT COMPRESSION, ELGI,

INGERSOL RAND, KIRLOSKAR PNEUMATIC
13.5. Portable Air Compressors B ATLAS COPCO, ELGI, HOLMAN CLIMAX,

INGERSOLL RAND, KIRLOSKAR
13.6. Centrifugal Blowers & Fans – For all applications except fuel gas
Capacity < 80,000 m3/h A AEROTO BOLDROCCHI, ANDREW YULE,

BATLIBOI, BHEL, C.DOCTOR, HOWDEN,
MAXFLOW, REITZ, TLT ENGG.
Capacity > 80,000 m3/h A AEROTO BOLDROCCHI, ANDREW YULE,

BHEL, HOWDEN, MAXFLOW, TLT ENGG
13.7. Air Drier B ATLAS COPCO, DELAIR, EXAL, INGERSOL

RAND, ROOS TEMPKOOL, SANPAR,
TRIDENT

MARCH 2022
36
SECTION-F

No.
13.8. Air Trap B DRAYTON GREAVES, FORBES MARSHAL,

UNI KLINGER
13.9. Moisture Separator B DRYTECH ENGINEERS, FESTO CONTROL,

HYDAIR, NUCON, ROSS, SCHRADER, SMC,
THERMAX, UNIKLINGER, VELJAN
14. POWER PLANT EQUIPMENT
14.1. Boilers (Stoker, Pulverised, A BHEL, GE, ISGEC, THERMAX,

AFBC, CFBC) THYSENKRUPP
Gas Fired Boiler A BHEL, GE, ISGEC, THERMAX
Waste Heat Boilers A BHEL, ISGEC, THERMAL SYSTEM (less than

50 tph capacity), THERMAX
14.2. Steam Turbines (For turbo- A BHEL, MAN Energy Solutions, SIEMENS
blower)
14.3. Steam Turbines (For power A BHEL, MAN Energy Solutions, SIEMENS,
generation) SKODA, TRIVENI TURBINE
14.4. Auxiliary Steam Turbines A KEPL, FORBES, TRIVENI TURBINE
(Range less than 1000 kW)
14.5. Gas Turbines A ALFA LAVAL, ALSTOM, BHEL, GE,

MITSUBISHI, SIEMENS
14.6. Top Pressure recovery Turbine A KAWASAKI, Mitsui E&S Machinery Co.,
MAN Energy Solutions
14.7. Condenser (Water) A ALSTHOM, BHEL, GE GODAVARI, MAZDA,

SIEMENS, UNIVERSAL HEAT EXCHANGER
14.8. De-aerator A BHEL, ION EXCHANGE, ISGEC, THERMAX
14.9. PRDU A BHEL, CHEMTROL, FORBES MARSHAL,

THERMAX, KOSO FLUID CONTROL,
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT

MARCH 2022
37
SECTION-F

No.
14.10. HP / LP Dosing A ASIA LMI, ENPRO, META CHEM, VK

PUMPS
14.11. Soot Blowers A BERGMAN, BHEL, SISTON
14.12. HP Heater & LP Heater A BHEL, ISGEC, SIEMENS, THERMAX
14.13. Steam Traps B DRAYTON, FORBES MARSHALL, GREAVES,

THERMAX, UNIKLINGER, ESCO, UNISON
VALVES, PENANT ENGG, ECON STEEL
15. POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT
15.1. ESP ------
Capacity < 5,00,000 m3/h A ANDREW YULE, BATLIBOI

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGG, BHEL, ELEX, FL
SMIDTH, GEA PROCESSING, HAMON
RESEARCH COTTRELL, K. C COTTRELL
INDIA, RIECO INDUSTRIES, SOIL & ENVIRO
INDUSTRIES, THERMAX INDIA
Capacity > 5,00,000 m3/h A BHEL, ELEX, FL SMIDTH, GEA PROCESSING,

K. C COTTRELL INDIA, THERMAX
15.2. BAG FILTERS ------
Capacity < 2,50,000 m3/h A ANDREW YULE, APC SYSTEMS, BATLIBOI

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGG., BEVCON
WAYORS, CK AIRTECH, CLAIR ENGINEERS,
F. HARLEY, GLOBAL ENVIRO SYSTEM,
RIECO INDUSTRIES, SOIL & ENVIRO
INDUSTRIES, THERMAX
Capacity > 2,50,000 m3/h A ANDREW YULE, BATLIBOI

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGG., BOLDROCCHI,
RIECO INDUSTRIES, THERMAX

MARCH 2022
38
SECTION-F

No.
15.3. DUST SUPPRESSION B CHEMTROL SAMIL, DUST SOLUTION

SYSTEM, F. HARLEY, KAVERI
SYSTEM
ULTRAPOLYMERS, SPRAYING SYSTEMS,
TPS INFRASTRUCTURE
15.4. CYCLONES AND MULTI B AEROTO BOLDROCCHI, AIR TECHNICO,

CYCLONES ANDREW YULE, BATLIBOI
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING, F.
HARLEY, RAJDEEP ENGG, RIECO
INDUSTRIES, THERMAX
16. AIR CONDITIONING, REFRIGERATION & VENTILATION
16.1. Window/Tower/Split AC/ B BLUE STAR, CARRIER, DAIKIN, FEDDERS

Ductable Split AC LLYOD, HITACHI, MITSUBISHI, SAMSUNG,
VOLTAS, ZAMIL
16.2. Packaged Chillers A BLUE STAR, CARRIER, DAIKIN, DUNHUM

BUSH HITACHI, TRANE, VOLTAS, YORK
16.3. Package AC B ACCEL, BLUE STAR, DAIKIN, VOLTAS
16.4. Precision Air Conditioning A CLIMAVENETA, EMERSON, STULLZ-CHSPL

(INDIA)
16.5. Cooling Tower (ACVS) B ADVANCE COOLING TOWERS, ARMEC,

DBR, FRICK INDIA, GAMMON INDIA,
HIMGIRI, MIHIR ENGINEERS, PAHARPUR,
SOUTHERN COOLING TOWERS,VOLTAS,
WET BULB
16.6. Air Handling Unit B DAIKIN, EDGETECH, ETA, ROOTS

COOLING, VOLTAS, ZAMIL
16.7. Tube Axial Fan B ABLE AIR-O TECH, AEROVENT, ANDREW

YULE, CARYAIRE, DUSTVEN, EFE,
FLOWLINK, HUMIDIN, KHAITAN, KRUGER,
MAXFLOW, MESINA, SH ENGG.,
TUBOFLOW

MARCH 2022
39
SECTION-F

No.
16.8. Panel Filter For Air B ABB, ACCO, BHARAT, C.DOCTOR,

CADILLAC, EFE, FLOW LINK, FMI, GEC,
PUROLATOR, WFI
16.9. Air Washer B AIRLINK, EFE , HUMIDIN, MARCO,

MESINA, ROOTS COOLING , SYMPHONY
16.10. Propeller Fan B ABB, ACCO, AEROVENT, DUVENT,

INDVENT FANS, MESINA, SH ENGG.,
TUBOFLOW, VENTURA
16.11. Roof Extractors B AIRLINK, ALMONARD, ANDREW YULE, C.

DOCTOR, CARYAIRE, EFE, FLOWLINK,
HUMIDIN, KRUGER, VENTURA
16.12. Vapor Absorption Machine A BLUE STAR, CARRIER, KIRLOSKAR,

THERMAX, VOLTAS
17. OXYGEN & CRYOGENIC SERVICE
17.1. Cryogenic Pump A CRYOPUMP, CRYOSTAR, ICL
17.2. Oxygen Filter / Y-Strainer A BEE, BLUESTAR, CARBERN, CLASSIC,

Filteration Engineers India Pvt. Ltd.,
NOVINTEC, ORSEAL, SHIPHAM, VEE
17.3. Non Ferrous Control Valves A BLACKHALL, FISHER, LEEDS, METSO,

SAMSON, SEVERN GLOCON
17.4. Non Ferrous Self-regulating A BALEY BRIKETT, BROADY, FISHER,

Valves SAMSON, SEVERN GLOCON, TYCO
17.5. Non Ferrous Valves (Gate, B CRESCENT, FLUIDLINE, LEADER,

Globe, Ball) - < DN50 MICROFINISH
17.6. Non Ferrous Valves (Gate, A BESTOBELL, BROOKSBANK, FISHER,

Globe, Ball) - > DN50 HEROSE, LEEDS, MACK, METSO, SAMSON,
SEVERN GLOCON, SHIPHAM

MARCH 2022
40
SECTION-F

No.
17.7. Safety Relief Valve A ARCA, BAILEY BRIKETT,

BROADY,CROSSBY, DARLING MUESEO,
FARRIS, IL, JN MARSHALL, KEYSTONE,
KUNKLE, SEBIM, SEMPELL, TYCO
17.8. Vaporizers A CRYOQUIP, ICL, INOX, IWI CRYOGENICS,

SHELL & TUBE
18. FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
18.1. Portable Fire Extinguishers B DEFLAME, FIRE SHIELD, FIREX, GUNNEBO,

INTIME FIRE, KANADIA FYR FYTER,
MINIMAX, NITIN, SAFEX, SUPREMEX,
ZENITH
18.2. Fire hydrant B ASCO, GUNNEBO, MINIMAX, NEWAGE,

NITIN,STEELCO, ZENITH
19. REHEATING FURNACE A ANDRITZ, ENCON, FIVESTEIN,

HYPERTHERM, TECHNOTHERM, TENOVA,
(Pusher/Rotary)
WESMAN
20. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
20.1. Surge Tanks B ANUP ENGG., PERFECT ENGG., SAKTHI

HITECH, ZENITH ERECTORS
20.2. Oil Skimmer B HI-TECH ENGRS, JVM ENG., POTENTIAL

ENGG, PREMIER OIL SKIMMER
20.3. Traveling Water Screen B MACMET, MAHINDRA ASTECH, McGALE,

OTOKLIN, SWAMINA INT., TRIVENI
20.4. Electrical Heat Tracer B NICROPAD, RAYCHEM, THERMON,

THERMOPAD

MARCH 2022
41
SECTION-G
COMPUTERIZATION &
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
COMPUTERIZATION &
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
SECTION-G

1. IT EQUIPMENT
1.1. Desktop PC B DELL, HP, LENOVO
1.2. Industrial PC / B ADVANTECH, DELL, PANASONIC,

Semi-Rugged SIEMENS
Laptop
1.3. Laptop B DELL, HP, LENOVO
1.4. Server A DELL, HPE, FUJITSU, LENOVO/IBM,

ORACLE/SUN
1.5. Network Switch A CISCO, DELL, EXTREME, HP/HPE,
(IT, Office) RUCKUS
1.6. Network Switch A ADVANTECH, CISCO, HIRSCHMANN,
(Industrial) ROCKWELL, SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS
1.7. UTM / Firewall A CHECKPOINT, CISCO, FORTINET,
JUNIPER, SOPHOS, PALO ALTO
1.8. Passive network B DIGILINK/SCHNEIDER, MOLEX,
components / ROSENBERGER, SYSTIMAX, TYCO
accessories (AMP)
1.9. UTP cable B DIGILINK/SCHNEIDER, ELKAY,
MOLEX, SYSTIMAX, TELELINK,
TYCO(AMP), UNIVERSAL
1.10. FO cable B BELDEN, DIGILINK/SCHNEIDER,
FINOLEX, LUCENT, MOLEX,
STARLITE, SYSTIMAX, TYCO(AMP),
ROSENBERGER
1.11. Data storage A DELL/ EMC, FUJITSU, HP/HPE,
system HITACHI, IBM, NETAPP, ORACLE
2. CCTV SYSTEM
2.1. CCTV system B BOSCH, CP PLUS, HONEYWELL,
PELCO, PANASONIC, SAMSUNG,
SEIMENS, SONY, TYCO
2.2. Led display (40” or B HITACHI, LG, PANASONIC,
more) SAMSUNG, SONY
2.3. Video wall B DELTA, HITACHI, LG, PANASONIC,
SAMSUNG, SONY

MARCH 2022
42
Centre for Engineering & Technology
Ranchi-834002
Indicative Implementation Schedule Annexure 2.1.9.2-1
TIME →
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ACTIVITY ↓
STAGE II APPROVAL OF THE PROJECT (ZERO DATE)
PLACEMENT OF ORDER AND SIGNING OF CONTRACT

PREPARATION, SUBMISSION & APPROVAL OF BASIC
ENGG. DRAWINGS
PREPARATION, SUBMISSION & APPROVAL OF DETAIL

ENGG. DRAWINGS
MANUFACTURE, FABRICATION & SUPPLY OF

EQUIPMENT AT SITE
INSTALLATION OF NEW EQUIPMENT INCLUDING,

ELECTRICAL, AUTOMATION, UTILITIES, STRUCTURAL,
CIVIL WORK, ETC. MODIFICATION OF EXISTING
SYSTEM AS PER REQUIREMENT
TESTING & COMMISSIONING
CHASNALLA WASHERY ANNEXURE 2.1.9.2-1 CET/25/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2
UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT PAGE 1 of 1

SCHEDULE – 1.8-1
DECLARATION OF SITE VISIT

(To be filled up by the Bidder)
I, hereby, declare that I have visited the site to understand the site conditions, and
acquainted myself with atmosphere prevalent therein. I have also understood the
extent of total works involved for this package.
Signature of the Bidder:

Seal of company Name:
Designation:
CHASNALLA WASHERY SCHEDULE – 1.8-1 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

SCHEDULE – 1.8-2
LIST OF EXCLUSIONS
Sl. No. Reference clause of TS Details of Exclusions Reasons
Signature of the Bidder

Seal of company Name
Designation

SCHEDULE – 1.8-3
LIST OF DEVIATIONS
Sl. No. Reference clause of TS Details of Deviations Reasons

Designation

SCHEDULE – 1.8-4
LIST OF RECOMMENDED SPARES FOR

TWO YEARS NORMAL OPERATION
(To be filled by the Bidder)
Bidder shall recommend and tabulate below the list of additional spare partsfor
two years trouble free operation. Additional sheet of like format may be used if
necessary.
Sl. Name of Sub Description of Items Quantity

No. Assembly recommended
Seal of Company Signature of the Bidder

Name:
Designation:

SCHEDULE – 1.8-5
LIST OF COMMISSIONING SPARES

(To be filled by the Bidder)
Bidder shall tabulate below item wise the list of commissioning spares necessary
for the equipment offered. Additional sheet of like format may be used if
necessary.
Sl.No. Name of Sub Assembly Description of Quantity

items recommended
Seal of Company Signature of the Bidder

Name:
Designation

SCHEDULE – 1.8-6
LISTS OF SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES
Sl. No. Description Quantity

Designation

SCHEDULE – 1.8-7
LIST OF FIRST FILL OF OILS, LUBRICANTS AND CHEMICALS TO BE SUPPLIED

BY BIDDER

Designation

SCHEDULE – 1.8-8
LIST OF CONSUMABLES TO BE SUPPLIED BY BIDDER

Designation

SCHEDULE – 1.8-9
DETAILS OF AUTHORISED PERSON OF BIDDER DURING TENDER

EVALUATION
1. Name of Project :
2. Tender No. :
3. Name & Address of Bidder :
4. Name of authorized person (TECHNICAL) :
5. Email address :
6. Mobile No. :
7. Name of alternate authorised person (TECH) :
8. Email address :
9. Mobile No. :
10. Name of authorized person (COMMERCIAL) :
11. Email address :
12. Mobile No. :
13. Name of alternate authorised person (COMM) :
14. Email address :
15. Mobile No. :
Authorised Signatory

SCHEDULE – 1.8-10
REQUIREMENT OF CONSTRUCTION WATER & POWER

Designation

SCHEDULE – 1.8-11
LIST OF IMPORTED ITEMS

Designation
CHASNALLA WASHERY SCHEDULE –1.8-11 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

SCHEDULE – 1.8-12
ON-SITE TRAINING PROPOSED BY THE BIDDER (IN MANDAYS)
Description No. of mandays

On-site training proposed by the bidder

Designation
CHASNALLA WASHERY SCHEDULE –1.8-12 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

SCHEDULE – 2.2.1-1
DETAIL OF PROPOSED TECHNOLOGICAL EQUIPMENT (FOR BETTER

UNDERSTANDING OF THE OFFER)
A. Slurry Thickener
Feed Material
Feed rate (m3/h)
Solid Content (g/l)
Thickener diameter
(m)
Slope of thickener
(degree)
Duty Torque (Nm)
Speed of rake (rpm)
Drive motor rating
(kW)
Lifting /hydraulics
motor rating (kW)
Lift of rake (mm)
B. Flotation Cell
Fine coal handling capacity
(tph)
Solid content in feed to
flotation cell (g/l)
No. of banks
No. of cells per bank
Volume of each cell (m3)
Residence time (minute)
Type of collector
Type of frother
Other utility /reagent
requirements
b) Air (Nm3/h)
c) Specific consumption of
collector (kg/t of fine coal
feed)
d) Specific consumption
of frother (kg/t of fine
CHASNALLA WASHERY SCHEDULE –2.2.1-1 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

coal feed)
Power consumption (kW)
C. Press Filter
Normal and Maximum

capacity of press filter
a) On dry solid basis (tph)
b) On feed slurrybasis(m3/h)
Feed concentration (g/l)
Moisture content in
dewatered product (%)
Recovery of solids in
dewatered product (%)
Power consumption (kW /t
of feed)
CHASNALLA WASHERY SCHEDULE –2.2.1-1 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

m
︶
6
X
m
6
3
︵
-
H
J
R m
︶
5
O X
SY m
5
NE2
1
︵
AV- -
︶
ENC H
J
LOC
CC
m
︶
5
X
︵
m
5
2
︵
-
H
J
R
R SO
O TY
SY CE1
EV-
︶
NE1
AV- JNC
︶
ENC EOR
LOC RC
CC
︵
G
N
I
D
L
I
U
B
T
S1
N
A
L
P
N
O
I
T
A
T
O
L
F
W
E
N
Y
R
R
U
L
S
HR
PE
TN
5E
4K
WIC
EH
NT
W
RA
ER
DA
NP
UT
SM
E2
I
T
I R
L
I O
CF
AT
FC
DED
EJE
SOE
ORF
PPL
OISA
RHO
PTC
6 5 4 3 2 1
CET RN 4689 CC3 00 001 R=1
29 Elevation of proposed flotation building
23
R1
,5
D R2 R1
D
8
Hydrocyclones
5
12
R2 R1 3.5
R3
Plan at GL (Storage tanks) Banks of flotation cells
12
19
4,5
36
4
18
Filter Press (2 nos.)
8
19
C C
3,5
1
Plan of 1st Floor (Filter Press)
Storage tanks for slurry and reagents
8
18
1
4
4,5
6 2
23
29
Dimensions shown are in metre
Plan of 2nd Floor (Flotation cells)
B B
R1,75
FOR TS PURPOSE ONLY
,
Plan of 3rd Floor (Hydrocyclones) CENTRE FOR ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY, RANCHI
BOKARO STEEL PLANT
CLEARANCE
A DRAWN Arun Gopinath CHASNALLA COAL WASHERY
SECTION BY DATE
DESIGNED Arun Gopinath TENTATIVE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT IN
PROPOSED FLOTATION PLANT BUILDING
CHECKED K.P.Jayakumar
1 31.05.2022 Drawing revised due to change in dewatering scheme
BY APPD. APPROVED S.Bhattacharjee SCALE DRG. NO. CET RN 4689 CC3 00 001 REV
NO. DATE REMARKS DRG. NO. DETAILS
NTS
REVISIONS REF. DRAWINGS
DATE: 25.08.2020 SIZE A 3 SHEET 01 OF 01 R=
6 5 4 3
File Name: 4689 001

4 TS 4689 Fine Coal Circuit R2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 TS 4689 Fine Coal Circuit R2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CHASNALLA COAL WASHERY

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT FOR YIELD

STEEL AUTHORITY OF INDIA LIMITED

JUNE 2022 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

Chapter No. Description Page No.

1 Introduction 1.1 - 1.4

2 Scope of Work 2.1 - 2.31

3 Technical Specification 3.1- 3.143

4. Commissioning and Performance Guarantee 4.1-4.4

PACKAGE LEADER(PL) TASK FORCE LEADER(TFL) HOD (PL)

ARUN GOPINATH ARUN GOPINATH SALIL BHATTACHARJEE

CHASNALLA WASHERY CONTENTS CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT PAGE 1 OF 4

Annexure No. Description No. of Pages

2.1.3-1 List of Acceptable Makes of equipment and 56

2.1.9.2-1 Indicative Implementation Schedule 1

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 2 OF 4 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

Schedule No. Description No. of Pages

1.8-5 List of commissioning spares 1

1.8-8 List of consumables to be supplied by

1.8-9 Details of authorised person of bidder

1.8-10 Requirement of construction water &

1.8-11 List of imported items 1

2.2.1-1 Detail of proposed technological

CHASNALLA WASHERY CONTENTS CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT PAGE 3 OF 4

Sl. No. Drawing No. Description

2 CET RN 4689 CC2 00 001, R=2 Layout of Chasnalla Washery

3 CET RN 4689 CC1 00 002, R=0 Process flow diagram of existing

4 CET RN 4689 CC3 00 001, R=1 Tentative general arrangement of

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 4 OF 4 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 1.2 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 1.3 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 1.4 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 2.3 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 2.4 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 2.5 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

i) New flotation unit of minimum 75tph capacity consisting of

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

i) One filter press of minimum 40tph capacity along with its

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 2.8 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

Tentative list of new equipment envisaged for the project:

Sl. Equipment/Facility Qty Min. Remark/Application

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

6 Flotation feed pump 2 nos. 900m3/h For pumping (-)

CHASNALLA WASHERY PAGE 2.10 CET/02/RN/4689/TS/CC/01/R=2

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT

i) To enable collection of samples for analysis, the bidder shall have to

j) The horizontal pumps shall be mounted on a common base plate

k) The design of the pump shall provide no chance of cavitations or air

UPGRADATION OF FINE COAL CIRCUIT